Platform Info Quick Start

Welcome to the amara Help Center

Use this guide to explore asset, risk, assessment, supplier, training and document workflows. Ask amara can help with supported questions about authorised information.

Start with the task you need to complete

Use the linked task cards to start with the job you need to do, not an assumed permission.

Colours organise help topics and instruction stages; they do not show live application status.

Review areas for scope, evidence, ownership and deployment decisions

Review the scope, evidence, responsibilities and operating boundary before relying on a proposal or configured service.

How to use this help guide

Where to start

Help Center → topic navigation, task cards or Search documentation

Help is reference material. Application access and each action’s permissions remain separate.

Before you begin

Know the task and, for existing work, the owning module and record ID.

Step-by-step

  1. Start with the job

    Choose a coloured task card or a topic in the navigation. For example, use Assets to register a resource, Document Dialog to revise a policy, or Training to continue assigned learning. Card colours organise the guide; they are not live statuses.

  2. Search for a concrete action

    Use Search documentation with an action such as “register asset”, “Insert Table”, “renew certificate” or “supplier assurance”. Read the result’s topic/title before opening it. Search the procedure body as well as its heading.

    Find a module or task

  3. Check the procedure’s entry and preparation

    Read Where to start, the access note and Before you begin. If the application does not offer that action, check your role, current record stage and configuration rather than another person’s credentials.

  4. Follow the action, then check its result

    Use the numbered procedure and any named field reference. Reopen the exact record/version afterwards. A prefilled form, preview, query answer or external ticket status is not a saved business decision.

    Understand the handoff before continuing

  5. Follow related work explicitly

    Use the related-guide links to distinguish a saved relationship, manual evidence citation, navigation and consequential provider action. Complete approval or verification in its owning workflow.

Check the result

A relevant procedure, a known source record and a checkable next action.

Current limits and common mistakes

This copy is an offline review draft. The application’s Help bridge opens maintained external Help; it does not publish or adopt local changes automatically. Documentation describes reviewed implementation, not exhaustive UAT or legal certification.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Choose your starting point

Start with the work your role permits: register an Asset, review a risk, open an assessment or continue an assigned training course. For software exposure, open Vulnerability Assurance when it is enabled.

Keep the scope clear

The modules and integrations available to you depend on your role and deployment. Before using an external connector or AI provider, check its data boundary and your organisation's rules.

How Modules Connect

Shared records provide context across asset, risk, supplier and assessment work. A link between records does not mean that every score or approval changes automatically.

Connections have different effects

Explicit stored actions and manual evidence reuse have different effects; follow the owning guide.

Where to start

Overview → How Modules Connect

Each destination has its own account/module/stage requirements.

Before you begin

Identify the source record and the decision you need to support.

Step-by-step

  1. Start with an identifiable resource

    An Asset is an inventory record. A Supplier profile is a dependency record. A software list and its installed locations are VA scope. Keep their IDs and dates; similar names alone do not prove a saved relationship.

  2. Use the explicit stored relationship

    Link a Supplier through the Asset’s offered control, or select an existing Asset for a CIA evaluation. Verify the saved relationship. Do not infer that organisational ISO/C5/EU/NIS2 assessments are automatically joined to every Asset.

    Supplier and CIA links on an Asset

  3. Reuse evidence deliberately

    Cite a particular document version, policy section, Supplier assurance result or learning record in the assessment’s offered Evidence/Notes. This is manual evidence reuse unless the procedure names a stored association.

  4. Separate technical observations and decisions

    Scanning records observations. VA evaluates software/CVE/location relevance and verification. A Risk represents business exposure with separate Treatment and Acceptance work. None is universally created or closed by the others.

    VA evidence and verification

  5. Treat provider arrows as actions

    Create Jira Ticket can write external work; Confluence linking can stamp a page and publication can update its body. Querying, navigating or citing a key is not the same as those actions.

  6. Reopen after the handoff

    Confirm local owner, linked identity, status and time. Revisit the affected assessment/decision explicitly after later changes; scores, approvals and closure do not propagate universally.

Check the result

A trace whose stored links and human decisions can be distinguished.

Current limits and common mistakes

The map is orientation, not one automatic workflow or evidence graph. Reports reflect their own current or captured populations.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Diagrams and background

Follow the evidence

Use the links in a record to review related information. Configured Jira and Confluence actions connect permitted work with those external services; confirm external writes before proceeding.

Vulnerability work

Vulnerability Assurance uses software lists and individual CVE findings. Guided Tasks group related work for review while preserving each finding's decisions. A resolved ticket or a scanner non-detection does not by itself close the finding.

Separate framework reviews supported by shared record context

Shared records can support several reviews, while each framework keeps its own scope, requirements and decision.

Platform at a Glance

amara provides asset and risk management, security assessments, NIS2 workflows, supplier management, training, document tools, Ask amara, administration and security scanning. Vulnerability Assurance is available when enabled.

What each part of the application records

Each work area records a different kind of evidence. A save is not independent assurance.

Like-for-like review of platform, implementation, document and support costs

Compare written offers using the same scope, responsibilities and lifecycle assumptions; this guide promises no fixed savings.

Explore the actual scope

Use the sidebar and module dashboards to see the work available to your role. Reports and exports belong to the relevant module; options vary by workflow.

Discuss deployment and terms

Ask amara about the intended deployment, enabled integrations, operational requirements and current commercial terms. This guide does not quote prices or promise an implementation timetable.

Managed, customer-operated, appliance-style and isolated deployment profiles

Available components, responsibilities, support and commercial terms are agreed for the selected deployment.

Where to start

Overview → Find a module or task

Visible modules depend on roles and enabled deployment features.

Before you begin

Decide whether you need a business record, reference, query, output or administrative change.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose inventory or exposure work

    Use Assets for resource facts, Suppliers for dependencies/approval/assurance, VA for software/CVE/location work, and Security Scanning for authorised technical checks. These are distinct evidence types.

  2. Choose the decision workflow

    Use CIA for an existing Asset’s protection impact; organisational assessments for their stated scope; Risk for business exposure, Treatment and formal Acceptance. Use the individual guide rather than a generic Create/Edit/Delete assumption.

    Choose the assessment

  3. Choose document and people evidence

    Document Dialog saves authored document versions. Information Security Policy is a reference library. Training records learning and course certificates. Reading or generating content does not perform control implementation.

  4. Use supporting surfaces intentionally

    Ask retrieves supported facts or drafts analysis. Integrations provide scoped reads and explicit provider actions. Admin controls access/configuration. Reports explain selected recorded evidence; none is a universal approval console.

  5. Agree operating boundaries separately

    For deployment, support, permitted providers, recovery and commercial terms, use the responsible implementation team and agreed operating plan. A module count is not an implementation, coverage or price guarantee.

    Deployment responsibilities

Check the result

The appropriate task guide and a correctly bounded expected result.

Current limits and common mistakes

Commercial diagrams are optional planning context, not a fixed savings or delivery promise.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Data Flow Explained

Asset, risk and supplier records can provide context for related workflows. Review the linked record and its current status before making a decision.

Stored Asset–CIA link, dashed manual assessment context and separate risk review

The dashed Asset-to-assessment connection means manual context review, not a saved Asset link or automatic questionnaire scope. CIA and Risk decisions remain separate.

Where to start

Overview → Data Flow; then the originating record

Use the owning procedure’s permissions for any write.

Before you begin

Keep source ID, selected version/run, scope and time at each stage.

Step-by-step

  1. Capture the fact in its own record

    Create or update the intended Asset, Supplier, installation or assessment response. Reopen it and keep the saved ID; a form that has only been prefilled has not created that evidence.

  2. Identify the evidence precisely

    For a scan retain Scan ID and coverage; for a document retain Document ID/version; for a provider result retain its issue key/Page ID and observation time. A name or undated screenshot is not the same identity.

    Record versions, filters and time

  3. Make the owning decision

    Use the actual CIA review, assessment response, VA relevance/reviewer, Risk Treatment validation or Acceptance action. The source observation supports the decision but does not make it automatically.

  4. Check the result of a handoff

    Verify a saved Supplier association or external reference separately from a typed citation. A resolved Jira issue is a provider status, not universal Risk closure or VA verification.

    Verify the provider/local chain

  5. Review changes and stale evidence

    Reassess the relevant owning response after a policy revision, changed software or expired exception. Current reports can change; an old VA ReportRun or selected DocumentVersion stays captured evidence.

Check the result

A factual record → identified evidence → explicit decision → owned follow-up chain.

Current limits and common mistakes

Illustration: Asset A has CIA evaluation C; assessment I cites document D/version 2; Risk R cites an observed gap. The latter citation is not a claim of a universal stored Asset-to-framework or document-to-Risk foreign key.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Diagrams and background

Assessment evidence

An assessment records responses and evidence for its own scope. Relevant evidence may support another assessment, but each framework's requirements and gaps need a separate review.

External evidence

Enabled connectors can return Jira, Confluence, scanner or cloud evidence. Check the source, timestamp and permissions; a status update is not a substitute for the required approval.

Technical Architecture

For technical teams who need the deployment boundary. amara is a web application with governed records, document retrieval and configurable intelligence processing. Outbound traffic depends on the deployment and enabled services; it can include provider startup/assistant operations, model and document services, connectors and public-intelligence retrieval. Ask the responsible operator to verify the actual traffic, controls, components and resource sizing for that environment.

Separate records, retrieval and external services

This map separates source boundaries; it is not proof of the selected deployment’s configuration.

Stack Overview

LayerCustomer-facing descriptionPurpose
Web applicationDeployment-managed application servicesApplication modules and configured access controls
RecordsDeployment-managed data storeGoverned records and audit evidence
Document retrievalConfigured document servicesSupported policy and procedure retrieval
Intelligence processingConfigured by deploymentGrounded analysis and drafting where enabled
Network boundaryDeployment-managed gateway and access controlsVerify inbound access controls and outbound destinations for the selected environment.
OperationsImplementation-specific runtimeMaintenance, backup and recovery procedures

Layered Security Controls

Defense-in-Depth Security Layers

Layered controls: network boundary, encrypted transport, strong authentication, access control, audit evidence and governed records.

Configured authentication checks

Deployment-dependent certificate and sign-in controls, optional MFA and best-effort audit recording

Use the configured local or Microsoft sign-in path and any required additional check. These are not three guaranteed independent factors; successful sign-in does not grant every module or write action.

AI Architecture

Ask amara Pro reference pipeline; Base, grounded and public routes differ

Ask amara Pro reference pipeline, not the universal Ask route. Stages depend on configuration and route; privacy checks apply to external Pro processing and audit recording is best-effort. Base, grounded and public paths differ.

Resource requirements

Resource sizing depends on the number of users, retained records, document corpus, enabled modules, integrations, scan workload, availability requirements and processing configuration. Agree sizing, monitoring, backup, recovery and update procedures with the implementation team before production use.

Where to start

Overview → Architecture; Admin → System Settings for the offered inventory

Deployment operators own runtime/configuration; ordinary users follow approved access and provider policies.

Before you begin

Identify the environment and processing route you actually use.

Step-by-step

  1. Locate the record and storage boundary

    The web application uses configured record and document services. Confirm persistence, database and document-body storage with the operator; a diagram does not verify their backup or availability.

  2. Separate authentication paths

    Local Email/Password, local TOTP/recovery, Microsoft sign-in and a configured access certificate are separate mechanisms. Do not read the three-factor illustration as a universal login sequence.

  3. Identify the Ask path

    The serial Compliance Gate → Smart Router → Privacy Shield illustration describes Ask amara Pro. Base, grounded data and policy retrieval paths differ; follow their route/provider instructions before submitting sensitive material.

    Base versus Pro routing

  4. Identify deliberate external traffic

    Enabled Jira, Confluence, cloud queries, public intelligence, scanner and model services have their own scopes. A configured connector does not establish that every request is permitted or successful.

  5. Confirm operating responsibility

    Agree updates, monitoring, retained audit evidence, recovery and provider data handling with the implementation team. Inspect masked configuration presence without copying secrets.

    Recovery evidence

Check the result

A deployment-specific understanding of records, identity and supporting services.

Current limits and common mistakes

An architecture view is not security, residency, resilience or legal certification. Resource sizing and actual enabled components remain environment-specific.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Deployment Options

amara can be deployed in a managed, customer-operated or appliance-style environment. The available integrations, operational controls, data boundary and commercial terms depend on the selected deployment and agreement.

Agree deployment responsibilities before using a label

Agree the environment and responsibilities with its operator. This is planning, not a deployment wizard.

Deployment Profiles

ProfileOperating modelBest forPlanning point
ManagedProvider-operated environmentTeams that need a managed serviceAgree support, data and integration boundaries
Customer-operatedYour approved infrastructureTeams with their own operating modelSize, harden and maintain the environment
Appliance-stylePre-configured environmentControlled or restricted environmentsAgree update and support procedures
Air-gappedIsolated operating designEnvironments with no enabled network connectorsPlan offline maintenance and evidence exchange

Deployment Architecture

Illustrative Deployment Boundary

Deployment boundary: web application → governed records and document services → configured intelligence processing

Implementation components are deployment-specific. The customer-facing architecture is a web application, governed records, approved document services, configurable intelligence processing and explicitly enabled connectors. Do not treat a Help diagram as a production build specification.

Network requirements

Network requirements depend on the selected deployment and enabled services. An isolated environment must not enable networked connectors, public-intelligence refresh or remote scanner access without an approved boundary.

TLS / HTTPS Configuration

Use encrypted transport and an approved certificate policy. Confirm the available certificate and strong-authentication options with your implementation team.

Backup Strategy

Agree the backup frequency, retention, encryption, recovery objective and restoration test process for the selected deployment before production use.

Plan the rollout

Set up the approved environment, organisation settings, access roles and operational procedures with your implementation team before onboarding users.

Where to start

Overview → Deployment; responsible implementation team

This is a planning reference, not an in-application deployment selector.

Before you begin

Prepare users, permitted data/processing boundary, support expectations and recovery needs.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose an agreed operating model

    Managed, customer-operated and appliance-style describe who operates the environment. An isolated/air-gapped design is a separately agreed boundary, not a switch in this Help page.

  2. Name the owners

    Record responsibility for accounts, data, database/configuration, persisted document bodies, updates, monitoring, support and incidents. Do not leave recovery to an assumed generic provider.

  3. List permitted connections

    Identify model routes, Jira/Confluence, cloud evidence, scanners and public-intelligence refresh. An isolated design cannot depend on live external services without changing its approved boundary.

    Processing boundaries

  4. Define evidence and recovery

    Agree capture scope, frequency/retention, integrity checks, recovery objectives and an isolated restore test. Include document storage, corpus and provider-state exclusions explicitly.

    Recovery planning

  5. Verify before broader use

    Use the selected environment’s approved access, storage, output and recovery checks. Retain unresolved gaps and named acceptance responsibilities rather than a fixed implementation timetable.

Check the result

An operating plan with accountable owners and checkable verification criteria.

Current limits and common mistakes

Profile names establish no price, certification, legal approval or guaranteed rollout duration. This draft performs no deployment or configuration change.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Quick Start

Sign in with an authorised account and review the modules visible in your sidebar. Ask an administrator about missing access rather than assuming a feature is unavailable.

A small first journey with separate saved outcomes

Check each saved result before continuing; the steps do not automatically run the next workflow.

Where to start

Application → Asset Management, Assessments and the relevant follow-up module

Use your own approved account and the separate permissions for each chosen action.

Before you begin

Choose one legitimate resource and its responsible owner; do not run a trial against an unauthorised target.

Step-by-step

  1. Register the resource

    Follow Registering an Asset with its real name/category/status and useful ownership/context. Save, reopen the same Asset and retain its ID before continuing.

    Register and reopen an Asset

  2. Classify its business impact

    Select that existing Asset for CIA. Record rationale and complete the applicable review stages. Creating the inventory record does not create or approve CIA automatically.

    CIA procedure

  3. Record the actual dependency

    Review or create the intended Supplier and use the Asset’s Link Supplier action where needed. Verify the relationship type and both identities; Supplier approval and assurance are separate.

    Supplier relationship

  4. Collect only the required evidence

    If software/exposure evidence is needed, use reviewed intake or an authorised scan through its detailed guide. A CVE mention or scanner observation is not yet a confirmed affected installation.

  5. Own the follow-up

    Create the separate Risk/Treatment or VA work when justified. Use the offered responsibility/date fields and preserve verification. Formal Acceptance is a deliberate exception, not remediation.

    Create an explicit Risk

  6. Review the chain

    Reopen each saved identity and record missing evidence or decisions. Retain the exact version/run/time in an evidence index rather than claiming the whole application is ready from one journey.

Check the result

One understandable chain with saved records, explicit decisions and visible gaps.

Current limits and common mistakes

This is a suggested sequence, not a timed wizard or automatic chain. Optional providers/scans are not prerequisites for every onboarding case.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Diagrams and background
Illustrative onboarding stages from deployment through review

An illustrative onboarding sequence; prerequisites, duration, deliverables and acceptance are agreed separately.

Create a useful starting record

In Asset Management, register an asset you are responsible for and complete the required fields. In Risk Management, record a relevant risk and link the available asset context. Use the applicable assessment module to review your security posture.

Continue with a clear next action

Review the saved record and its evidence. Assign the responsible owner or proceed to the next available workflow step. Ask amara can help retrieve supported information, subject to your role.

Your First Login

After signing in, use the sidebar to open a module available to your role. The application supports English and German; use its language control to choose.

Sign-in establishes a session, not every module permission

Authentication, application roles and workflow-stage authority are distinct checks.

Where to start

Application login; account menu for Profile / Logout

Use the account and login method supplied by your administrator. No active self-registration is offered.

Before you begin

Have your own Email/Password or approved Microsoft identity and, when required, your private second factor.

Step-by-step

  1. Use the local form correctly

    Enter the required valid Email and Password, then Login. This is Email, not Username; there is no offered remember-me control. Correct format/required errors. For unknown/inactive/expired accounts, wrong credentials or authentication failure, use the administrator’s recovery process rather than another identity.

  2. Use Microsoft only when configured

    Hybrid mode can show Sign in with Microsoft; Entra-only mode hides the local form. Missing service/configuration or an identity not registered/allowed requires administrator help. Normal Logout does not necessarily end Microsoft SSO.

  3. Complete the factor branch

    An enrolled local account can be sent to Verify; a required-unenrolled account must finish setup. Pending-login verification or required-enrolment challenges can expire after five minutes. This is not a universal timeout for MFA setup when you are already signed in. The shared required-setup hook can still apply after Microsoft sign-in; do not assume a blanket exemption.

    Private MFA enrolment and recovery

  4. Orient without changing records

    Use module navigation and the account menu. EN/DE changes session language; theme and compact-sidebar choices are browser preferences. Sidebar tooltips help identify collapsed controls; presentation changes do not approve work.

  5. Choose ordinary account or synthetic demo deliberately

    Where configured, read the demo notice and select its checkbox to enable Accept & Enter Demo. A short press enters the synthetic demo; use no customer or sensitive data. To reach ordinary Login, press and hold that same entry control for five seconds, then use your authorised account. This grants no Admin permission. The separate five-step tour offers Back/Next/Skip/Finish/Escape and records browser-local orientation, not account/module completion.

  6. Open existing work first

    Confirm account/module/stage and use the owning list before creating records. Missing controls can reflect roles, read-only status or configuration.

    Resolve access

  7. Leave through account menu → Logout

    This ends local app login and clears current-tab Ask memory. It does not erase business records, provider conversation/history or necessarily Microsoft SSO. Use the approved separate process for those layers.

    Memory and retention boundaries

MFA screens and private recovery controls
  1. Setup or voluntary enrolment

    Use the required setup prompt, or Profile → Enable MFA where eligible. Keep QR/manual secret private. Enter the exactly six-digit Verification Code and use Verify and Enable MFA. Success enables/requires MFA and opens the one-time recovery view. Cancel does not enrol it.

  2. Save recovery evidence privately

    Use Copy All Codes, Download as Text File (amara-backup-codes.txt) or Print Codes. Check that the codes are saved in a safe place to enable Continue, then select Continue. Refresh/revisit may not redisplay them; the acknowledgement does not verify durable or secure storage.

  3. Verify, correct or restart

    At later local login use Verify with the six-digit TOTP or an unused eight-alphanumeric recovery code (spaces/hyphens normalised). A format error needs correction; five rejected valid-format attempts can lock verification for 15 minutes. A five-minute pending-session expiry requires starting Login again and does not itself reset failed-attempt counters. Successful verification resets the counter and consumes a used recovery code.

  4. Act on low-code and unavailable-factor warnings

    At three or fewer remaining codes, retain/use the remaining codes privately and contact the authorised administrator for the approved recovery/re-enrolment path. There is no offered self-regenerate or self-disable action. Use Lost your device / Back to Login as appropriate; Reset Password is not Reset MFA.

The dedicated MFA guide remains the owner of the full enrolment/recovery procedure.

Presentation preferences and tour controls
ControlLocal resultNot changed
EN / DEChanges the session language and returns to the current local view/query.Business records, decisions and provider language guarantees.
Theme toggleClick, Enter or Space; browser-local amara-theme preference.Account roles or record status.
Sidebar ToggleBrowser-local collapsed preference; focus/hover tooltips identify labels.Navigation authority or module permissions.
Demo tour Back / Next / Skip / Finish / EscapeMoves/dismisses the five-step tour; browser completion cookie can last one year.Shared-account record completion, approvals or customer onboarding acceptance.

Check the result

An authenticated session in the intended scope, or a specific recoverable error rather than assumed success.

Current limits and common mistakes

Authentication audit is best-effort, not proof of complete immutable logging. Demo’s long-press ordinary-login entry grants no Admin rights. Self-registration redirects to Login.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Diagrams and background

Navigate the application

Module dashboards, lists and record links lead to related work. Use normal navigation controls to open records and return to the relevant list.

Access depends on your role

An administrator assigns the permissions needed for your work. Optional integrations and Vulnerability Assurance also depend on deployment configuration.

Organisation Setup

Administrators maintain organisation information used by relevant workflows and document fields. Enter accurate information and review changes when your organisation changes.

Organisation facts belong to the form that uses them

Maintain facts in the assessment or document form that owns them, then inspect its output.

Where to start

Selected assessment context or Document Dialog creation/editor

Account Admin owns user access; deployment operators own configuration.

Before you begin

Prepare the real entity name, sector/industry, size, scope and boundaries required by the selected form.

Step-by-step

  1. Identify the owning form

    Use the assessment’s organisation/context fields or the chosen document template’s actual inputs. System Settings is not a universal organisation wizard.

    Template-specific organisation fields

  2. Confirm the identity and scope

    Before changing an existing assessment/document, record its ID and current context. Similar organisation names across modules do not make their records one shared profile.

  3. Save through that workflow

    Use its actual Start/Complete/Save/version control and correct validation. Refer to the selected assessment’s guide for its distinct lifecycle rather than a generic save assumption.

    Owning assessment procedures

  4. Inspect dependent outputs deliberately

    Review a newly requested report or saved document version. Existing exported files and historical versions retain their prior content; no global automatic rewrite is established.

  5. Manage access separately

    Use User Management for approved roles/activation and the implementation team for unsupported deployment changes. Do not place credentials in organisation fields or support evidence.

Check the result

Consistent context in the intended records with other affected copies identified.

Current limits and common mistakes

Changing a name in one form is not an automatic update to all assessments, documents, courses or external pages.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Diagrams and background

Prepare reliable inputs

Use the actual legal name, contacts and other fields required by the selected form. NIS2 relevance results depend on the information and scope supplied.

Review the result

Check generated documents and assessment outputs after changing organisation details. A saved setting does not prove that every existing record has been updated.

Users and Roles

Administrators create and maintain user accounts and assign the permissions needed for each person's work.

Account editing, recovery and deletion have different effects

Roles, curriculum, activation, passwords, MFA and owned records each have their own lifecycle.

Where to start

Account menu → Profile; Admin → User Management for other accounts

Role badges are not self-service editors. Read Only disables rendered submit buttons; this is not a claim of exhaustive endpoint enforcement.

Before you begin

Know whether the intended change is your profile, local password, MFA or an administrator-owned account action.

Step-by-step

  1. Open your own Profile

    Confirm the account before editing. Use Username (required, 2–20 characters), valid Email and required First/Last Name. Changed username/email must be unique. Names allow Unicode letters/attached marks and spaces, hyphens, apostrophes or periods.

  2. Submit the intended profile change

    Use Update Profile; Cancel leaves the editing path without saving. Correct field errors rather than assuming a redirect means success. Do not change role badges as if they were editable controls.

  3. Reopen and verify the actual outcome

    Check the same profile again. Current source has a transient-user persistence concern: a success flash alone does not establish that the profile was stored. Report a discrepancy with account/time, not secret values; no fix or runtime success is asserted here.

  4. Change the local credential separately

    In Change Password supply correct Current Password, New Password of at least 12 characters, and matching Confirm New Password; use Change Password. Correct validation/storage errors and follow the next-login instruction. This changes the local credential, not Microsoft’s password.

  5. Use the right recovery owner

    If the old password/factor is unavailable, ask the authorised Admin for Reset Password or Reset MFA as appropriate. Copy/print/recovery outputs are private; no automatic email or reset-link delivery is implied.

    Administrator recovery controls

  6. Keep permissions and curriculum separate

    Administrators use the detailed Accounts guide for roles, activation/expiry, assignments and deletion. Read Only must stand alone in the current account form; it is not combined with additive module permissions.

    Role and assignment rules

Check the result

The intended account is identified and its actual saved outcome is checked; unresolved profile persistence remains explicit.

Current limits and common mistakes

Authentication audit writes can fail independently of the session action. Never use a login/profile flash as proof of exhaustive audit coverage or a completed business approval.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Diagrams and background

Assign limited access

Use the role controls in the current Admin Panel. NIS2 Compliance and Vulnerability Assurance IT Owner each have dedicated controls. General Assessments can grant access across CIA, Rapid Assessment, ISO 27001, BSI C5 and EU AI Act; dedicated controls for those assessment areas remain available. Security Scanning has its own permission.

Read-only access

The current account form requires Read Only alone; it cannot be combined with additive module permissions. A rendered disabled control is not a complete endpoint permission audit. Use the Accounts guide for the exact approved role choices.

Plan Your Onboarding

Use this sequence to organise onboarding. Timing depends on your organisation, data, responsibilities and the intended deployment.

Onboarding is a sequence of checked deliverables

Use checked deliverables and named responsibilities, not a promise that onboarding finishes in a week.

Where to start

Getting Started → owning module guides

Name the account owner, record owner, reviewer and operator for each planned result.

Before you begin

Agree scope, available evidence and what remains outside the first iteration.

Step-by-step

  1. Establish access and ownership

    Deliver an approved account/role list and a bounded set of saved Assets/Suppliers. Check real IDs, ownership and missing fields rather than a screenshot of a menu.

  2. Complete selected evaluations

    Use CIA where Asset impact is needed and choose framework scope deliberately. Deliver saved identities, state, evidence and unanswered/unknown items, not one interchangeable compliance score.

    Choose a scoped evaluation

  3. Prepare maintained documents

    Deliver reviewed Document IDs/versions/dates and explicit outstanding approval/adoption work. An Approvals paragraph or exported draft is not the organisational decision.

  4. Assign and inspect learning

    Account Admin saves curriculum assignments; learners complete actual cards/quizzes. Deliver learner/course/progress/certificate context and retain evidence before renewal.

  5. Exercise legitimate follow-up

    For a justified gap, use Risk/Treatment or VA’s owning procedure with responsibility and verification. Do not run scans or create provider work simply to make the plan look complete.

    Verification requirements

  6. Review the evidence and remaining gaps

    Build a small index with source IDs, version/run, scope/time and unresolved owners/dates. Agree the next iteration from actual results; do not infer production readiness from elapsed days.

    Build the evidence index

Check the result

An inspectable onboarding plan with responsibilities, artifacts and open work.

Current limits and common mistakes

No fixed number of days guarantees readiness. Deployment, privacy, provider, approval and technical verification remain independent gates.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Diagrams and background

Establish the foundation

Agree the operating environment, access roles and organisation information. Register a useful initial set of assets and suppliers, then review their completeness.

Build evidence and review readiness

Run the relevant assessments, record risks and treatment responsibilities, prepare policy drafts and assign training. Review the actual results before deciding whether the environment is ready for broader use.

Illustrative foundation, compliance, remediation and review sequence

The sequence is a planning aid, not a fixed timetable or certification promise.

Asset Management

Register and maintain the hardware, software, data, services and facilities relevant to your organisation. The asset record provides ownership and classification context for related work.

Asset registration, explicit Azure Fetch and Import, separate CIA review, links and same-record updates

Fetch and import deliberately. Linking does not activate an Asset; maintain status with Edit and Update Asset, separately from CIA approval.

Where to start

Find the saved Asset you need before changing its business context or starting technical work.

Asset Management → All Assets or one of the five category inventories

Asset Management access is required; an account’s global Admin label is not a substitute for this module grant. Read-only access does not permit changes.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose the population

    Use Hardware, Software, Data, Services or Facilities for that category, or All Assets for the complete inventory. Category lists are newest first.

  2. Narrow All Assets

    Enter Asset Name and Location fragments; choose Category, Status and Criticality, then apply the filters. Name/location are substring searches; category/status are exact stored choices. Criticality follows current CIA context, not an unassessed low default.

  3. Read rows separately from cards

    Pagination defaults to ten rows. Follow the page controls with the chosen filters. Estate cards remain whole-inventory counts, not counts of the visible ten rows. Clear/Reset restores the unfiltered list.

  4. Open the actual record

    Use View for saved detail, Edit for a permitted same-record update, or New Asset to register a genuinely new item. Check the generated Asset identity and optional Internal tag; they are different identifiers.

Filter choices and empty results
FieldChoices / meaning
CategoryAll; Hardware / Software / Data / Service / Facility.
StatusAll; Active / Inactive / Maintenance / Retired / Unknown. Unknown is a filter, not a creation choice.
CriticalityAll; Critical / High / Medium / Low. Missing CIA is unassessed, not a measured Low.
No matchesClear filters, check the category and spelling, then verify access. Zero filtered rows does not mean the estate is empty.

The filter submit uses POST before GET navigation. Read-only users may be denied that POST even though it filters rather than changes an Asset; use permitted category/GET navigation and ask the administrator to reconcile the limitation, not to grant yourself write access.

Next actions and boundaries

View, category navigation and reading reports do not create an Asset, Risk, Supplier relationship or scan. A missing VA tab can reflect feature/access/context failure; it is not proof the Asset has no software or vulnerabilities.

Registering an Asset

Open Asset Management and create a record for something your organisation actually owns or operates. Use a descriptive name and complete the required fields shown in the form.

Register an Asset: identity, context, then explicit links

Name and Category establish inventory identity. CIA, software, Supplier and scan work need later actions.

Where to start

Create one identifiable Asset with enough business and technical context for later CIA, Supplier and scan work.

Asset Management → New Asset; use Edit on an existing record to amend it

Asset Management access and write permission are required. Only Asset Name and Category are mandatory on the Asset form.

Step-by-step

  1. Check whether the Asset already exists

    Search All Assets first. New Asset rejects an exact duplicate name. Internal tag is optional and does not replace the generated saved identity.

  2. Complete identity and context

    Enter Asset Name and Category, then the relevant technical, owner/location, financial and maintenance fields below. Record a real authorised address; a display name is not a scan target.

  3. Choose lifecycle and software eligibility

    Active is the initial Status. Select another offered status if appropriate. The VA management checkbox starts off; enabling it is a separate software-management choice, not a scan or vulnerability finding.

  4. Save once and verify

    Choose Save Asset. On success open the resulting record from All Assets and check identity and values. Edit saves the same record with Update Asset; renaming does not run the new-name duplicate guard. Correct visible validation errors before retrying.

  5. Abandon unsaved changes safely

    Use the form’s Cancel/back navigation without submitting. Leaving a form does not undo an earlier successful save. CIA, software assignment, Supplier linking and scans follow their own actions.

Identity, technical and operational fields
FieldInput rulePractical use
Asset NameRequired; ≤100 characters; exact new-name duplicates rejected.Example: Example Web Gateway.
Category / SubcategoryRequired Hardware, Software, Data, Service or Facility; Subcategory optional ≤50.Distinguish the type from a descriptive subtype.
Internal tagOptional ≤50.Your inventory label, not an imported/replacement database ID.
Description / NotesOptional text.Scope, provenance and review context.
Manufacturer / ModelOptional; each ≤100.Identify the actual product.
Version / Serial NumberOptional; version ≤50, serial ≤100.Record known values rather than guessing a build.
IP Address / Hostname or FQDNOptional; IP ≤45 and valid IPv4/IPv6; hostname ≤255.Saved authorised target. The scanner may prefer hostname for web/TLS and IP for Nmap.
Owner / LocationOptional; each ≤100. Owner permits ASCII letters and spaces, not punctuation/digits.Example owner: Example Team.
StatusOptional; Active default, Inactive, Maintenance, Retired; blank displays Unknown.Not deletion or technical remediation.
ConditionOptional; Excellent, Good, Fair, Poor.Physical condition, not risk score.
Manage software on this asset in Vulnerability AssuranceOff by default.New assignments require eligible Active Hardware/Software/Service in the right workspace.
Warranty Expiry / Maintenance ScheduleOptional date YYYY-MM-DD / optional text. When Purchase Date and Warranty Expiry are both set, Warranty Expiry must be on or after Purchase Date; equal dates are accepted.Warranty and planned maintenance, not evidence that work happened. For example, Purchase Date 2026-10-15 with Warranty Expiry 2026-10-14 fails validation: correct Warranty Expiry to 2026-10-15 or later on the same form, then save again.
Financial inputs and calculated value
FieldRule / calculation
Purchase Date / Depreciation Start DateOptional YYYY-MM-DD. Explicit depreciation start wins; otherwise purchase date.
Purchase CostOptional numeric value. Zero purchase does not produce a measured book value.
Useful Life (Years) / Salvage ValueOptional life integer 1–100; salvage number ≥0.
Depreciation MethodNo Depreciation default; Straight-Line; Declining Balance.
Straight-LineElapsed years = days/365.25. Depreciation = (cost − salvage)/life × elapsed years, capped at the depreciable amount; fractional years count.
Declining BalanceDouble-declining rate 2/life, iterated over completed whole years; value is floored at salvage. Fractional extra years do not add another annual iteration.
Book valueCost minus accumulated depreciation. Missing inputs and zero purchase are not measurements of zero-worth assets.

Fictional example: cost 1,200, salvage 200, life five years, illustrative elapsed 2.0 years gives straight-line depreciation 400 and book value 800. Double-declining uses 40% per completed year: 1,200 → 720 → 432, never below salvage. This is application arithmetic, not tax/accounting advice. Optional malformed values are validation issues; no extra nonnegative rule for Purchase Cost is promised by this form.

After saving

Editing may clear optional values and preserves the Asset identity. A rename also updates Risk rows using the exact old Asset name, not a universal foreign-key reconciliation. Check related records after renaming. The Asset form does not itself approve CIA, create a Risk, import installed software or authorise scanning.

CIA Assessment

CIA means confidentiality, integrity and availability. Use the CIA assessment workflow to evaluate an asset's protection requirements and relevant measures.

Four-phase CIA assessment and approval workflow

The assessment records inputs, owner review, security context and the final responsible approval.

Where to start

Assessments → CIA Classification → New Evaluation, or an asset’s CIA action

Admin, General Assessments or CIA access; final Risk Owner approval additionally requires Risk Assessment or Admin. Ordinary Read Only mutation limits apply. CIA has no ISO/NIS2 demo write carve-out.

Before you begin

Know the business consequences of disclosure, manipulation and downtime for the selected asset.

Fields and choices

FieldRequired / choiceHow to use it
AssetRequired for savingSelect a saved Asset. Register it first if absent; creation blocks a second evaluation for that Asset; edit/rebinding checks differ.
Service ModelReview the defaultNot Applicable / IaaS / PaaS / SaaS / On-Premise; selects measure responsibility context.
Confidentiality Rating + JustificationRating required on SubmitPublic / Internal Use / Confidential / Restricted; explain the disclosure consequences.
Is it a test environment?Choose accuratelyA deliberate Yes selection applies Low integrity presets; it is not proof of isolation.
Three integrity impacts + JustificationPersonal safety required on SubmitRate safety, society/environment and operational readiness. Review all relevant impacts even where validation is permissive.
Availability Rating + JustificationRating required on SubmitRecord the supported downtime band and its factual rationale.

Step-by-step

  1. Start with a registered asset

    If the asset does not exist, register it in Asset Management first. New Evaluation currently offers an existing Asset picker, not a visible Create New Asset control. From the asset’s CIA action, verify the preselected identity. If an evaluation already exists for the asset, use that evaluation’s Edit action; creation blocks a second evaluation.

  2. Choose Service Model

    Select Not Applicable, IaaS, PaaS, SaaS or On-Premise for the actual deployment. This controls the applicable measure/responsibility context; choosing a cloud model does not configure a cloud connector or complete a C5 assessment.

  3. Assess confidentiality

    Choose Public, Internal Use, Confidential or Restricted and complete Confidentiality Justification with the information held, who could receive it and the business consequences of disclosure.

  4. Check the test-environment choice

    Use Yes only for a genuinely isolated test/development environment. A deliberate Yes selection hides the integrity questions, presets their ratings to Low and may insert a no-production-impact justification when that field is empty. Review that premise; the preset is not an isolation test. Stored impact ratings—not the environment flag alone—drive the calculated integrity.

  5. Assess each integrity impact

    For production, rate personal safety, society/environment and operational readiness separately as Low, Medium, High or Critical. Write Integrity Justification with manipulation consequences and existing protections. The integrity result uses the highest of the three impact ratings, not their average.

  6. Assess tolerated downtime

    Choose Availability Rating: Low (>24h), Medium (4–24h), High (1–4h) or Critical (<1h). Complete Availability Justification with the actual service interruption tolerance and dependencies; do not substitute a scanner severity.

  7. Save Draft or Submit

    Use Save Draft while collecting facts; use Submit for ready inputs. The non-draft path checks the selected asset, confidentiality, personal-safety impact and availability. Fill all relevant impact/rationale fields rather than treating those minimum checks as complete review. Open the saved evaluation; Submit alone has not completed the four phases.

  8. Complete Phase 1: Data Entry

    Open the current phase. Review the three confirmations: CIA ratings complete/accurate, asset information verified, and justifications documented. Add phase notes if needed and choose Complete Data Entry & Submit for Review. This advances to Asset Owner Review and generates security measures; it is still not final approval.

  9. Complete Phase 2: Asset Owner Review

    Confirm the owner review, choose Approve, Send Back or Reject and record comments/reason. Approval advances to Cyber Security Review. Send Back and Reject return to Phase 1 for revision. Inspect the stored decision/history and the review notes before the next stage.

  10. Complete Phase 3: Cyber Security Review

    Read the ratings, owner comments and applicable measures. Confirm the security review, choose the decision and record review notes. Approval advances to Risk Owner Approval; Send Back or Reject returns to Phase 2. Where the measure panel is available, review its specific implementation/evidence rather than assuming generation implemented anything.

  11. Complete Phase 4: Risk Owner Approval

    The reviewer needs Risk Assessment or Admin access in addition to CIA access. Confirm the complete review, choose the final decision and record notes. Approval completes the evaluation; Send Back or Reject returns to Phase 3. Check the final state and the latest CIA-derived asset criticality, which uses the highest confidentiality/integrity/availability rating.

  12. Read the measures, heatmap and selected report

    After Phase 2 approval, the generated Security Measures panel can offer Show Details for mandatory/recommended measures and their source context. Open Report on this evaluation for its printable executive report, including ratings and approval history. View Heatmap on the CIA hub is a summary, not a rating-edit control. Inspect the asset/service context and current phase before sharing any output.

  13. Edit, reset or delete deliberately

    Edit on an evaluation with approvals shows a warning; saving the changed facts resets all approval stages to Phase 1. Revert Assessment instead selects the current or an earlier phase and requires a reason, clearing approvals from that phase onward. It cannot jump forward. The retained edit-template new-asset branch is not a working nested asset-creation path: register an Asset first and retain a valid existing identity. Delete Evaluation removes the selected evaluation; preserve required evidence first.

  14. Continue the right downstream task

    Return to the asset for supplier links, scans or VA software. Use a permitted measure-specific Jira action for reviewed follow-up. CIA business-impact context can inform a separately assessed Risk, but neither a generated measure nor an approved evaluation creates a universal remediation or vulnerability all-clear.

Exact behaviour and worked examples

The four-phase diagram remains your route through the assessment. Expand the sections below for save rules, calculations and what the output actually records.

Inputs, editing and the four review decisions

Create and edit are different

On New Evaluation, choose a registered Asset and Service Model. Save Draft needs that Asset; missing ratings can remain blank. Submit additionally needs Confidentiality, Personal Safety and Availability; Society/Environment and Operational Readiness can default Low if omitted. Justifications are not strictly required by the field validators—write and review them anyway. An Asset preselection does not assess its impact for you.

A deliberate Test Environment Yes selection presets the three integrity impacts to Low and inserts the no-production-impact rationale only when empty. It does not overwrite every stored/custom value on page initialization. Switching back to No does not restore the old production ratings: inspect all three again.

Edit adds Data Classification and Additional Notes; Data Classification does not replace the Confidentiality Rating used by the calculator. Its visible Create New Asset branch is not implemented by the edit handler: keep a valid existing Asset. On Edit, Save Draft and Submit use the same update, not New Evaluation’s two lifecycle paths. Saving an assessment with prior approvals resets approvals to Phase 1 / In Progress; existing measure rows can remain until regeneration. Creation’s one-evaluation-per-Asset guard is not a universal edit/rebinding guarantee.

PhaseConfirm and recordDecision and result
1 · Data EntryRatings, Asset verified and justifications confirmations; optional phase notesComplete Data Entry commits the phase/history, then regenerates measures separately. A generation failure can follow a saved phase.
2 · Asset Owner ReviewOwner-review confirmation; comments; meaningful return reasonApprove → Phase 3. Send Back / Reject → Phase 1; Phase 1 completion is cleared.
3 · Cyber Security ReviewSecurity confirmation; issues, recommendations, notes and return reasonApprove → Phase 4. Send Back / Reject → Phase 2; Phase 2 approval is cleared.
4 · Risk Owner ApprovalRisk-review confirmation; risk notes and return reason; extra Risk Assessment or Admin accessApprove → Completed. Send Back / Reject → Phase 3; Phase 3 approval is cleared. No formal Risk Acceptance is created.

Admin, General Assessments or CIA access provides the CIA role gate; Phase 4 also needs Risk Assessment or Admin. “Owner” and “security reviewer” describe functional responsibilities, not four separately enforced account identities. A checkbox does not verify the underlying fact. The UI requests a reason for return/rejection, while handler fallbacks do not universally enforce nonempty reasons: record one and inspect the history.

Revert selects the current or an earlier phase and requires a reason. It clears that phase and later approvals, invalidates flags, and preserves audit/measure context; it cannot jump forward. Delete removes the evaluation, logs and measures, not the Asset or already-created external tickets. Retain required evidence first.

Calculate CIA impact and interpret generated measures

Worked example: highest impact, not an average

This example uses assumed inputs, not a customer record. Public/Low = 1; Internal/Medium = 2; Confidential/High = 3; Restricted/Critical = 4. Integrity is the highest of personal safety, society/environment and operational readiness. Overall is the highest of Confidentiality, Integrity and Availability.

Internal confidentiality 2, integrity impacts 1,3,2 and availability 4 produce High integrity and Critical overall

Assumed values demonstrate the maximum rule; they are not live assessment results.

Internal 2; integrity inputs Low 1 / High 3 / Medium 2; Availability Critical 4 → Integrity High 3 → Overall Critical 4. There is no 2.4 average result or likelihood × impact risk score. Unknown values map to zero internally; no recognized rating gives no aggregate label. Tolerated downtime is Low >24h, Medium 4–24h, High 1–4h, Critical <1h.

Recommendations are not installed controls

Phase 1 generation replaces existing generated measures using a 37-definition catalogue. General measures use max(C,I,A); confidentiality/integrity measures use max(C,I); availability/portability measures use A, with a missing level defaulting Low. Service Model filters measures and responsibility; Not Applicable bypasses that filter and leaves responsibility blank. Level 4 selects the very-high recommendation text. “Not required” entries are omitted; must/mandatory/shall text becomes Mandatory / High priority, otherwise Recommended / Medium.

The generator also reads some retained legacy integrity fields which the current impact calculator ignores. Low current impacts plus legacy Critical can therefore produce stronger measures than the displayed integrity. Do not force a claim that every old record’s measures and current rating agree. The inline measure panel needs generated measures and Phase 2 approval; Show/Hide Details and optional Jira are reading/follow-up controls, not a universal per-measure Accept/Edit/Verify workflow.

Which view are you reading?

The Asset uses its latest evaluation by updated time, then highest ID, and requires an eligible completed/approved/final-approved state. An unfinished latest evaluation does not fall back to an older approved one. The CIA hub confidentiality mapping differs from the current calculator: Confidential with Low I/A can appear Medium on its donut but High in the current rating. Heatmap plots Availability against Confidentiality, with bubble size from Integrity; missing values can plot Low. A low point is not proof of complete rating evidence. Old nonempty stored aggregate labels are not universally recalculated on read.

Search CIA lists using their actual controls

“My Finished Assets” is module-wide completed-only data, not a current-user ownership filter. “My Assets In Progress” covers Draft, In Progress, In Review, Pending Approval, Security Review and Risk Review, ordered newest evaluation ID first. Use Asset Name search. Finished sorts are Newest (default), Oldest, Name A–Z and Name Z–A; name ties use newest evaluation ID. A load failure in either “My” view returns 503, not a clean empty inventory.

All Evaluations controlOffered choices
Asset NameEnter the name to search; it is not a saved owner filter.
Asset CategoryAll Categories / Hardware / Software / Data / Service / Facility.
StatusAll Statuses / Draft / In Progress / Completed; uses displayed phase/approval state, not simply the stored status.
Approval PhaseAll Phases / 1 Data Entry / 2 Asset Owner Approval / 3 Cyber Security Review / 4 Risk Owner Approval.
Overall RatingAll Ratings / 1 Low / 2 Medium / 3 High / 4 Critical / 5 Maximum. Maximum is a retained no-op, not a fifth CIA rating.
SearchApply the chosen filters; results are newest evaluation ID first.

All Evaluations can return an empty fallback after a load error, unlike the explicit 503 “My” views. An empty list or inactive Maximum filter does not prove no exposure or complete assessment coverage.

Report, evidence and cross-module handoffs

Read the selected executive report

The normal Report link is shown for eligible completed states, while the direct report route can render other phases. Inspect phase and identity. Its headline is ordinal impact, not a percentage security score. Measure Acceptance Rate = stored Accepted measures ÷ all recorded measures × 100; with 8 Accepted of 10 it is 80%. With no measures the displayed 0% is not measured zero security. The report’s 80/60/40 colours describe this acceptance ratio, not implementation or impact reduction. Unknown status/priority/type values can be included in totals yet absent from named chart buckets.

Report chart unknowns can default Low even when text is Not Rated/N/A. Thirty-day high-priority advice and six-month reassessment advice do not create deadlines or schedules. Saved phase history does not prove four distinct approvers or legal sign-off.

Use Save as HTML or Print on the selected report. Print is the browser dialogue; HTML can retain relative/external assets and is not a signed, self-contained evidence bundle. Preserve identity, scope, phase, generation time and required underlying evidence.

Carry the right identity to related work

Use the exact Jira ticket fields

Visible controlChoice or requirement
ProjectRead-only ITSEC; this modal is not a project selector.
SummaryRequired; review the actual record/measure/question context.
DescriptionOptional; review any prefilled evidence and scope.
PriorityLow / Medium / High / Critical; template default Medium—review the current selection.
TypeTask / Bug / Story; template default Task—review the current selection. The visible label is Type, not Issue Type.
Labels (comma-separated)Enter separate labels with commas; inspect the offered defaults.

Use Cancel if the target or content is wrong. Otherwise choose Create Ticket once and inspect the returned issue and local reference. This is an external write, not a saved answer, approval or formal Risk Treatment. If the outcome is uncertain, reconcile the owning record before retrying. Each module’s reference identity remains different, as described below.

Asset Management owns the Asset, supplier links, scan target and VA software. CIA impact can inform a separately assessed Risk; final CIA approval is not Risk Acceptance or completed treatment. A measure’s Jira preview carries its context, while the stored reference belongs to the evaluation ID—not a durable measure ID. Closing the issue does not accept the measure or approve CIA. Confluence saves an evaluation reference and then stamps the page; a stamp error can follow the local save, so reconcile before retrying. Scanner work needs the linked Asset, authorisation and scanner access; it does not execute the CIA approval.

Check the result

An asset-linked CIA evaluation with recorded ratings, rationale and the current approval state.

Current limits and common mistakes

Draft/in-progress CIA is not an approved criticality: the current asset view does not fall back to an older completed evaluation when the latest evaluation is unfinished. Minimum form validation, a review checkbox, generated measures and technical implementation are different facts. Editing approved inputs invalidates the prior approvals; inspect the warning and stored phase.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

Use the current assessment

Select the asset and service context, then work through the measures and recommendations presented by the application. Classification labels and assessment scales serve different purposes; use the labels shown in the form.

Review and approve

Follow the assessment's review and approval workflow. Record the reasons and evidence for your decisions. CIA assessment is separate from the internal priority used in Vulnerability Assurance.

Maintaining Assets

Keep asset records current as systems, responsibilities and supplier relationships change.

Register an Asset, use separate CIA and linking actions, then Edit and Update Asset

Ownership review is manual organisational work. Edit and Update Asset maintain the same record and chosen lifecycle status; Retired does not delete its links or evidence. CIA approval and linked work remain separate.

Where to start

Keep the same Asset’s state and evidence coherent as it changes, without confusing retirement, unlinking and deletion.

All Assets → View → Edit or the relevant detail tab

Asset Management access; writes denied to read-only users. VA installation actions also obey workspace/VA guards.

Step-by-step

  1. Inspect current context

    View the saved identity, latest CIA, Supplier relationships, Vulnerabilities/software, scan history and external references. The detail scan list is the latest ten, not every historical run.

  2. Edit the same Asset

    Use Edit, amend the offered fields, then Update Asset. Active/Inactive/Maintenance/Retired describe lifecycle only. Optional cleared fields stay cleared; a rename may affect exact old-name Risk references.

  3. Retain evidence through status changes

    Retired does not mean deleted, patched or approved. Existing scans, Supplier decisions, CIA evidence and Risks retain their own states. Disabling VA eligibility prevents new assignments, not deletion of existing installations/history.

  4. Remove only an obsolete software location

    On Asset → Vulnerabilities choose Remove software from this asset for the exact active assignment. It excludes nonterminal locations and closes related cases only when no nonterminal location remains; historical evidence stays.

  5. Delete only when genuinely intended

    Use Delete and inspect the confirmation. CIA evaluations or Supplier links block Asset deletion. Cancel retains the Asset; an error requires reconciliation, not repeated deletion. Do not treat retirement as a workaround for a blocked delete.

Deletion and archive are different

Removing a Supplier relationship deletes neither entity. Removing a VA software-list membership or archiving a list rewrites every associated non-Closed case to Closed, including Accepted/Resolved states, while retaining installations/history; it is broader than removing one Asset assignment and is not proof of a technical fix. A failing optional VA view can hide context without proving absence.

Asset Data Import and Export

Use the import or export controls provided by the relevant module and deployment. Confirm the accepted format before preparing a file.

Admin CSV import creates Assets; it does not restore identity

This is the Account Admin importer. Main Asset Management HTML export and operator recovery are separate.

Where to start

Choose between a current Asset HTML report and deliberate CSV creation of new inventory records.

Asset Management → Export Assets; Account Admin → Import/Export Data for CSV

Use the endpoint’s actual Asset or Account Admin access and an approved audience for inventory data.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose the correct output

    Export Assets produces standalone HTML for ALL saved Assets, regardless of current All Assets filters. Review identity, current CIA-derived criticality and financial totals at the report date.

  2. Save evidence in its proper form

    Use the report’s offered Save/Print controls. Browser Print/Save as PDF is not a server-generated PDF or a full database backup. Admin Export CSV is a separate nine-column inventory transfer.

  3. Prepare a reviewed CSV only for new creation

    Required headings are name,category,status. Use supported lowercase category/status values and explicit ISO dates. Imported id/asset_id/created_at do not restore identity; duplicate names are permitted.

  4. Import and reconcile before retrying

    Choose CSV File then Import in Account Admin. Read imported/skipped/error feedback and inspect saved records. Valid rows can commit before a later AST-ID-fill stage fails, so a failure is not whole-import rollback.

  5. Complete relationships deliberately

    Verify generated identities and enter authorised IP/hostname separately. Add CIA, Supplier links and VA/software evidence through their owning workflows. Reimporting an export does not update existing Assets.

CSV schema and fictional example
name,category,status,owner,purchase_date,purchase_cost
Example Gateway,hardware,active,Example Team,2026-10-15,1250.50

Allowed categories: hardware/software/data/service/facility. Status: active/inactive/maintenance/retired/unknown. Headings are case-normalized, comma/semicolon detection and UTF-8 BOM/Windows1252/Latin1 decode fallback are supported. Optional descriptive/contact, purchase/warranty and maintenance fields are listed in Admin — Inventory CSV and Audit Snapshot. IP address/hostname are not imported.

Prefer YYYY-MM-DD: slash dates try US month/day before European day/month. Decimal point is required for the intended amount: 12,50 can become 1250 after comma stripping. Invalid optional numbers/dates can become empty values. This CSV creates records; it is not VA list CSV or Asset-installation CSV/SBOM.

Understand report totals and values

Admin CSV exports id, asset_id, name, category, status, location, owner, description, created_at. Main Asset HTML instead includes date-dependent purchase/depreciation/book totals across all Assets. See Assets — Registering an Asset: fictional cost 1,200 minus accumulated 400 is book value 800; adding a second measured book value 300 yields 1,100. A zero/missing purchase value is not an independent valuation. Neither report restores documents, relationships, providers or approvals.

Asset Module Connections

Asset records provide context for CIA, supplier relationships, scans, software exposure and risks. A supplier link does not require or establish its approval.

A saved asset provides context to CIA, supplier relationships, scanning and VA; each module requires its own action and review

One saved asset provides context. Each connected module keeps its own action, permission and decision.

Where to start

Connect the Asset to deliberate governance and technical actions while keeping every saved outcome distinct.

Asset detail → related Supplier, references, Scan or Vulnerabilities controls

Asset access for the record, Supplier access for Supplier-side unlinking, Scanner/write access for scans, and VA workspace roles for VA work. Connector availability is not an access grant.

Step-by-step

  1. Link the right Supplier

    Choose Link Supplier, select an existing not-yet-linked Supplier, choose relationship type and optional Notes, then save. Create new Supplier carries Asset context and creates a Provider relationship on successful creation.

  2. Create external Jira work only deliberately

    Choose Create Jira Ticket, complete the modal below and submit once. Check the real issue key and saved local Asset reference. This Asset action creates no formal Risk or Treatment automatically.

  3. Treat Confluence selection as a write

    Open Link Confluence, inspect recent/search results and exact page. Clicking a result immediately saves ID/title/URL locally and attempts an external timestamp stamp; there is no second harmless preview step.

  4. Do not rely on the Asset Refresh control

    The current shared Refresh control addresses a Risk-reference endpoint with the same numeric ID, not Asset references. It may fail or affect an unrelated same-number Risk. Do not use it to update Asset status; ask the operator to reconcile the reference through approved evidence.

  5. Choose the appropriate technical handoff

    The Asset Scan modal has seven families and no preset selector; it excludes Comprehensive and Service-to-CVE. A submitted request queues a persisted scan, not a result. VA eligibility changes and software assignments are separate.

Relationship types and safe unlink
TypeUse to describe
ProviderSupplies the Asset/service.
ManufacturerMakes the product.
Service ProviderOperates or maintains a service.
IntegratorIntegrates the component.
DistributorDistributes it.
PartnerPartner relationship.
OtherState the specific role in Notes.

To unlink, open Supplier → Related Assets → the exact relationship dropdown → Remove Asset. Confirm once or Cancel. Missing relationship warns; neither Asset nor Supplier is deleted. Linking checks Asset access; this unlink handler checks Supplier access rather than requiring an extra Asset grant.

Jira modal and uncertain outcomes
ControlMeaning
ProjectITSEC, read-only in this modal.
Summary / DescriptionSummary required; Description optional; inspect the Asset-specific prefill.
Priority / TypeLow/Medium/High/Critical (Medium default); Task/Bug/Story (Task default).
LabelsComma-separated; Asset default asset-management.

The adapter sends project, summary, description and issue type. Non-Medium Priority and Labels are inserted into DESCRIPTION, not guaranteed real Jira priority/label fields. Existing-reference warning does not prevent another issue. Provider success can lack an extracted key or a saved local link; inspect both before retrying. Cancel before submission creates no issue.

Confluence and retained evidence

Local references deduplicate the exact entity/type/external ID. External stamping can fail without undoing the saved local link; unusual provider payloads can make preservation uncertain. Do not promise a read-only bookmark or append-only preservation. Confluence creation/upsert belongs to its own guide and can replace remote body content. Disabling VA prevents new eligible assignments, not removal of existing history.

Diagrams and background
Stored Asset–CIA link, dashed manual assessment context and separate risk review

The dashed Asset-to-assessment connection means manual context review, not a saved Asset link or automatic questionnaire scope. CIA and Risk decisions remain separate.

Vulnerability Assurance

Vulnerability Assurance helps you record operated software, review public vulnerability evidence and govern individual findings. Availability depends on the enabled deployment and your permissions.

From software evidence to governed vulnerability work

Confirmed relevance plus active installations defines actionable work; each location needs its own outcome.

Where to start

Turn recorded installed software and public vulnerability evidence into scoped, owned work—not an all-clear certificate.

Vulnerability Assurance → Overview → Software Lists, Campaigns or CVE Register

VA must be enabled and the current workspace role must permit the action. Management/Auditor are read roles; read-only accounts cannot write. Data in another workspace is outside this view.

Step-by-step

  1. Start with software evidence

    If no list exists, create a Software List. Record Product and actual version; assign an eligible Asset when you have installation evidence. A product-only or uncertain record is not automatically a customer task.

  2. Read the unit on each count

    A campaign groups confirmed package/version work with active recorded installations; a CVE is evidence, and a location is one installation. Several CVEs or Assets can belong to one campaign.

  3. Choose the relevant group

    Use Immediate attention / Patch now for P1 actionable campaigns, Normal patch cycle for other actionable work, Monitor and wait for monitoring advice, and Verification for evidence awaiting review. Accepted/Done belong to History.

  4. Open the campaign before deciding

    Inspect software identity/version, source evidence, affected locations, advice and stored priority. Checking/unknown evidence is not a measured safe result. Use the matching owning action, not a chart colour as approval.

  5. Follow work through verification

    Jira or Risk/Treatment starts governed follow-up; implementation, evidence submission and reviewer confirmation are separate. Empty lists, zero matches and an unavailable public corpus are not security assurance.

Dashboard counts, colours and shortcuts
MeasurePopulation / limit
Immediate / plannedActionable patch_available or update_required package campaigns, excluding Accepted and Verification. Immediate=P1; dashboard planned=not-P1, including unscored.
Planned shortcutExplicit P2/P3/P4; an unscored actionable item can make its results smaller than the planned dashboard count.
Monitor / verificationMonitor advice versus verification lane, not all open CVEs.
Checking / already fixed adviceChecking has no established priority/due presentation. Already-fixed advice is suppressed from default active work; it does not automatically verify or change case state.
Charts / coloursRead the named population and legend. Red/orange emphasise action/urgency; green is not proof of complete software coverage. Follow the labelled destination.
Local matching and outbound advice

Public-intelligence applicability matching reads the local published corpus. A separate worker requests remediation advice from the configured public OSV service using package coordinates and recorded versions, including versionless and exact-version queries. It does not send the entire Asset/customer record. Those package identifiers and versions still leave the application; agree the processing boundary with the administrator. Public-source synchronization is not publishing customer inventory.

Different governance defaults

VA Create Risk and Treatment requires an affected case, linked Asset and Risk-owner/admin action. P1/P2/P3/P4 map initial Risk score 16/12/9/4 and target 1/7/30/90 days, with a Planned 0% Treatment. These are defaults for human review, not the Scanner’s 1/4/9/16 whole-scan defaults or an approved business-risk judgment.

Diagrams and background
Software intake records installations; reviewed CVE relevance leads to work and location-scoped evidence. A clean scan does not close the case.

Read each location, not only the grouped campaign badge. Scanner, Jira and Risk decisions do not universally close VA work.

Vulnerability Assurance workflow from recorded software to verified outcome

Record software, match evidence, prioritise and act, then verify each finding before closure.

Software Lists and Intake

Start with a software list for products you can identify. Manual entry and general CSV intake support a list without requiring an Asset for every entry.

Vulnerability Assurance workflow from recorded software to verified outcome

Record software, match evidence, prioritise and act, then verify each finding before closure.

Where to start

Record products and installation evidence, then inspect what matching can and cannot conclude.

VA → Software Lists → selected list

Use a VA write role in the current workspace. Asset assignment requires an Active, VA-enabled Hardware, Software or Service Asset in scope; Data/Facility are not eligible.

Step-by-step

  1. Create the intended list

    Enter Name (required, ≤160) and optional Description, then Create. Active list names are case-insensitively unique in the workspace. Reopen the saved list before adding software.

  2. Add a known product

    Enter Product and Installed version where known, expand optional package identity, then Add and check. Exact workspace identity can reuse an existing component. Intake commits before matching: a matching outage can leave saved software with a warning; inspect it before retrying.

  3. Record an installation separately

    Choose Asset (system or device), optional Installed version and Installation path, then Save asset assignment. Omitted installed version falls back to component version. Already assigned Assets are excluded; repeat assignment is not a new independent installation.

  4. Use existing evidence or import deliberately

    Use latest scan reads the latest COMPLETED supported Nmap/Service-to-CVE structured product/version result, even if a newer failed attempt exists. Complete records are immediately confirmed. Run a fresh scan only opens its separate authorization/start page; explicitly return and use the completed result.

  5. Correct facts and check again

    Use the offered correction fields and Save and check again, or Check again now for unchanged evidence. A correction must change identity; it closes prior case scope with history. Case-fold-equal Product keeps installation locations; changing Product does not. Correction+rematch failure rolls back that correction, unlike primary intake’s already committed save.

  6. Remove the intended scope only

    Remove software / Remove from this list or Delete software list archives list scope and rewrites all related non-Closed cases to Closed, including Accepted/Resolved. Installations, references and history remain. Asset-side Remove software from this asset removes only that assignment; neither is evidence a vulnerability was fixed.

Fields that are actually offered
ControlRule / example
Product / Installed versionProduct required ≤240; version optional ≤160. Example Product Example Library, version 1.4.2; do not guess missing versions.
Package URL / CPE 2.3Optional identity, each ≤700. Example pkg:pypi/example-lib@1.4.2. A coordinate is not proof of installation.
Package ecosystem / Canonical package nameOptional ≤80 / ≤300. Example PyPI / example-lib.
Publisher or vendorCorrection/CSV field ≤200, not a universal primary Add field.
Version scheme / platform / sourcePrimary scheme is hidden auto, not a universal chooser. Do not invent additional backend fields as form controls. Platform text alone is not enforced applicability.
Asset / Installed version / Installation pathEligible saved Asset, optional exact installed-version override and path context; save is distinct from matching.
Three separate intake formats

All examples below are fictional. Use comma CSV and UTF-8/BOM. Product-list CSV normalizes heading case and requires product; version is optional:

product,version,vendor,purl,ecosystem,package_name,cpe23
Example Library,1.4.2,Example Publisher,pkg:pypi/example-lib@1.4.2,PyPI,example-lib,

Choose Import software list and inspect per-row errors. Optional identity is supported; row validation errors can yield partial intake. Primary import commits before matching.

Asset installation CSV uses exact lowercase aliases product/name, version/installed_version, vendor/publisher, cpe23/cpe. Product AND version must be present:

product,version,vendor
Example Library,1.4.2,Example Publisher

Select the eligible Asset, choose inventory_file and Import and record software. JSON is recognized by components/packages shape, not certified CycloneDX/SPDX schema version:

{"components":[{"name":"Example Library","version":"1.4.2","purl":"pkg:pypi/example-lib@1.4.2"}]}
{"packages":[{"name":"Example Library","versionInfo":"1.4.2"}]}

Complete installation rows auto-confirm immediately; incomplete rows are skipped. Inspect recorded/already-recorded/skipped counts and source filename/index evidence. A later intelligence error does not mean earlier saved rows disappeared. Do not reimport blindly. Asset inventory creation CSV belongs to Admin, not these software imports.

List CSV also accepts optional version_scheme (auto/numeric/semver/debian/rpm/maven/firmware/vendor); unknown schemes reject. Platform text can be retained (≤160), with support_status/source ≤40 and identity notes as supporting imported metadata. They do not create extra primary Add controls or certify distribution/backport comparison.

How matching reaches an evidence outcome

Identity precedence is shared PURL base, otherwise CPE part/vendor/product, otherwise normalized Product/vendor. A unique dominant publisher can disambiguate a bare name; otherwise keep uncertainty. Numeric exact/range comparison observes inclusive/exclusive boundaries. Fictional affected range [1.0,2.0) includes 1.4.2 and excludes 2.0. Unsupported/missing version is ambiguous, not unaffected. Same-source disjoint ranges reduce to the strongest outcome; conflicting affected/not-affected sources yield ambiguity. Platform and NVD flattened configuration do not preserve every platform/AND/OR/negation condition. KEV prioritizes known exploitation and has no exact version range of its own.

Package advice coordinates and limits
PURL typeOSV ecosystem
cargo / composer / gemcrates.io / Packagist / RubyGems
golang / hex / mavenGo / Hex / Maven
npm / nuget / pypinpm / NuGet / PyPI
deb / rpmNo generic mapping. Ubuntu/Debian need release-specific explicit ecosystem/name, not guessed backport support.

Advice needs a recorded version plus recognized PURL or explicit ecosystem/name. PURL version is removed for coordinate lookup; qualifiers remain. Maven namespace uses a colon, other namespaces slash. Six-hour cached advice expires; check the campaign’s current outcome. See Vulnerability Assurance — Guided Tasks & Findings. Package coordinates/version can be sent to configured public OSV; no full-record/local-only guarantee.

Empty, failed and retained paths

No product match, stale/partial intelligence or empty parsed scan evidence is not an all-clear result. The present intake auto-confirms complete evidence; retained candidate Confirm/Dismiss and installation-match endpoints are not universal offered buttons. A disabled/empty Asset picker can mean no eligible unassigned Asset. Check scope/status/VA eligibility rather than manufacturing a target.

Guided Tasks and CVE Findings

Guided Tasks group related vulnerability work so you can find the next useful action. The technical CVE register and finding history provide additional detail.

Separate uncertain software from actionable installed work

Uncertain software evidence and actionable installed campaigns are different views and populations.

Where to start

Find installed, confirmed work and make an evidence-based next decision without treating a grouped campaign as bulk closure.

VA → Campaigns, Customer CVE Register, or Public CVE catalogue

Workspace VA role; writes require a write role. Escalation, acceptance and verification review add specific role and state guards.

Step-by-step

  1. Select the intended view

    Work groups confirmed-relevant package/version cases with active installations; uncertain or unassigned software is not automatically customer work. History contains Accepted/Done. Customer CVE Register is scoped evidence, not the public corpus.

  2. Filter and inspect the selected campaign

    In Campaigns use Show shortcuts or expand More filters. Choose Campaign stage and Urgency, then Apply filters; Clear filters removes these filters while retaining the relevant software-list/Asset/member scope. Search active campaigns filters the package, CVE or server text displayed locally. Advice is displayed or selected through shortcuts, not a standalone advice dropdown. See the exact options below; clear filters before concluding no work exists.

  3. Read advice and every affected location

    Open case detail for related CVEs, source evidence, current score, installation states and timeline. A package can have several CVEs and Assets. Archived scope is read-only; a grouped action does not approve every CVE/location.

  4. Correct or clarify uncertainty where offered

    Save information requires a nonempty clarification answer and records history; it does not establish relevance. Correct the software facts then Save and check again. Retained detail controls are not proof uncertain records appear in current Campaigns.

  5. Record an applicability decision

    Use Yes, this CVE affects this version or No, this CVE does not affect this version with a rationale. Affected enters triage; not affected excludes open locations. Existing terminal outcomes prevent wholesale not-affected reclassification.

  6. Choose governed follow-up

    For initial confirmed affected work, eligible Create Jira Ticket or Create Risk and Treatment is deliberate. Inspect local/remote links before retrying. Work complete moves to verification, not Done; use the verification guide for each location.

Read advice before priority
AdviceInterpretation / next step
checking / needs_identityMissing evidence or recognized coordinates: clarify/check. Priority/due may be suppressed even if a historical value is stored.
update_requiredRecorded authoritative installed version needs action; no trustworthy target version established.
patch_availablePublished supported fixed-version target is guidance; validate applicability and implement a scoped change.
monitorKeep under review. Any monitor receipt takes precedence over suggested patch receipts.
already_fixedAll remaining advice receipts consider the recorded version fixed. Suppressed from default active work, without changing case verification state.

Advice cache lasts six hours; expired rows are excluded. Multiple fixed versions use packaging.Version; opaque disagreements become Monitor. Missing identity advice can project Update required when an authoritative inventory version exists. Never infer distribution backport/platform support solely from a text label. P1/P2 get alert styling; Checking/Monitor/Already fixed suppress urgency display. Dashboard planned includes unscored not-P1, while its shortcut is P2–P4, so counts can differ.

Jira, Risk and workflow consequences

Create Jira Ticket is initial-confirmed-only and uses one persisted matching VA reference; an uncertain provider/local result must be reconciled before another attempt. The modal offers Low/Medium/High/Critical and P1 prefill Critical, not backend-only Highest. Project ITSEC is read-only; non-Medium Priority and comma Labels are DESCRIPTION text at Jira, not guaranteed provider fields. Cancel before submit sends none.

Create Risk and Treatment requires Risk-owner/admin and a linked Asset; an existing linked Risk is reused. P1/2/3/4 → score 16/12/9/4, target 1/7/30/90 days, Planned Treatment 0%. Review those defaults as human business context. Per-CVE decision/rationale and terminal-location guards still apply. No universal direct Resolve or bulk-close shortcut is offered.

Public evidence is not installed applicability
View / controlOffered choices and action
Campaigns: ShowAll campaigns; Fixes in progress; Confirm fixes; Patch now; Normal patch cycle; Monitor and wait; High priority. Fixes in progress selects planning/in-progress lanes; Confirm fixes selects verification. Patch now selects actionable P1 work outside verification; Normal patch cycle selects actionable P2–P4 work outside verification. Monitor and wait selects monitor advice; High priority selects P1/P2.
More filters → Campaign stageAll active tasks; Plan the software update; Keep the package update moving; Verify the package update. In History: Accepted and completed; Review the temporary risk acceptance; View the completed package record.
More filters → UrgencyAll priorities; Urgent (P1); High (P2); Medium (P3); Low (P4). Apply filters submits; Clear filters clears the selection.
Customer CVE Register → StageAll stages; Initial review; Confirmed affected; Check the recorded software; Fix in progress; Verify the remediation result; Risk accepted; Resolved; Closed.
Customer CVE Register → Affected status / PriorityAll affected states, Affected or Not affected; Priority offers All priorities or P1, P2, P3, P4. Dropdown choices navigate directly; Reset filters clears filters, with no separate Submit action. CVE search splits terms and retains up to 80 characters.
Public CVE catalogue → SourceAll sources; NVD; CVE List V5; CISA KEV. This is public source evidence, not a list of installed customer vulnerabilities.

Normal confirmed, installed Campaigns group work as Respond to affected software and Verify remediation. The retained Check software and match group covers needs-information/needs-decision presentation paths; it does not cause uncertain or unassigned software to become normal installed customer work. Use the Customer CVE Register and software evidence to investigate those records rather than inventing a remediation campaign.

Public CVE catalogue searches only the public corpus: query up to 80 characters, source filter, 25 rows/page. Unavailable catalogue is an explicit failure, not zero customer exposure. NVD CVSS preference is 4.0/3.1/3.0/2 with Primary preference; flattened CPE rows lose AND/OR/negation meaning. CVE List reads CNA affected/not-affected rows, while stored platform is not a separate matching gate. KEV alone cannot prove an installed version affected.

Local corpus matching is separate from outbound configured OSV package/version advice. Successful Open campaign marks grouped routing notices reviewed, not case approval or closure. View campaign is navigation; retained Acknowledge endpoints are not new current buttons.

Remediate, Verify and Close

Choose the appropriate response for a confirmed finding: delivery work, a Risk and Treatment, or a time-limited acceptance where the workflow permits it.

Verify each location, not just the ticket

Illustrative two-location case: verifying one location does not verify the other or make acceptance a fix.

Where to start

Demonstrate the result for each affected installation before closing its vulnerability work.

VA campaign → selected CVE detail → remediation and verification

VA write access for work/evidence; review requires Reviewer, Risk Owner, Customer Admin or Technical Admin. Formal linked-risk acceptance permits Risk Owner/Customer Admin; a global Admin bypass still denies read-only writes. Scans additionally require Scanner/configured-service access and target authority.

Step-by-step

  1. Check the exact scope

    Read Product/version, CVE, case identity and every affected Asset/location. Record the proposed change and expected result. Advice such as Already fixed is not approved verification.

  2. Finish work, then request verification

    Once open locations are in remediation, enter What work was completed? and choose Work complete — verify the result. Locations move to awaiting verification, not remediated. A Jira resolved status can initiate this stage; it is not evidence of a fix.

  3. Choose technical evidence for one location

    For an active same-case/workspace location awaiting verification, enter Evidence reference and What changed and how was it checked? Both are required. Submit evidence for review creates a new attempt, not approval.

  4. Run verification only if suitable and authorised

    Run a verification scan starts the fixed Service-to-CVE (vuln) check for that exact awaiting location; it is not a general preset picker. Inspect the saved attempt/result. Unreachable or unsupported coverage is inconclusive; still detected returns work to remediation.

  5. Make the reviewer decision

    Read the attempt, provide Review note/rationale, then use Confirm the fix or Evidence is not enough according to the matrix below. A final review is once-only. Do not promote a pending scanner run to a successful test.

  6. Check the last affected location

    A verified location does not verify its neighbours. The case resolves only when all affected locations are terminal Verified, Accepted or Excluded. Preserve the prior evidence and inspect any later reopening.

Review outcomes and two-location example
Attempt statusPermitted interpretation
awaiting_evidenceA human can approve adequate submitted technical evidence with rationale; this is not permission to approve an unfinished scan.
not_detectedMay be approved after scope/coverage and evidence review; absence in a scan alone is not proof.
inconclusive / still_detectedCannot Confirm the fix. Reject/require fresh evidence; still detected reopens remediation.
Final reviewed outcome / archived scopeDo not overwrite a final review or write archived evidence. Preserve the history and follow the next offered attempt.

Fictional case: Asset A Verified, Asset B awaiting verification → case remains open. If B is properly Verified, Accepted or Excluded, the last-location rule can resolve it. Accepted means tolerated exposure, not patched software. Nmap version matches and vendor backports still require applicability judgment.

Accept exposure with expiry, separately from a fix
InputRequired value
Linked RiskMust exist; an active acceptance blocks another early acceptance.
Business Justification / Cost-Benefit / Compensating Controls / Approver TitleFour nonempty business fields. The signed-in actor supplies approver identity.
Acceptance months3 / 6 / 12 / 24. This VA form has no nine-month choice.
RenewalUse Renew acceptance with current evidence only when due/expired; previous/current timeline is retained.

Saving accepts affected locations and the linked Risk; it does not remove vulnerable software. This is not ordinary Risk Acceptance’s 3/6/9/12 selector. No generic close-all follows from a ticket, acceptance or one successful scan.

External work and advice limits

Risk/Jira resolution can set a Treatment headline to 90% and flag pending review, and VA work ready for verification. It does not close the Risk/VA technically. Risk’s separate Validate handler has its own completion consequences; inspect the full chain. Advice targets depend on coordinates/installed version, six-hour cache and public coverage. Distribution backports, unsupported templates, failed/empty observations, already_fixed and not_detected never replace the authorised reviewer decision.

Risk Management

Use Risk Management to identify, assess and track risks and their treatment or acceptance decisions.

Selected Risk assessment, treatment and formal acceptance have different persistence and immediate side effects.

Read acceptance side effects before saving. Completing work, reassessing residual risk and accepting exposure are distinct actions.

Where to start

Locate the saved business risk and choose the correct assessment, treatment, monitoring or evidence view.

Risk Management → Overview / Risk Register / Monitoring / Reports

Risk Assessment access is required for normal records; write restrictions apply. The separately registered Process Flow illustration has a login-only pass-through role wrapper, not the same module-role guarantee.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose the right view

    Overview is the estate summary; Risk Register is the searchable working list; Monitoring projects selected work plus global cards; Reports contains a hub and a separate generated HTML report.

  2. Filter the Register

    Search Risk ID, Asset name or description; choose stored category/status and risk level. Clear/reset to restore scope. Page size is ten. Missing score is not measured Low.

  3. Read the heatmap correctly

    The Register bubble x-axis is Likelihood and y-axis Impact, each 1–4; bubbles count saved risks at that pair under filters, additionally excluding Closed. A count is not unique security incidents.

  4. Open the saved Risk

    Use View/detail, Assessment/Edit, Manage Treatments, Acceptance or source references as appropriate. Confirm the display Risk ID and linked work before saving a decision.

  5. Preserve history

    Delete Risk only warns; it does not remove a risk. Process Guide/Process Flow explains organisation work, not an enforced or clickable task workflow. A status badge is not a complete formal acceptance.

View-specific metrics and bands
ViewActual population / formula
Register / generated all-record reportScore Low 1–4, Medium 5–9, High 10–15, Critical 16+ (normal 4×4 maximum 16).
Overview / Reports hubLegacy Low ≤5, Medium 6–14, High ≥15. Category averages/top 5 are not the Register’s formal levels.
MonitoringSeven active statuses Open/In Progress/Assessed/Treatment Planned/In Treatment/Monitoring/Mitigated; selected table scope differs from global cards. Accepted-status/total rate is not formal-record rate. Trend repeats counts rather than independent historical measurements.
Generated HTML reportAll Risk records, independent of current list filters. Formal acceptance rate=unique extant Risk IDs with formal Acceptance records / all Risks. Repeated records count once; overdue Treatments include non-Completed Superseded rows.
No resultsCheck filters/scope/score availability. Neither zero rows nor missing scores prove no business exposure.
Fictional acceptance denominator

Five saved Risks, two with formal acceptance records (one has two records) → formal-record rate 2/5=40%, not 3/5. If only one Risk’s status is Accepted, Monitoring’s status rate is 1/5=20%. View the actual approval/evidence; neither rate proves current-authorised acceptance. Save/Print the generated HTML as scoped evidence, not an immutable assessment version.

Diagrams and background
Risk reporting, analysis, decision and treatment workflow

Record the risk, assess likelihood and impact, make the responsible decision and track treatment evidence.

Creating a Risk

With the required permission, create a risk record describing the event, its potential impact and the relevant asset context.

Selected Risk assessment, treatment and formal acceptance have different persistence and immediate side effects.

Read acceptance side effects before saving. Completing work, reassessing residual risk and accepting exposure are distinct actions.

Where to start

Identify a scenario or assess the intended existing Risk without creating an unintended duplicate.

Risk Management → Risk Identification; or an existing Risk → Assessment / Edit Risk

Risk Assessment access and write permission. Exact Scanner finding handoffs additionally validate the saved source/Asset; a prefill is not a save.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose Identification or Assessment

    Identification records the scenario against a saved Asset name. It has no Target Completion Date control. New Assessment can select an Open/Identified Risk, or create a separate Open record if none is selected.

  2. Describe the human business scenario

    Choose Asset/category, explain event/cause/consequence, choose Likelihood/Impact 1–4, enter Mitigation Strategy and Responsible Party. Review exact source severity/evidence rather than adopting it as a business score.

  3. Keep the intended identity selected

    In Assessment retain Select Identified Risk on the record being assessed; auto-fill itself does not save. Selected submit updates that same Risk to Assessed; no selection creates a different Open Risk. Initial assessment hides Status Open and has no residual inputs.

  4. Submit and verify saved detail

    Use Submit Risk, then inspect display Risk ID, scenario and source. Exact finding-origin save stores a reciprocal source link and creates no automatic Jira/Treatment. A legacy whole-scan prefill is broader and does not create/backfill an exact finding association.

  5. Edit through the existing Risk

    Edit Risk keeps Asset name read-only. Complete Assessment sets Assessed; ordinary update uses the chosen Status. Enter both residual dimensions to retain their product; one omitted clears residual values. Cancel/leave before submit does not undo a previous save.

  6. Use Update Status deliberately

    Open its modal, choose one of the six offered statuses and optional Comments, then submit. It writes nonempty status plus audit history; Accepted here does not create a formal acceptance.

Assessment fields and distinct form variants
FieldRequiredness / values
Select Identified RiskOptional selector of eligible Open/Identified records; choose the intended identity for an update.
Asset NameRequired ≤100; selected/edited identity is protected; not a universal numeric Asset foreign key.
Risk CategoryRequired: Cybersecurity/Data Privacy/Operational/Compliance/Strategic/Reputational/Legal/Other.
Risk Description / Mitigation StrategyBoth required; describe scenario and planned response.
LikelihoodRequired Rare 1 / Unlikely 2 / Likely 3 / Almost Certain 4.
ImpactRequired Low 1 / Moderate 2 / High 3 / Critical 4.
Responsible PartyRequired ≤100.
Target Completion DateOptional YYYY-MM-DD on assessment/edit, not Identification; respect validation against past target date.
Edit StatusOpen/In Progress/Assessed/Treatment Planned/In Treatment/Monitoring/Mitigated/Accepted/Closed. Initial assessment is hidden Open.
Residual Likelihood / ImpactOptional PAIR in Edit, same 1–4 scales; absent pair means unassessed, not score 0.
Update Status modalOpen/In Progress/In Treatment/Mitigated/Accepted/Closed; optional Comments. Not all nine edit states.
Accepted has several different saved outcomes
Path to AcceptedWhat actually saves
Update Status modal → AcceptedStatus/audit comment only. No formal RiskAcceptance record.
Edit Risk → AcceptedIf absent, creates a six-month acceptance with preset rationale. Inspect those presets; they are not business approval by the named person.
Create NEW Treatment type AcceptSets Risk Accepted; creates preset six-month acceptance if absent. Editing existing type Accept is not that creation path.
Formal Risk Acceptance formRequired business evidence and approver/title, visible 3/6/9/12 months; unfinished Treatments become Superseded.
VA linked-risk acceptanceDifferent form, roles and expiry/renewal path; 3/6/12/24 months, no 9.
Saved source and error recovery

A stale/invalid exact source token or mismatched Asset is not permission to guess another association; return to the original finding. Check validation errors and the saved register before resubmitting. Identity selection updates a record, not an immutable draft/reassessment version. A source-free legacy Identification path can create an In Progress 20% Treatment when scan-derived Jira references already exist for that same Asset name; do not generalise exact-finding no-auto-work to every legacy path.

Risk Scoring

Risk scores combine likelihood and impact using the application's assessment scale. Review the score and its explanation in the risk record.

Illustrative four-by-four likelihood and impact risk matrix

Illustrative 4×4 scoring matrix; confirm the scale and decision rules used by the selected workflow.

Where to start

Apply the application’s human 4×4 business score, then interpret each view with its own thresholds.

Risk Identification / Assessment / Edit Risk; Register heatmap

Risk Assessment access; writes require permission. Technical severity and VA priority are separate inputs for judgment, not approved conversions.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose likelihood from the evidence

    Rare 1, Unlikely 2, Likely 3 or Almost Certain 4. Record why the scenario could occur in the assessed scope.

  2. Choose business impact

    Low 1, Moderate 2, High 3 or Critical 4. Consider the actual Asset/service consequence; a scanner observation alone is not business impact.

  3. Multiply and classify

    Initial score=Likelihood×Impact. Formal bands: Low 1–4, Medium 5–9, High 10–15, Critical 16. Use numbers/legend, not inconsistent legacy colours.

  4. Assess residual risk only after evidence

    On Edit, enter BOTH residual Likelihood and Impact. Residual score is their product; an incomplete pair clears the assessment rather than measuring zero exposure.

  5. Review the correct population

    Register x=Likelihood/y=Impact, bubble counts filtered non-Closed records. The illustration’s row/column orientation can differ; multiplication is the same. Do not interpret a bubble as a task or certified event.

All 16 scores and worked examples
Likelihood ↓ / Impact →1 Low2 Moderate3 High4 Critical
1 Rare1 Low2 Low3 Low4 Low
2 Unlikely2 Low4 Low6 Medium8 Medium
3 Likely3 Low6 Medium9 Medium12 High
4 Almost Certain4 Low8 Medium12 High16 Critical

Fictional initial Likely 3×Critical 4=12/High; after a verified response Unlikely 2×Moderate 2=4/Low residual. This is a recorded judgment, not automatically measured effectiveness. Missing/unassessed or numeric fallback zero is not a measured Low.

Do not merge incompatible scales
SourceDifferent rule
Overview / Reports hubLegacy Low ≤5, Medium 6–14, High ≥15.
Register / generated Risk reportFormal 1–4/5–9/10–15/16+.
Scanner post-Jira defaultsWorst whole-scan severity Low/Medium/High/Critical →rank 1/2/3/4 as both L and I →1/4/9/16.
VA escalation defaultsP1/P2/P3/P4 →16/12/9/4, with its separate target defaults.
CIAConfidentiality/integrity/availability assessment, not this likelihood×impact product.

These initial automation defaults require human business review. A 4 in Scanner’s Medium default is formally Low in the human Risk bands; record the source instead of claiming one universal colour/severity mapping.

Diagrams and background
Illustrative low, medium, high and critical risk-score ranges

Severity bands for the illustrative 4×4 scale.

Risk Treatment Plans

Record how your organisation will respond to a risk: mitigate, transfer, avoid or accept, as appropriate to the available workflow.

Selected Risk assessment, treatment and formal acceptance have different persistence and immediate side effects.

Read acceptance side effects before saving. Completing work, reassessing residual risk and accepting exposure are distinct actions.

Where to start

Save an owned response and validate its outcome without treating a percentage or external status as a technical test.

Selected Risk → Manage Treatments → Create Treatment; existing Treatment → Edit

Risk Assessment access and write permission. Confirm the owning Risk before every create/edit/delete/Validate.

Step-by-step

  1. Create formal work, not a summary-only draft

    Use the selected Risk’s Create Treatment form. Treatment Title, Type, Description and Responsible Party are required; Target Completion Date is optional. The broad summary Save Treatment Plan modal has no persistence handler—do not rely on it.

  2. Choose the response type carefully

    Mitigate, Accept, Transfer or Avoid. A NEW Accept treatment immediately sets Risk Accepted and can create the preset six-month record described below. Other new types put Risk In Treatment.

  3. Save and verify the parent

    Choose Add Treatment, then reopen the Treatment and Risk. New work is Planned. Cancel before save abandons the form, not an earlier committed record.

  4. Maintain real progress

    Edit offers Planned/In Progress/Completed/On Hold and a 0–100 progress control. Enter implementation evidence and a realistic date. Superseded is a retained outcome, not an ordinary edit choice.

  5. Confirm a new manual Completed transition

    Explicitly attest implementation/effectiveness confirmation. It sets 100% and validated progress. Only when all owning Treatments are Completed does this manual path set Risk Mitigated, except when Risk is Closed/Accepted.

  6. Handle Jira Validate separately

    Read the pending resolved-ticket evidence; use Validate only when that pending marker exists. The handler sets Completed 100%, Risk Mitigated and chain-reference review. Its parent-risk guards differ from manual completion: inspect other treatments and Accepted/Closed context first.

New Accept versus editing type

A new Accept treatment uses description as Business Justification, preset cost-benefit/controls and Responsible Party as approver with Risk Owner title; it creates a six-month Acceptance only if none exists. Presets are not facts independently approved by that person. Editing an existing treatment’s type to Accept does not perform this creation side effect. For a fully reasoned decision use Risks — Formal risk acceptance.

What an external resolved status changes

A changed nonempty Jira status Done/Resolved/Closed/Won’t Do/Cancelled flags pending review. The loopback selects the first Treatment linked by display Risk ID, skips Completed, and sets headline/evidence 90%; Planned becomes In Progress. It can lower an existing >90% headline. Risk is not thereby closed. Validate is a human decision, not an automatic technical re-scan. Refresh with no parsed change can still update its fetched timestamp.

Counts, validation and removal

Selected-Risk counts/statistics and missing-plan views use their respective Risk scope; the broad summary can show one presentation while several formal Treatments exist. Fictional A Completed/B On Hold leaves manual all-treatment completion false; B must be dealt with explicitly. UI progress bounds 0–100 do not add a backend range validator—the handler integer-coerces it. Keep inputs in the offered range. Delete Treatment removes that Treatment, not its Risk or a completed archive; Cancel/failed delete retains data. Delete Risk remains disabled.

Risk Module Connections

Risk records can retain asset context and links to relevant evidence. Assessment findings can inform the creation or review of risks.

Stored Asset–CIA link, dashed manual assessment context and separate risk review

The dashed Asset-to-assessment connection means manual context review, not a saved Asset link or automatic questionnaire scope. CIA and Risk decisions remain separate.

Where to start

Trace evidence into owned business decisions while distinguishing local references, external writes and automatic progress changes.

Risk detail → source / Manage Treatments / external references / Process Flow

Normal Risk records require Risk Assessment access. Connector/write guards are action-specific; Risk Refresh lacks the usual read-only decorator in inspected source, so do not assume a universal enforced read-only boundary. Process Flow separately requires login only.

Step-by-step

  1. Trace the originating evidence

    Use an exact finding source link when saved. Manual Asset/CIA/framework/Document/Supplier/Training citations are context, not automatic numeric relationships or synchronized decisions. Confirm the source time and scope.

  2. Follow owned Treatment records

    Open Manage Treatments with the selected Risk. Read all linked work before a validation or acceptance; a link is not completion.

  3. Create Jira work once when intended

    Use Create Jira Ticket, review Project ITSEC(read-only), required Summary, optional Description, Low/Medium/High/Critical, Task/Bug/Story and comma Labels. Non-Medium Priority/Labels become DESCRIPTION text. Inspect real key/local reference before retrying.

  4. Inspect the ensured Treatment

    Successful Risk Jira creation ensures work exists; if absent it creates In Progress 20% with 30-day target. Existing references warn, not prevent another external issue. Provider success, extracted key and saved local link are different outcomes.

  5. Treat Link Confluence as a provider write

    Selecting a result immediately stores page ID/title/URL locally and attempts an external timestamp stamp. Failure may leave the local link. Create/upsert can replace supplied remote body content; do not promise a harmless bookmark.

  6. Use Process Flow as a static illustration

    The diagram has no clickable task/node links or executable transitions. Its phase query does not advance a Risk. Eight retained fixed node-description pages are not record actions; an unknown node has no description.

Refresh versus review and actual consequences

Jira Refresh may parse and persist provider status/summary; even without parsed fields it can stamp updated_at and count refreshed. Only a changed nonempty old/new status triggers loopback. A resolved/closed/cancelled state flags Pending Review and a deduplicated bell; it can set the first non-Completed Treatment to 90%, with Planned→In Progress, and VA ready for verification. It does not prove a fix or automatically close Risk. Approved/Dismissed review badges are separate from provider status.

Confluence refresh updates title/time, not document approval. Scan/Azure references have no shared refresh handler. Do not use Risk Refresh as a workaround for the Asset macro’s wrong-entity defect. Provider success can lack a parsed ID; local failure is not atomic remote rollback. Reconcile both sides before retrying.

Keep downstream decisions separate

VA escalation can create a stored Risk/Treatment link with its own P-priority defaults. A Supplier approval, SoA answer, training completion or document publication does not follow from a manual Risk reference. Reports project their stated populations; neither report nor static process artwork creates an immutable assessment version or enforced approval.

Security and Compliance Assessments

Use the assessment that matches the question you need to answer. The Assessments area contains CIA, Rapid Assessment, ISO 27001, BSI C5 and EU AI Act; NIS2 has a separate workflow.

Six assessment workflows: CIA classification, Rapid Assessment, ISO 27001, BSI C5, EU AI Act and the separate NIS2 entry

Choose the owning workflow; NIS2 has a separate entry. Evidence reuse is not automatic cross-framework compliance.

Shared evidence supporting separate framework reviews

Reuse relevant evidence while keeping the requirements and conclusions of each review separate.

Record a defined scope

Complete the relevant questions or controls with accurate responses and supporting evidence. Review gaps and remediation options in that module.

Interpret results carefully

An assessment result describes the recorded scope and evidence. It is not a certification or a legal determination, and does not automatically satisfy another framework.

Where to start

Assessments or separate NIS2 Compliance navigation

Use the framework’s actual access; NIS2 is not granted simply by General Assessments.

Before you begin

Define the entity/system/service scope and the question being evaluated.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose the applicable workflow

    CIA concerns an existing Asset’s impact; Rapid is scoped posture; ISO/C5/EU AI have their own control/system context. NIS2 separates relevance and comprehensive assessment. Do not choose a framework merely because its score looks favourable.

    Choose the module

  2. Identify the evidence owners

    Keep Asset/CIA facts, Supplier approval/assurance, exact document version, policy source, learning completion and technical work distinct. A source existing elsewhere does not answer the selected control.

  3. Record the answer and evidence

    Use the selected module’s offered response/evidence fields and save lifecycle. Reuse evidence explicitly while keeping requirements, applicability and conclusions independent.

    Evidence handoff

  4. Track real follow-up

    Use the module’s actual remediation fields. Where no Assignee exists, record responsibility in supported notes or the governed external task; do not invent a universal owner/date control. Create a separate Risk only when its governance is needed.

  5. Read the exact result definitions

    Use the individual guides for their accepted algorithms, denominators, N/A/unanswered behaviour and report limits. Similar percentages are not interchangeable compliance measures.

  6. Retain open work

    Show unassessed items, missing evidence and unresolved decisions beside the report. Scope selection, output generation and a green badge are not certification or legal approval.

    Keep open work visible

Check the result

An explicit chain between chosen requirements, reviewed evidence and separately owned follow-up.

Current limits and common mistakes

Shared records do not automatically satisfy another framework or confer legal compliance. Loaded catalogue limits remain stated in individual guides.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Choose an Assessment

CIA evaluates an asset's protection needs. Rapid Assessment provides an initial security-posture review. ISO 27001, BSI C5 and EU AI Act address their respective assessment scopes.

Assessment workflow from scope through evidence, review and reporting

Context is selected first. Rapid/ISO/C5 create at Start Assessment; NIS2 comprehensive saves on Complete Assessment. Other controls remain module-specific; relevance is optional context and SoA belongs to ISO.

Open the individual task guide

Where to start

Application sidebar → Assessments; NIS2-only accounts use separate NIS2 Compliance

Hub requires sign-in and Admin, General Assessments, CIA, Rapid, ISO, C5 or EU AI permission. NIS2-only does not itself grant this Hub.

Before you begin

Know whether the task is Asset impact, organisational posture, framework controls or AI/cloud/NIS2 scope.

Step-by-step

  1. Open the permitted chooser

    Use Assessments under your own account. Missing access/card is a permission/configuration question, not evidence no assessment data exists or a reason to borrow credentials.

  2. Choose the appropriate card

    CIA/Rapid/ISO/C5/EU AI cards require their own role or General/Admin. NIS2’s card separately needs the dedicated NIS2 role; Admin/General alone does not make that card visible. Use Open Module or its heading shortcut where shown.

  3. Keep the module context clear

    CIA starts with an existing Asset. Rapid, ISO, C5 and EU AI have separate scope/context and records. SoA belongs to a selected ISO assessment, not a seventh Hub card or independent creation wizard.

    SoA belongs to the selected ISO record

  4. Use the intended NIS2 entry

    The Hub NIS2 card opens Comprehensive Assessment directly. Separate NIS2 Compliance provides relevance, saved lists and remediation; keep entity/assessment identity when moving between them.

    Separate relevance and Comprehensive flow

  5. Find existing work before creating

    In the owning module confirm the saved ID/state and use its documented New/Continue/View/Reassess action. The Hub has no Save, Submit, delete, filter, report generation or completion/approval action.

  6. Read usage as record counts

    The chart includes all stored states of CIA evaluations, Rapid, ISO, C5, EU AI and NIS2 Comprehensive records. NIS2 relevance/legacy populations are excluded. All six queried populations feed it even where a card is hidden; this is not a per-owner/tenant-filter guarantee.

  7. Read the successful zero or failure correctly

    If their sum is zero, No assessments have been created yet is the zero-record branch. A query/page error is not clean zero. Retain the visible error and use the responsible operator.

  8. Open output in the owning module

    Choose the intended saved record and its actual report prerequisite. Hub totals neither generate reports nor make a record eligible for them. Use the family-specific guide for accepted calculations and lifecycle exceptions.

    Read actual report scope

Usage example and old C5 bookmarks

Tooltip share is round(100 × family count / sum of all six family counts). With CIA 2, Rapid 1, ISO 1 and others 0, the shares are 50% / 25% / 25%. Units are saved records, including drafts/other states, not organisations or controls.

Old /assessments/bsi-c5, its trailing slash and subpaths redirect with GET301 to current /assessments/c5/ base/same subpath. They do not create a separate edition/wizard or preserve arbitrary old query parameters. Prefer the current card and reopen the saved identity; an obsolete subpath can still fail.

The alias has no independent assessment-role enforcement; its retained login wrapper is not a new authentication assurance. Ordinary target-route access and demo qualifications remain applicable.

Report entry and saved prerequisite
FamilyPrerequisite / output boundary
CIASelect/register the Asset first. Normal Report links use eligible completed states; direct routes can expose other phases. Inspect phase/identity; impact and measure acceptance are not implementation percentages.
RapidCompleted Reports picker; direct incomplete output has a draft qualification. Six names include Evidence Package as Technical HTML alias, not ZIP.
ISO 27001Completed parent for five offered types; Audit Evidence is disabled, not a sixth working export.
SoASelected ISO parent and saved Yes/No/Undefined; report requires completed ISO parent. Applicability is not implementation/approval.
BSI C5Completed selected assessment; four report types. No independent SoA, evidence ZIP, native PDF or offered edition/tier switch.
EU AI ActCompleted parent and selected scope; four reports. Exclusion, answer coverage and retained maturity are distinct from a legal conclusion.
NIS2Exact Comprehensive identity for Export Report; full Comprehensive population for Export Assessments. Legacy native PDF belongs to a different model, not universal Comprehensive/relevance export.

Check the result

The correct owning module and identifiable saved scope, without an assumed Hub mutation.

Current limits and common mistakes

Record share is not implementation, control/question coverage, legal compliance or catalogue completeness. Card marketing text is not source acceptance.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Diagrams and background

NIS2

Open NIS2 Compliance for its relevance assessment, gap review and remediation workflow.

Work through the selected module

Follow the current form and review the saved responses, gaps and available reports. Question counts, report options and approval steps differ between assessments.

Rapid Assessment

Use Rapid Assessment to establish an initial view of security posture. Select the relevant domains and answer the questions shown by the application.

Rapid: score, coverage and completed work are separate

Assumed example: use the exact population and formula, not a live score or certification claim.

Where to start

Assessments → Rapid Assessment → New Assessment

Use Rapid Assessment, General Assessments or Admin access. This does not automatically grant NIS2 access. Ordinary Read Only is subject to write guards; Rapid has no ISO/NIS2 demo write carve-out.

Before you begin

Have the organisation name, industry, size, date, assessor and intended assessment scope ready.

Fields and choices

FieldRequired / choiceHow to use it
Organization Name / Assessor NameRequiredUp to 100characters each; name the actual organisation and assessor.
Industry / Organization SizeRequiredUse the offered sector and employee-size category for the assessed entity.
Assessment DateRequiredChoose the date for the assessment evidence, not an inferred report date.
Email / Phone / Reference IDOptionalEmail must be valid if entered; phone up to 20characters, reference up to 20characters and unique for this Rapid assessment.
DomainsAt least oneSelect the intended scope before the question set is created.
Answer / CommentsQuestion-specificUse a valid offered answer; cite evidence and scope in Comments.
Needs Remediation / Plan / DeadlineFollow-up as neededSelecting the flag reveals plan/date fields; a recorded flag does not create a Risk Treatment.

Step-by-step

  1. Create the organisation context

    Complete required Organization Name, Industry, Organization Size, Assessment Date and Assessor Name. Email, Phone and Reference ID are optional; if you enter a reference, it must not duplicate an existing Rapid assessment. Keep the organisation and reference consistent with the evidence you will review.

  2. Select at least one domain

    Choose Next: Select Domains, select the relevant active domains and choose Next: Start Assessment. A new question set currently allocates 16 distinct questions across the selected domains. Saved sets retain their recorded question identities. If the catalogue cannot provide sufficient distinct coverage, correct the scope with the administrator; do not treat the failure as a saved assessment.

  3. Read the guidance and answer options

    Expand each domain, read each question’s Guidance and choose the offered answer that matches actual implementation. Options are attached to the question; do not infer that every question uses a universal answer list. Use Comments to cite the policy/version, asset, supplier decision or other evidence and explain uncertainty.

  4. Flag work on the question

    When follow-up is needed, select Needs Remediation. Enter Remediation Plan and a valid Remediation Deadline in the fields it reveals. This records question-level follow-up, not a formal Risk Treatment or an automatically created Jira issue.

  5. Continue the same saved draft

    Use Save as Draft before leaving incomplete work. Open All Assessments and use Continue on that record. Its recorded questions/answers are reused. For a completed record, use View or the deliberate Reassess action rather than starting a duplicate.

  6. Submit without confusing status and coverage

    Use Submit Assessment when ready. The current handler requires at least one valid answer, not every question to be answered. Inspect the answered/unanswered and applicable populations after submission; Completed does not mean all 16 questions were answered or every control implemented.

  7. Read Gap Analysis for this assessment

    Select the same assessment in Gap Analysis and inspect the affected domains, question responses and recommendations. Keep excluded/Not Applicable answers and unassessed questions distinct. Use the source evidence to decide which gaps need a deeper framework review or separately governed Risk.

  8. Maintain the Remediation Plan

    Open Remediation, select the assessment and choose View Remediation Plan. For each tracked question, edit its plan/deadline and use the completion checkbox only after reviewing the work. Save with Save Remediation Plan and reopen. This screen does not offer a universal remediation-owner field; record responsibility in the plan or supported external work.

  9. Understand the score side effect

    Saving remediation recalculates the Rapid score. A tracked item marked completed receives full implementation credit in that calculation; it is an operator-recorded outcome, not independent effectiveness testing. Not Applicable answers are excluded from the score denominator. No applicable assessed answers must remain distinct from a zero score.

  10. Review and retain a scoped report

    Open Reports, select this assessment and the offered Comprehensive Report, Executive Summary, Technical Details, Gap Analysis, Remediation Plan or Evidence Package. Check assessment identity, domain scope, answer coverage, excluded items and remediation status. Preserve the reviewed report externally if you need a historical baseline before reopening the assessment.

  11. Reassess or remove deliberately

    Reassess on a completed record reopens that same record as In Progress and clears its completion date; it does not create a new version or immutable copy. Review existing responses and remediation before resubmitting. Delete Assessment removes the selected assessment and its associated responses/domain links; it is not archive or remediation completion.

Exact behaviour and worked examples

Use the main steps for the normal journey. The detail below separates answer coverage, implementation credit and tracked work.

Exact setup choices, validation and save recovery

Choose the entity and preserve its draft identity

Organization Name and Assessor Name are required, at most 100 characters. Assessment Date must be valid YYYY-MM-DD. Optional Email must be valid and at most 100 characters; Phone and Reference ID at most 20. Reference must be unique when creating this Rapid assessment. Correct a duplicate reference on the returned page; do not blindly start another record.

Industry choices: Finance & Banking; Healthcare & Medical; Retail & E-commerce; Manufacturing; Technology & Software; Government & Public Sector; Education; Telecommunications; Energy & Utilities; Transportation & Logistics; Professional Services; Non-Profit; Other. Size: Micro 1–9, Small 10–49, Medium 50–249, Large 250+.

New setup resets wizard context; it does not erase an existing saved draft. Select active domains and use Start Assessment. The record is created after scope, reference and catalogue-sufficiency checks, not merely when opening New. A blank reference can be generated. With d selected domains, the new 16-question target allocates floor(16/d) each and one extra to the first remainder domains in sort order, subject to distinct-topic/catalogue sufficiency. Saved sets keep their question identities.

Correct an answer before resubmitting

Draft answers may be blank; final Submit needs at least one valid option belonging to its question. The complete recorded question identity list is checked. Invalid/unavailable answers or malformed deadlines return the entered correction page without committing: correct the highlighted choice/date, verify the same record and resubmit. Do not edit hidden IDs.

Partial/Not Implemented options can automatically select Needs Remediation and fill an empty suggested plan. Changing to Yes/N/A does not automatically clear the flag. Inspect flag, plan and deadline after every answer change. The on-screen progress counts selected answer groups, including N/A, divided by displayed questions; it is not implementation score. Ordinary Read Only cannot make these guarded writes; Rapid is not in the ISO/NIS2 demo write exception.

All Assessments shows newest IDs first, ten per page. Continue opens the selected draft; completed records open View. Reassess and Delete use selected-record confirmation dialogs: inspect the organisation, Cancel if wrong, confirm only deliberately. Reassess reopens the same completed record and clears its completion date; later Save/Submit establishes its draft/completed state. Delete is destructive, not an archive.

Score, coverage and the four-question worked example

Two percentages with different denominators

Implementation = 100 × sum of eligible valid non-N/A answer values ÷ number of those answered questions. Common options are Yes 1, Partial 0.5, No 0; use the actual stored option value for the question. A response with both Needs Remediation and Completed receives 1. N/A and unanswered questions are excluded from this score, not treated as zero. Each domain uses its own eligible answered population; overall weights questions, not equal-sized domains.

Assume four selected questions: Yes 1, Partial 0.5, No 0 and N/A. Implementation = (1 + 0.5 + 0) / 3 = 50%; coverage = 4 / 4 = 100%. Leave the fourth unanswered instead: implementation remains 50%, coverage becomes 75%. Mark the tracked No remediation Completed: contribution becomes 1 and implementation becomes 83.3%, while the original answer remains No.

A one-question Yes domain is 100%; a two-question Partial + No domain is 25%; combined implementation is 50%, not the 62.5% average of the two domain percentages. No eligible answers gives no numeric score. All answered/all N/A can show Not applicable; other empty cases show Not assessed.

Active scored gaps are eligible non-remediated values ≤0.5; strong report controls are ≥0.8 or credited completed remediation. Blank questions are missing evidence, not an active scored gap. The report’s total_questions is answered non-N/A rows; Gap Analysis’s similarly named total is selected questions minus N/A.

Read the Rapid hub and history populations

The hub cards count Completed and In Progress assessments; Not Started is a zero placeholder, not a counted queue. Its charts use valid question-owned answer rows from completed assessments, excluding answer text N/A / Not applicable and without remediation credit. The raw-answer pie bins are ≥0.8, ≥0.4–<0.8, and <0.4; they count answers, not the current assessment’s credited score or the Technical report’s four buckets.

The hub domain radar averages those raw values ×100 within active scored catalogue domains, rounded to an integer; unscored domains are omitted and the target is 80. A chart with no count data is empty, not evidence that all controls are compliant. All Assessments includes stored records newest ID first, ten per page—not a completed-only or immutable version history. Continue/View/reassess applies to the selected record.

Update remediation and interpret each report

Save tracked work without losing the date meaning

Remediation lists assessments with tracked work, including drafts. Check assessment/question identity; some summary counts can include retained rows outside the displayed scope. Edit Plan and Deadline, attest Completed only with reviewed evidence, then Save Remediation Plan and reopen. Blank deadline retains an old date; it does not clear it. An invalid supplied date warns while other plan/completion changes can still commit; score recalculation has a separate commit. Inspect both the plan and result after a warning. A domain success badge can mean no tracked work—even when answers are missing or scored gaps remain.

Offered reportRead it asBoundary
Executive SummaryScoped implementation/domain summary; descriptive bands ≥80/60/4080% radar is a display target. Advice selects the three lowest scored domains below 70%: below 40 Critical, below 60 High, otherwise Medium. These are template bands, not a risk calculation.
Technical Details / Evidence PackageSame Technical output, saved-response inventory and coverageEvidence is an alias, not ZIP. Score/100−score donut is not control counts; scored heatmap is capped at 160 cells and omits N/A/unanswered. Its count buckets are ≥0.8, 0.6–<0.8, 0.4–<0.6 and <0.4; the saved-row inventory need not contain a row for every selected question.
Gap AnalysisActive gaps ≤0.5 divided by answered applicable rowsGap level is (1−credited score)×100, not likelihood or impact.
Remediation PlanTracked active work and completed historyPriority groupings use <0.4 and 0.4–<0.6. Suggested 30/90/180-day timelines do not create saved dates, owners, reminders or Jira tasks.
ComprehensiveCombined inventory, score, distributions and detailDetailed gap cards use <0.6: custom 0.55 can appear here without the common ≤0.5 gap count. Donut counts and weighted centre score are different.

The default report picker uses completed records; explicit incomplete identities can render a draft notice. A completed label still allows partial answer coverage. Save as HTML / Print are browser controls, not native PDF or immutable snapshots; retain a reviewed old output before Reassess. Follow-up can cite Asset, CIA, Supplier, Document Dialog/ISP versions, Training and scan/VA evidence, then use the owning module for changes. Rapid tracking does not create a formal Risk Treatment or a universal question-owner/Jira record.

Check the result

A scoped rapid assessment and separately recorded gap/remediation work.

Current limits and common mistakes

A Rapid score is a scoped answer/remediation calculation, not a maturity certification, complete organisation inventory or technical test. Reassess mutates the existing assessment’s lifecycle; retain the old result first if comparison is needed. Completing a remediation checkbox can improve the score without an independent verification step.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background
Assessment workflow from scoping to review and reporting

Context is selected first. Rapid/ISO/C5 create at Start Assessment; NIS2 comprehensive saves on Complete Assessment. Other controls remain module-specific; relevance is optional context and SoA belongs to ISO.

Review your responses

Provide accurate answers and retain supporting information. The resulting score and gap analysis reflect the selected scope and recorded responses.

Choose the next action

Review recommendations and decide which issues need further assessment or risk treatment. Completion time depends on the scope and evidence available.

Illustrative response weighting and assessment report context

Scoring and outputs depend on the selected assessment and its recorded responses.

Illustrative maturity descriptions from incomplete to optimised

Illustrative maturity language; inspect the actual assessment scale and evidence.

ISO 27001 Assessment

Use the ISO 27001 assessment workflow to record control responses, evidence and applicability for your intended ISMS scope.

ISO: five selected controls, four applicable, two ratings

Assumed example: use the exact population and formula, not a live score or certification claim.

Where to start

Assessments → ISO 27001 → New Assessment

Use ISO 27001 Assessment, General Assessments or Admin access. This does not automatically grant NIS2 access. Read-only and scoped demo rules apply.

Before you begin

Prepare the organisation, assessor, date and concrete scope, plus implementation evidence for the controls you will select.

Fields and choices

FieldRequired / choiceHow to use it
Organization Name / Assessor NameRequiredUp to 100 characters each; identify the actual entity and assessor.
Industry / Organization Size / Assessment DateRequiredUse the offered categories and date for the assessment scope.
Email / Phone / Reference IDOptionalUse a valid email if entered; phone and reference up to 20 characters.
ISMS Scope / Existing ISMSOptional form fields; important scope contextDescribe the boundary; Existing ISMS is a factual checkbox, not an approval.
Current Certifications / Certification Body / Target Certification DateOptionalExisting references and intended target; not validation of certification.
Control categoriesAt least oneA.5 Organizational / A.6 People / A.7 Physical / A.8 Technological.
Implementation StatusAt least one for submissionEach applicable item: Implemented / Partially Implemented / Planned / Not Implemented / Not Applicable. Blank remains unassessed.
Maturity Level (0–5)OptionalOffered 0.5 steps; leave unknown maturity blank rather than entering zero.
Evidence / Identified Gaps / NotesEvidence-led reviewKeep source/version, missing implementation and scope rationale distinct.
Remediation Plan / Owner / Deadline / StatusFollow-up as neededNot Started / In Progress / Completed; record actual responsibility and supporting completion evidence.

Step-by-step

  1. Record the ISMS context

    Complete required Organization Name, Industry, Organization Size, Assessment Date and Assessor Name. Record ISMS Scope, Existing ISMS, Current Certifications, Certification Body and Target Certification Date where applicable. Email, Phone and Reference ID are optional. Describe systems, teams/sites and exclusions; entering a certification name is not verification that it is valid.

  2. Select the control categories

    Choose Next: Select Control Categories. Select at least one of A.5 Organizational, A.6 People, A.7 Physical or A.8 Technological Controls, then Next: Start Assessment. The offered catalogue determines the control population; selecting all categories is not a guarantee that the application contains every standard control.

  3. Open a control and record Implementation Status

    Choose Implemented, Partially Implemented, Planned, Not Implemented or Not Applicable for each relevant control. A blank status remains unassessed, not Not Implemented or an exclusion. Evaluate the control’s wording against the stated ISMS scope.

  4. Separate evidence, gaps and notes

    In Evidence, cite the actual document/version, record or technical result. In Identified Gaps, state what is missing. In Notes, explain scope and assumptions. A policy draft, supplier approval or training certificate can support an answer only to the extent it demonstrates this control.

  5. Record maturity only when assessed

    Use Maturity Level (0–5), with the offered 0.5 step, when you have assessed maturity. Leave it blank when unknown rather than entering zero. A maturity rating and Implementation Status answer different questions.

  6. Define the control’s remediation

    Use Remediation Plan, Remediation Owner, Remediation Deadline and Remediation Status (Not Started, In Progress or Completed) for follow-up. An owner/date is not proof the gap is fixed. Record why completion is supported before marking it.

  7. Save as Draft or Submit Assessment

    Save as Draft keeps the assessment In Progress. Submit Assessment requires at least one evaluated control; it does not require every selected control to have a response. Reopen the detail and check evaluated, unassessed, applicable and Not Applicable populations before interpreting the result.

  8. Continue or adjust the existing scope carefully

    Use Continue for the existing draft. A completed record must be reopened with Reassess before revising responses. Where returning to category selection, removing a category deletes its associated saved responses from this assessment. Preserve required evidence before narrowing the scope; do not assume removed answers are merely hidden.

  9. Review Gap Analysis and owned implementation work

    Select the same assessment in Gap Analysis. For an eligible gap with Jira enabled, review and deliberately submit Create Jira Ticket, then inspect the reference. Controls Implementation is an all-completed-assessment grid, not an assessment picker: identify each row’s assessment/control and update Status, Owner and Deadline with Update. This does not automatically rewrite a control’s original response or complete a separate Risk Treatment.

  10. Prepare the Statement of Applicability separately

    Open this assessment’s SoA. Save each applicability decision and its justification, then review it against scope and implementation. Not Applicable in an assessment response and an explicit SoA applicability decision are separate stored facts.

  11. Generate and review the intended report

    Open Reports, select the assessment and use its executive, technical, gap, comprehensive or SoA output. Inspect identity, scope, current catalogue, missing statuses/maturity and remediation. Report generation selects completed assessments. Audit Evidence is currently disabled as Coming Soon / Not Available; do not treat it as a working sixth export. The output is evidence for review, not certification or automatic approval.

  12. Reassess or delete with the right expectation

    Reassess reopens the same completed assessment as In Progress and clears its completion date; it does not create an immutable prior version. Retain the prior report before changing it if you need comparison. Delete Assessment removes that assessment and related response/applicability records; it is not an archive command.

Exact behaviour and worked examples

Keep implementation, applicability, response coverage and maturity separate. Expand the detail relevant to the task you are doing.

Exact setup, response validation and scope changes

Start new work or continue the saved draft

Organization Name and Assessor Name are required, up to 100 characters each. Select Industry and Organization Size and enter a valid Assessment Date (YYYY-MM-DD). Optional Email must be valid and at most 100 characters; Phone and Reference ID are at most 20 characters. A reference is an identifier, not an approval or a document version.

Industry choices: Finance & Banking; Healthcare & Medical; Retail & E-commerce; Manufacturing; Technology & Software; Government & Public Sector; Education; Telecommunications; Energy & Utilities; Transportation & Logistics; Professional Services; Non-Profit; Other. Size choices: Micro (1–9), Small (10–49), Medium (50–249), Large (250+). Optional ISMS Scope, Existing ISMS, Current Certifications, Certification Body (up to 100 characters) and a valid Target Certification Date record context, not awarded certification.

If New offers Continue Existing Draft or Start New Assessment, choose deliberately. Start New clears the wizard session, not the old saved draft. Select at least one A.5 Organizational / A.6 People / A.7 Physical / A.8 Technological category, then Start Assessment. The current source dictionary contains 48 definitions, not established full 93-control coverage; check the actual offered catalogue. Existing category changes persist at Next and delete responses for deselected categories. Out-of-scope SoA rows can remain stored but are excluded from current counts.

The control form offers a blank choice or Implemented, Partially Implemented, Planned, Not Implemented and Not Applicable. Maturity is optional: the visible input offers 0–5 in 0.5 steps. Evidence, Identified Gaps and Notes are separate free-text fields. Follow-up offers Plan, Owner, Deadline and Not Started / In Progress / Completed. The Owner form declares a 100-character limit; the active response parser does not enforce every nested field validator. Do not rely on the UI as an all-or-nothing validation guarantee.

Entering a deficient status can show remediation and fill an empty suggested plan. Implemented, N/A or blank hides that card without clearing an earlier plan, date or status. Inspect retained work after changing the answer. The parser clamps numeric maturity to 0–5; malformed maturity becomes missing, not a verified zero. Final Submit requires one nonempty status, not every selected item. An invalid response deadline can roll back the response save and rebuild the page from previously saved rows; re-check your unsaved entries instead of assuming they survived.

Continue uses the existing In Progress record; completed records require deliberate Reassess. Reassess clears completion date on that same record; retain the earlier output first. If an invalid-state action returns an error, reopen the saved list and verify status rather than assuming a seamless redirect. Delete is destructive; the current delete handler lacks the ordinary Read Only guard used on neighbouring writes. Do not use an Admin/read-only account as proof that deletion is safe or reversible. The ISO demo exception covers only its specifically allowed setup/response/reassess/SoA paths, not Delete or Jira.

Compliance, maturity and the five-control worked example

Count selected controls before calculating

Applicable = selected catalogue controls minus explicit Not Applicable. Missing responses and blank statuses stay applicable and unassessed. A deficiency is Partial, Planned, Not Implemented, or an answered applicable control with maturity <3. Gaps = deficiencies + unassessed applicable controls. Compliance = (applicable−gaps) / applicable ×100; assessment coverage = assessed applicable / applicable ×100. Detail status percentages instead use all selected controls, including N/A.

Assume five selected controls: N/A; Implemented with maturity 4; Implemented with maturity 2; Partial with blank maturity; unanswered. Applicable =4, deficiencies =2, unassessed =1, gaps =3. Compliance =25%; coverage =75%; gap rate =75%.

Maturity uses every selected non-N/A control as the eligible population, including missing rows. A mean needs at least one entered rating and ratings on at least 50% of that eligible population. Two ratings of 4 and 2 out of four meet 50%: mean =3.0. Remove the 2 rating: one of four is 25%, so show Insufficient data, not 4.0. All N/A gives no maturity mean. Bands: ≥4 Optimizing, ≥3 Defined, ≥2 Managed, ≥1 Initial, below 1 Not Implemented.

Read ISO history and hub charts separately

History lists all stored assessments newest creation date first, without a generic server filter or pagination. It checks current sufficiency but can display stored overall maturity, whereas detail/report recalculates selected scope. Its history average uses truthy stored values and can omit numeric zero; no immutable earlier version is created by listing a record.

The hub cards count Completed and In Progress records; Not Started is a zero placeholder, not a measured queue. The hub radar averages non-null entered ratings in each catalogue category from completed assessments only, rounded to one decimal. It does not use this selected assessment’s N/A/50% gate; an empty category can show zero, and target 4.0 is a display reference. The hub status pie instead includes completed and In Progress assessment response rows. It counts only recognized Implemented / Partially Implemented / Planned / Not Implemented / Not Applicable statuses; missing/unknown rows do not become a sixth assessed bucket. Do not confuse it with selected-scope status distributions.

Controls Implementation, Jira, SoA and report detail

Select and order the Gap Analysis screen

Without an explicit saved assessment ID, Gap Analysis defaults to the latest completed assessment by completion date—not the newest-created record or newest assessment date. An explicit saved-ID link can open a different record; the dropdown lists completed records ordered by assessment date. Verify the displayed identity before acting. With no completed default available, the page warns and returns to the module hub.

Screen High priority means a missing/unassessed response or Not Implemented. Medium means other gaps included by this module’s screen rule. Rows sort High first, then Medium; within each group, saved remediation deadline sorts ascending, with unset deadlines last. These are screen priority/sort rules, not the report’s severity charts or suggested timelines. Preserve the module-specific N/A and maturity rules explained above.

Update the right assessment/control row

ISO Controls Implementation is an all-completed-assessment grid of responses with nonempty plans—not a selected-assessment picker. Identify the assessment and control on each row. Details is read-only. Pending, In Progress, Completed and Overdue tabs are mutually exclusive here: an overdue active row is removed from Pending/In Progress. Update batch-saves submitted Status, Owner and Deadline. Blank deadline clears it; an invalid date silently retains the old date. Completed remediation does not rewrite Implementation Status or Maturity.

Use the exact Jira ticket fields

Visible controlChoice or requirement
ProjectRead-only ITSEC; this modal is not a project selector.
SummaryRequired; review the actual record/measure/question context.
DescriptionOptional; review any prefilled evidence and scope.
PriorityLow / Medium / High / Critical; template default Medium—review the current selection.
TypeTask / Bug / Story; template default Task—review the current selection. The visible label is Type, not Issue Type.
Labels (comma-separated)Enter separate labels with commas; inspect the offered defaults.

Use Cancel if the target or content is wrong. Otherwise choose Create Ticket once and inspect the returned issue and local reference. This is an external write, not a saved answer, approval or formal Risk Treatment. If the outcome is uncertain, reconcile the owning record before retrying. Each module’s reference identity remains different, as described below.

ISO’s gap action stores an iso27001_response-labelled reference using the assessment ID, not the exact response ID. Review it as assessment-context follow-up, not a guaranteed per-control automatic round trip. SoA is a separate saved Yes/No/Undefined decision; open the SoA guide for filtering, saved counts and report-signature limits. Citing documents, Supplier assurance, Training, Asset/CIA or scan evidence does not automatically update an ISO response.

ReportWhat to check
Executive / ComprehensiveApplicable scope, deficiencies, unassessed and maturity sufficiency. Broad conclusions are qualified when scope is empty/unassessed. Resource requirements are Not Assessed; advice does not calculate saved dates.
TechnicalImplementation chart omits Planned/N/A/unassessed. Histogram excludes N/A and truncates entered ratings to integer bins (2.5 → bin 2), not the 50%-gated mean. “No gaps identified” can mean blank gap text despite a status/maturity deficiency.
GapFull gap count includes unassessed and low-maturity Implemented rows; the three-status severity chart does not. Suggested priority/timelines are not saved plan fields.
Comprehensive detailFull inventory retains unassessed rows; remediation detail lists assessed deficiencies only. Do not treat the detail list as every gap.
SoA / Audit EvidenceSoA uses separate applicability decisions. Audit Evidence is disabled Coming Soon / Not Available, not an active sixth export.

Five active report types require a completed parent: Executive, Technical, Gap, SoA and Comprehensive. Invalid output choice returns an error rather than an invented type. Technical “High Risk” rows are template labels, not computed Risk scores, and no reliable global ten-row cap is established. Executive advice uses the three lowest categories below 70%, available maturity <3, deficiencies >10 and lack of an existing ISMS. Comprehensive uses gaps >20 and maturity <2. Gap priority/timeline recommendations follow No/Partial/Planned status, not saved priority dates. These are template rules, not separately measured control effectiveness.

Use the selected assessment’s report controls, then Save as HTML or Print. Print opens the browser print dialogue; choosing its PDF destination is not a native server PDF export. Save serializes the current report and can retain external/relative CSS, scripts and links. It is not a self-contained, signed or immutable evidence package. Check the saved file’s identity, date, scope, coverage and readability before sharing. Generation itself does not change answers, approvals or remediation.

Check the result

A ISO 27001 assessment and evidence-led view of its selected controls.

Current limits and common mistakes

The current application catalogue is not guaranteed to cover the complete ISO 27001 standard. Selected scope, response coverage, applicability, maturity and remediation are distinct. Reassess updates the existing record, while deselecting ISO categories prunes their responses. A generated SoA/report has no separate formal approval merely because it was saved.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background
Assessment workflow from scope through evidence, review and reporting

Context is selected first. Rapid/ISO/C5 create at Start Assessment; NIS2 comprehensive saves on Complete Assessment. Other controls remain module-specific; relevance is optional context and SoA belongs to ISO.

Work through the controls

Enter organisation information, select the scope and record each relevant response. Review gaps and remediation work rather than treating an unanswered control as a verified conclusion.

Prepare the Statement of Applicability

Generate and review the SoA from the recorded assessment. Confirm applicability, exclusion reasons and evidence with the responsible ISMS owner. The assessment itself does not award certification.

EU AI Act Assessment

Use this assessment to evaluate your organisation's AI systems against Regulation (EU) 2024/1689. It turns AI governance, risk, transparency and human-oversight obligations into a scoped evidence and remediation workflow.

EU AI assessment scope follows recorded role and system context

Use the exact context, selected domains and stored answers when interpreting EU AI Act output.

Where to start

Assessments → EU AI Act → New Assessment

Use EU AI Act Assessment, General Assessments or Admin access. This does not automatically grant NIS2 access. Ordinary Read Only is subject to write guards; EU AI Act has no ISO/NIS2 demo write carve-out.

Before you begin

Prepare the organisation, assessor, date and concrete scope, plus implementation evidence for the controls you will select.

Fields and choices

FieldRequired / choiceHow to use it
Organization Name / Assessor NameRequiredUp to 100 characters each; identify the actual entity and assessor.
Industry / Organization Size / Assessment DateRequiredUse the offered categories and date for the assessment scope.
Email / Phone / Reference IDOptionalUse a valid email if entered; phone and reference up to 20 characters.
Organization’s AI Role / AI Deployment RegionRequiredFive role choices and three region choices; select the actual offered context.
AI System Risk Categories / AI Use SectorsOptional context selectionsUse the offered multi-select values: system categories can filter questions; use sectors are stored context, not additional filter inputs.
Assessment ScopeOptional form field; document the boundaryIdentify systems/operations and any scope rationale.
Assessment domainsAt least oneReview the resulting role/system-filtered question population.
Implementation StatusAt least one for submissionEach applicable item: Implemented / Partially Implemented / Planned / Not Implemented / Not Applicable. Blank remains unassessed.
Maturity Level (0–5)OptionalOffered 0.5 steps; leave unknown maturity blank rather than entering zero.
Evidence / Identified Gaps / NotesEvidence-led reviewKeep source/version, missing implementation and scope rationale distinct.
Remediation Plan / Owner / Deadline / StatusFollow-up as neededNot Started / In Progress / Completed; record actual responsibility and supporting completion evidence.

Step-by-step

  1. Identify the organisation and assessor

    Complete Organization Name, Industry, Organization Size, Assessment Date and Assessor Name. Optional Email, Phone and Reference ID identify the record. The AI form has its own employee-size choices, including Enterprise; choose the offered value for this entity.

  2. Set the required AI role and region

    Choose Organization’s AI Role: Provider, Deployer, Both Provider and Deployer, Importer or Distributor. Choose AI Deployment Region: EU Only, EU and International, or International (serving EU market). These are assessment context, not a legal determination or an inferred role from an integration.

  3. Describe the systems, risk categories and use sectors

    Select relevant AI System Risk Categories (High-Risk, Limited-Risk, Minimal-Risk, GPAI and/or checking prohibited practices), the actual AI Use Sectors and Assessment Scope. Name the systems and operations covered. Do not omit a difficult system merely to improve the assessment result.

  4. Choose the assessment domains

    Use Next: Select Assessment Domains and select at least one domain, then Next: Start Assessment. The catalogue includes governance/strategy, risk classification/prohibited practices, risk management, data governance, documentation/logging, transparency/human oversight, accuracy/robustness/cybersecurity and conformity/compliance/monitoring. Role/risk context can filter the question population.

  5. Distinguish filtering from an answer

    Role and selected system types drive the application’s relevance filter. Context-excluded questions are omitted from the active answer form and stored as N/A only after successful saving; keep the reason for exclusion distinct from an operator-selected N/A or an unanswered in-scope question. Read the selected scope and displayed population before answering and before sharing a report.

  6. Record implementation evidence for each in-scope question

    Choose Implemented, Partially Implemented, Planned, Not Implemented or Not Applicable. Add Evidence, Identified Gaps and Notes that describe the actual system, policy/version, oversight arrangement or technical result. A generated AI answer is not source evidence by itself.

  7. Record maturity and remediation

    Use Maturity Level (0–5, offered 0.5 steps) only when assessed. Add Remediation Plan, Owner, Deadline and Status for a gap. Human-oversight or AI-literacy evidence can cite an actual training record; a course certificate does not automatically complete this question.

  8. Save as Draft or Submit Assessment

    Save as Draft keeps In Progress. Submit Assessment requires at least one evaluated question, not complete coverage. Reopen the saved record and inspect unanswered in-scope questions, exclusions and maturity availability. Unknown maturity must not be reported as zero.

  9. Continue or change the domain scope on the same record

    Continue opens an existing draft; a completed record needs Reassess first. Back to Domain Selection revises the In Progress record’s selected domains, not a separate assessment. Older domain responses can remain stored; recheck saved AI context and the new active population; do not infer that a removed domain was approved.

  10. Own gaps and reviewed external follow-up

    Use the same assessment in Gap Analysis and Controls Implementation. Maintain plan, owner, deadline and status. Where enabled and eligible, review Create Jira Ticket and submit once, then check its reference. A ticket’s resolution is not an automatic legal compliance approval or a rewrite of every assessment response.

  11. Generate the correct AI-system report

    Use Reports and select this assessment’s executive, technical, gap or comprehensive output. Review role, region, system/sector scope, filtered versus Not Applicable versus unassessed population, evidence, gaps and maturity coverage before using it.

  12. Reassess or delete deliberately

    Reassess reopens this same completed assessment and clears its completion date; it does not freeze a prior version. Preserve the report before revising if comparison is needed. Delete Assessment removes the assessment and related responses/domain links. Keep required governance evidence outside a record you intend to delete.

Exact behaviour and worked examples

Context filtering, N/A, implementation and maturity remain different facts. Expand the detail for the current task.

Exact context choices, filtering and save recovery

Organization Name and Assessor Name are required, up to 100 characters each. Select Industry and Organization Size and enter a valid Assessment Date (YYYY-MM-DD). Optional Email must be valid and at most 100 characters; Phone and Reference ID are at most 20 characters. A reference is an identifier, not an approval or a document version.

Industry offers the same thirteen categories as Rapid plus Defense & Security: Finance & Banking; Healthcare & Medical; Retail & E-commerce; Manufacturing; Technology & Software; Government & Public Sector; Education; Telecommunications; Energy & Utilities; Transportation & Logistics; Professional Services; Non-Profit; Other. Size differs: Micro 1–9, Small 10–49, Medium 50–249, Large 250–999, Enterprise 1000+. Required AI Role: Provider, Deployer, Both Provider and Deployer, Importer, Distributor. Required Region: EU Only, EU and International, International serving the EU market.

Optional System Risk Categories: High-Risk (Annex III), Limited-Risk, Minimal-Risk, GPAI, Check Prohibited Practices. Optional Use Sectors: Healthcare, Finance & Insurance, Education & Training, Law Enforcement, HR & Recruitment, Critical Infrastructure, Transportation, Public Services, Other. Scope, region and sectors are recorded context; the current question filter uses role and system categories, not region/sector as additional filter inputs.

Select at least one of the eight displayed domains. Both Provider and Deployer matches both role branches; unknown relevance metadata defaults relevant. Checking prohibited practices does not establish a separate dedicated filter branch or a legal prohibition decision. Non-relevant questions are omitted from the active answer form. Only successful Save/Submit creates or updates their N/A state and automatic-exclusion notes; simply opening the page does not save exclusions. Older maturity, evidence and plans can remain on excluded rows.

New without resume clears wizard context. Duplicate Reference at setup or domain creation returns pending context for correction; fix it rather than start a second record. Existing draft selection restores authoritative organisation context from that saved record; going back and changing setup text is not an established organisation editor. Domain changes replace associations without deleting old response rows.

The control form offers a blank choice or Implemented, Partially Implemented, Planned, Not Implemented and Not Applicable. Maturity is optional: the visible input offers 0–5 in 0.5 steps. Evidence, Identified Gaps and Notes are separate free-text fields. Follow-up offers Plan, Owner, Deadline and Not Started / In Progress / Completed. The Owner form declares a 100-character limit; the active response parser does not enforce every nested field validator. Do not rely on the UI as an all-or-nothing validation guarantee.

Entering a deficient status can show remediation and fill an empty suggested plan. Implemented, N/A or blank hides that card without clearing an earlier plan, date or status. Inspect retained work after changing the answer. The parser clamps numeric maturity to 0–5; malformed maturity becomes missing, not a verified zero. Final Submit requires one nonempty status, not every selected item. An invalid response deadline can roll back the response save and rebuild the page from previously saved rows; re-check your unsaved entries instead of assuming they survived.

Continue and Reassess use the same saved identity. Reassess clears completion date; retain prior output first. Invalid-state fallback can fail: reopen the current list and inspect saved status. Delete is a guarded destructive operation, not archival. These recorded form choices are not a legal determination of the organisation’s duties.

Applicable denominator and the four-question worked example

Current detail/list/reports use questions in the selected domains. Unknown statuses normalize to Not Assessed. Applicable = selected total minus N/A; compliance = Implemented / applicable ×100; gaps = applicable−Implemented. Partial, Planned, No, blank and missing remain gaps with no partial compliance credit. Status-distribution bars instead use all selected questions, including N/A.

Four assumed AI questions yield three applicable and 33.3 percent compliance, while retained N/A maturity remains in the 2.3 mean

N/A is excluded from compliance, while a retained entered N/A maturity can still affect the mean.

Assume Implemented 4, N/A 2, Partial 1 and unanswered. Applicable =3, compliance =1/3=33.3%, gaps =2. Maturity =(4+2+1)/3=2.3/5 (Managed), including the retained N/A rating; there is no 50% gate. All four N/A gives Not applicable, not 100% compliance; old ratings can still give a maturity mean. Completed can describe a partially answered submission.

Maturity bands: ≥4 Optimizing, ≥3 Defined, ≥2 Managed, ≥1 Initial, below 1 Not Implemented. No entered ratings gives no mean. Stored overall maturity can include old out-of-scope responses, while canonical display filters selected domains: current 4 and 2 plus old out-of-scope 0 can mean stored 2.0 versus displayed 3.0.

Read the EU AI Act hub and history

History includes all stored assessments newest creation date first, without a generic server filter/pagination. Its displayed average is the simple mean of available current-state maturity means on completed records, including numeric zero and excluding unavailable means. It is not a response-weighted overall mean or a legal compliance score.

The hub cards count Completed and In Progress records. Its radar averages non-null raw ratings on completed response rows by catalogue domain, rounded to one decimal, with unavailable empty domains and fixed target 4.0. Its pie also uses completed records, counting only recognized stored Implemented / Partially Implemented / Planned / Not Implemented / Not Applicable statuses. Blank/unknown rows are omitted. These aggregate populations are not the selected-record six-status bars, applicability calculation or legal relevance result.

Implementation work, external tasks and four reports

Select and order the Gap Analysis screen

Without an explicit saved assessment ID, Gap Analysis defaults to the latest completed assessment by completion date—not the newest-created record or newest assessment date. An explicit saved-ID link can open a different record; the dropdown lists completed records ordered by assessment date. Verify the displayed identity before acting. With no completed default available, the page warns and returns to the module hub.

Screen High priority means a missing/unassessed response or Not Implemented. Medium means other gaps included by this module’s screen rule. Rows sort High first, then Medium; within each group, saved remediation deadline sorts ascending, with unset deadlines last. These are screen priority/sort rules, not the report’s severity charts or suggested timelines. Preserve the module-specific N/A and maturity rules explained above.

Controls Implementation selects a completed assessment with nonempty plans, yet old unselected-domain or automatically excluded retained plans can remain visible. Identify the row and its original scope before editing. Overdue overlaps active Pending/In Progress; do not sum tabs as mutually exclusive. Batch Save uses submitted response IDs, not C5’s exact eligible-ID guard; the returned assessment context is not proof of universal row/tenant isolation. Blank deadline clears; invalid date retains the old value. Completed plan status does not rewrite the original question or establish legal compliance.

Use the exact Jira ticket fields

Visible controlChoice or requirement
ProjectRead-only ITSEC; this modal is not a project selector.
SummaryRequired; review the actual record/measure/question context.
DescriptionOptional; review any prefilled evidence and scope.
PriorityLow / Medium / High / Critical; template default Medium—review the current selection.
TypeTask / Bug / Story; template default Task—review the current selection. The visible label is Type, not Issue Type.
Labels (comma-separated)Enter separate labels with commas; inspect the offered defaults.

Use Cancel if the target or content is wrong. Otherwise choose Create Ticket once and inspect the returned issue and local reference. This is an external write, not a saved answer, approval or formal Risk Treatment. If the outcome is uncertain, reconcile the owning record before retrying. Each module’s reference identity remains different, as described below.

The euai_response-labelled reference uses assessment ID, not the exact question response ID. Review the returned issue and local reference rather than promising automatic question closure. There is no dedicated direct Confluence link or SoA here. Documents/ISP, Training and Supplier assurance can be cited as evidence; update those records in their own modules. Asset/CIA/scan/VA findings support a risk review, not an automatic AI questionnaire answer.

ReportInterpretation and limits
ExecutiveApplicable compliance and available maturity. All-N/A suppresses the broad recommendations/conclusion block. ≥80/60/40 domain labels are report bands, not a legal compliance finding.
TechnicalFull selected question inventory, article metadata and saved exclusion reason/notes. Manual N/A is not automatically a legal exclusion; no recorded marker means no recorded automatic reason.
GapMissing/unassessed included; saved plan/owner/date or Not documented. Question/gap excerpts can be 200/50 characters. A no-gap narrative cannot certify the organisation outside the selected recorded scope.
ComprehensiveInventory, gap roadmap, full saved notes and 80-character Evidence excerpts. Blank scope’s generic fallback wording is not proof of full AI-system coverage.

The four reports require a completed parent and use current selected state; an unknown type redirects with error. Executive advice selects three scored domains below 70%, available maturity <3 and gaps >5; absent compliance suppresses its broad recommendation block. There is no native PDF, signed approval or universal legal coverage established by this output.

Use the selected assessment’s report controls, then Save as HTML or Print. Print opens the browser print dialogue; choosing its PDF destination is not a native server PDF export. Save serializes the current report and can retain external/relative CSS, scripts and links. It is not a self-contained, signed or immutable evidence package. Check the saved file’s identity, date, scope, coverage and readability before sharing. Generation itself does not change answers, approvals or remediation.

Check the result

A EU AI Act assessment and evidence-led view of its selected controls.

Current limits and common mistakes

This module evaluates recorded AI-system context and answers; it does not decide the organisation’s legal duties or certify compliance. Filtering, Not Applicable and unanswered questions are different populations. Its AI-role form does not represent every possible legal-role combination. VA is separate software/CVE assurance, not this AI-governance questionnaire.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

Start with the AI context

Create an assessment and state your organisation's role (provider, deployer, importer, distributor or a combination), the relevant AI-system types, deployment region and use sectors. This context keeps the assessment focused on obligations that apply to the systems you actually operate.

Work through the applicable domains

AreaWhat you record
Governance and accountabilityOwnership, policies and responsible oversight for the AI system.
Risk management and data governanceRisk controls, data quality and evidence of operation.
Transparency and human oversightUser information, monitoring and human intervention arrangements.
Technical documentation and complianceTechnical evidence, gaps, remediation and report-ready records.
1

Create and scope the assessment

Enter the organisation and AI-system context, then select the applicable domains.

2

Assess questions and evidence

For each applicable question, record implementation status, maturity, evidence, gaps and notes. Questions that do not fit the chosen role or risk level stay out of the active scope.

3

Review gaps and remediation

Use the gap view and implementation tracking to turn incomplete controls into owned work. A Jira ticket can be created from an eligible gap where that connector is enabled.

4

Generate evidence-led reports

Use the executive, technical, gap or comprehensive report to explain the current assessment state without treating missing maturity data as a zero score.

Separate from Vulnerability Assurance

EU AI Act assessment evaluates AI-system obligations. Vulnerability Assurance is the separate workflow for recorded software and public vulnerability evidence. Both can contribute to a wider risk picture without overwriting one another's decisions.

NIS2 Compliance

The NIS2 module supports a relevance assessment, gap analysis and remediation planning.

NIS2: optional relevance context, saved answers, separate work

Separate saved records and decisions; inspect the actual outcome after submission.

Where to start

NIS2 Compliance → Relevance Check, Comprehensive Assessment or the saved assessment’s Remediation Planning

Ordinary access requires the dedicated NIS2 role; Admin/General Assessments alone is not a bypass. Only the fail-closed shared demo identity has the explicitly scoped exceptions detailed below; ordinary Read Only does not gain those writes.

Before you begin

Gather accurate organisation/sector/service/size context and implementation evidence. Review legal applicability with your responsible specialist.

Fields and choices

FieldRequired / choiceHow to use it
Relevance: organisation / sector / dateRequired on its formUse the exact assessed entity and the selected sector/date.
Relevance: size / annual turnoverRequiredEmployee-size range; turnover in million EUR. Calculation assumptions are not exact entered headcounts.
Relevance: prior classification / EU contextRequired choicesKRITIS/NIS1 Yes/No/Not sure; EU operations and EU-customer services.
Relevance: digital services / sector detailConditionalAnswer only the context shown, with accurate capacity/regulator/service facts.
Comprehensive: Organization NameRequiredThe actual questionnaire’s only organisation-context input; verify any incoming relevance context.
Comprehensive:40question answers / TrackReview each questionYes / Partial / No / N/A, plus remediation tracking. No five-state status or 0–5 maturity input.
Manual item: TitleRequiredName the actual remediation; optional Description, Category, Priority and Target Completion Date.
Edit item: Status / Progress / Implementation NotesMaintain deliberatelyOpen / In Progress / Pending / Completed; progress 0–100. There is no offered Assignee field.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose the correct NIS2 workflow

    Relevance Check records whether the organisation may be in scope. Comprehensive Assessment records answers about implementation. They are separate saved records and use different forms; a relevance classification does not answer the comprehensive questions.

  2. Enter the relevance inputs in their actual units

    In Relevance Check, enter Organization Name, Sector, Entity Size Category, Annual Turnover (in million EUR), prior KRITIS/NIS1 classification, EU operations/services and Assessment Date. Enter turnover as millions, not whole EUR. Entity size is a range (Micro <10, Small 10–49, Medium 50–249, Large ≥250), not an exact employee-number field.

  3. Complete the relevant conditional context

    Review the digital-services selections and any sector-specific capacity, electricity, inpatient, population or regulator questions shown. Use actual facts and distinguish Yes, No and Not sure. The calculation uses internal size-category assumptions; those assumptions are not facts you entered.

  4. Save and review relevance

    Choose Check NIS2 Relevance. Inspect saved inputs, classification, reasons and confidence. Saved relevance inputs are shown read-only; this is not a generic Edit-and-resubmit form. Obtain the responsible scope/legal review rather than treating the indicator or confidence percentage as a legal ruling.

  5. Carry the intended relevance context into the questionnaire

    Use the relevant result’s offered comprehensive action and verify its organisation/relevance context. Starting the questionnaire elsewhere can use different fallback context. A correct organisation name matters, but matching text alone is not proof that all assessment evidence is linked.

  6. Work through the comprehensive question population

    Enter required Organization Name. The actual questionnaire presents 40 questions across 10 domains; it has no ISO-style domain-selection wizard. The domains cover risk/policies, incidents, continuity/crisis, supply chain, acquisition/development, effectiveness review, cyber hygiene/training, cryptography/data protection, access/personnel, and identity/authentication including MFA.

  7. Record Yes, Partial, No or N/A

    Read each question and choose the answer supported by implementation evidence. This form does not use the five-state Implementation Status or 0–5 maturity entry from ISO/C5/EU AI. Unanswered and N/A are different. Cite or retain the supporting policy, supplier decision, training or technical evidence through its owning records.

  8. Review Track for each gap

    The current saved generator does not consume the displayed Track flags. Stored Partial/No answers can generate items even when Track is off; unanswered/null values can interrupt generation after an assessment save. Inspect the saved record and item population before retrying. These are NIS2 items, not automatically formal Risk Treatments.

  9. Use Complete Assessment deliberately

    The current comprehensive screen offers Complete Assessment, not Save Draft or a Continue wizard. If the incomplete-assessment warning appears, Cancel to finish the answers or knowingly use Submit Anyway. Inspect the saved answered/unanswered population afterward; a completed record can still contain unanswered questions.

  10. Read the saved results and remediation

    Open the selected record in NIS2 Assessments, then its result/report and Remediation Planning. Confirm identity, relevance context, domain answers, gaps and generated work before interpreting the percentage or maturity description. Those result descriptions are not a separate maturity questionnaire.

  11. Add a manual remediation item

    Choose Add Remediation Item. Enter required Title and, as needed, Description, Category, Priority and Target Completion Date. Save and reopen the item. The actual form has no Assignee field; record responsibility in the description/notes or supported external task rather than expecting an unoffered owner control.

  12. Maintain status, progress and implementation notes

    Use the selected item’s Edit action. Review Title, Description, Category, Priority, Status (Open, In Progress, Pending or Completed), Target Completion Date, Progress Percentage 0–100 and Implementation Notes. Choose Update Remediation Item and reopen to confirm persistence. Completion/progress reflects recorded operator state, not an effectiveness test.

  13. Protect open work before editing or regenerating

    Edit Assessment on a saved comprehensive record reopens its questionnaire and updates that same record when completed again. This is not the separate legacy draft-only Edit form and not a new immutable version. Editing/reassessment or regeneration can remove existing non-completed remediation, including manual open items, before regenerating gaps; completed evidence is preserved. Retain required open plans and inspect the replacement list.

  14. Export the intended population

    Use Export Report for the selected assessment or Export Assessments for the combined view. Review questionnaire/context/remediation scope and timestamps. Browser print/save is separate from a native PDF-download route; do not assume every comprehensive record or relevance result has the same export controls.

  15. Delete the precise record only when intended

    A relevance record, a comprehensive assessment and a remediation item have separate Delete actions. Deleting relevance is not deleting its comprehensive counterpart. Comprehensive deletion targets same-ID assessment/companion/remediation records; a fallback companion with a different ID is not guaranteed covered; it is not archive, approval or work completion.

  16. Continue in the owning evidence/work module

    Where rendered and permitted, deliberately create a reviewed Jira task or link a Confluence reference. Maintain supplier assurance, policy versions, course completion, assets/CIA/VA and formal Risk decisions in their own modules. Enter and justify the specific NIS2 answer; no supporting module automatically certifies or completes it.

Exact behaviour and worked examples

Relevance, the 40-question comprehensive record, remediation items and older 15-question records are separate workflows. Expand the section for the record you actually have.

Relevance inputs, units and the application’s scope logic

Understand the exact demo exception before writing

Ordinary NIS2 access requires its dedicated role; Admin or General Assessments alone is not a bypass. The special shared demo identity qualifies only when all conditions hold: DEMO_MODE is true, AUTO_LOGIN_USER is set, the current user is authenticated, their email exactly matches that configured identity, and role_read_only is true. Missing/mismatched conditions fail closed; this is not an exception for every read-only user.

That one identity can enter the NIS2 role-gated surfaces. Its guarded write allowlist covers Comprehensive Assessment, the older draft Edit, visible regeneration and Finalize. It also names a registered automatic-generation API with no current rendered button: allowlisting it does not create an operator action. It does not carve out Relevance submission, Delete, manual item mutations, Jira or Confluence writes. Existing record/owner/token/validation checks remain separate.

CIA, Rapid, C5 and EU AI Act have no such demo write carve-out. ISO’s separate existing exception is limited to its New, category selection, control responses, Reassess and SoA endpoints under the same fail-closed identity conditions—not deletion or provider writes. The documented ISO delete guard gap is not repaired by this guidance. A demo exception is not private-workspace, data-isolation or successful-save assurance.

Required relevance inputs: Organization Name, Sector, Entity Size, Annual Turnover in million EUR, prior KRITIS/NIS1 classification, EU operations, services to EU customers and a valid Assessment Date. Turnover is nonnegative with a 0.1-million input step; the handler’s raw-number fallback to zero is not proof of fully validated financial facts. Saved relevance inputs are read-only; view them through Relevance Assessments (newest first, default ten per page), not as an edit/resubmit form.

Sector choices: Energy, Transport, Health, Water, Digital Infrastructure, Banking, Public Administration, Postal Services, Space, Manufacturing, Waste Management, Food, Digital Providers, Research, Other. Size: Micro <10, Small 10–49, Medium 50–249, Large ≥250. Prior classification: Yes / No / Not sure. EU operation and EU service are Yes/No choices. Optional digital services: DNS provider, Cloud provider, TLD registry, Trust service, Online marketplace, Search engine, Social networking, Other digital or None; None excludes the specific choices.

Shown sector inputs can include generation capacity MW, electricity GWh/year, inpatient cases, supplied population and regulator Yes/No. Enter the actual units and nonnegative facts. Sector matching has a known Postal Services key mismatch: do not reinterpret an unexpected result as a legal ruling or change facts simply to obtain a preferred category.

Understand proxies before interpreting the result

Entered turnover is multiplied by 1,000,000. The selected size injects employee/balance proxies: Micro 9 / €0; Small 49 / €10m; Medium 249 / €43m; Large 250 / €43,000,001. These are implementation assumptions, not exact headcount/balance values you entered. The general size test uses employees ≥250 OR turnover ≥€50m OR balance ≥€43m. Medium already reaches the balance proxy threshold even with turnover zero.

Assumed example: an EU-serving Important-sector entity with Medium selected and €0 turnover can meet the engine’s size test through its €43m balance proxy. That explains the app’s result, not the organisation’s legal obligations. The engine checks no EU operation/service first, then prior classification, sector-specific and size branches, then recognized digital-service cases. A later checkbox does not universally override an earlier returned sector result.

Current Energy branches use generation ≥420MW, electricity ≥104GWh/year or general size. Water uses population ≥500,000 or size; Banking regulator Yes or size; Health uses the general-size condition; Digital Infrastructure has its own covered branch. These are application rules/proxies, not independently verified legal thresholds. Confidence is deterministic internal weighting, not a statistical or legal probability. Missing size facts can reduce it to 0.40; displayed percentages round the stored fraction. The animated progress steps are not measured server work. Obtain responsible scope review.

Comprehensive submission, Track and partial-save recovery

The comprehensive form has Organization Name, 40 Yes / Partial / No / N/A answers across ten domains and Track switches. It has no normal Assessor, date/domain wizard, 0–5 maturity input, Save Draft or Continue workflow. Answered progress includes N/A and uses all 40 questions. Complete Assessment can show Cancel / Submit Anyway for incomplete answers; Cancel lets you finish them.

New submission uses a signed user/nonce token. Repeated submission with the same accepted token returns the saved receipt; it is not a business-duplicate detector. Invalid/foreign tokens can fail; a deleted receipt can be unavailable. Preserve the returned record identity and inspect NIS2 Assessments before retrying. Edit Assessment updates the same current-owned comprehensive record; an unknown/unowned edit identity is not proof of a successful revision.

Inspect saved work after submission—Track is not a suppression guarantee

The displayed Track flags are not consumed by the current saved-item generator. Stored No/Partial answers can generate items even when Track was disabled. An unanswered/null value can interrupt generation after the assessment, receipt and legacy companion have already committed. A completion message therefore does not prove that all remediation was generated. This is a source-verified limit, not a newly executed failure.

After Complete Assessment, reopen the same saved results and Remediation Planning. Check answered/unanswered questions, generated items and any warning. Do not blindly resubmit to recover an uncertain save or interpret failed generation as no gaps. Retain the record ID/error and ask the responsible operator when the outcome cannot be reconciled.

Editing or Auto-Generate Items can delete noncompleted generated and manual work before regeneration, while normalized completed items remain. Retain required open-plan evidence first. Regeneration can fail after that deletion; it is not an atomic harmless refresh. The same-number legacy companion is attempted but a fallback can use a different ID; matching numeric IDs alone is not universal association proof.

Comprehensive score, bands and the forty-question example

Each of the 40 questions is applicable unless explicitly N/A. Unanswered/null stays in the applicable denominator. Only Yes gives compliance credit; Partial gives zero, not half. Overall =Yes/applicable×100; each domain uses its own Yes/applicable population, while overall is not an equal-domain average. All N/A displays Not Assessable, not −1%, 0% or 100%.

Assume 16 Yes, 8 Partial, 8 No, 8 N/A. Score =16/32=50%, Repeatable / Partially Compliant. Giving Partial half credit would incorrectly produce 62.5%. Replace one No with unanswered: score remains 50%, while answer coverage falls to 39/40. Completing an item does not rewrite Yes counts—unlike Rapid’s remediation credit.

Unrounded comprehensive scoreMaturity labelApplication compliance label
No applicable questionsNot AssessableNot Assessable
100%OptimizedFully Compliant
≥90%, <100%ManagedCompliant
≥70%, <90%DefinedMostly Compliant
≥50%, <70%RepeatablePartially Compliant
≥25%, <50%InitialNon-Compliant
<25%IncompleteNon-Compliant

Results round to one decimal; exports can show two. Bands use the unrounded score, so retain numerator/denominator near a threshold. These are application answer-summary labels, not legal findings. Module-status “100% Complete” is hard-coded readiness text, not measured customer completion.

Read the legacy hub and comprehensive assessment list

The hub’s domain analytics use finalized older 15-field NIS2Assessment records, not the comprehensive 40-question population. Each domain averages nonempty normalized recorded answers: Yes 100, Partial 50, No 0; domain values round to integers. The ordered domains and fixed targets are:

Legacy hub domainDisplay target
Governance (policy and CISO)95
Risk Management (assessment and treatment process)90
Security Measures (five technical questions)85
Incident Handling (response and notification)95
Business Continuity (continuity and backup)85
Supply Chain (supplier risk and contracts)90
Compliance (all 15 fields)85

Hub maturity averages the seven domain scores, including that seventh all-fields score: ≥90 Optimized, ≥75 Managed, ≥60 Defined, ≥40 Repeatable, below 40 Initial. With no finalized legacy records it returns a zero baseline/Initial—not a completed comprehensive measurement. These targets/bands differ from comprehensive Yes/applicable scoring and are not legal thresholds. Legacy statistics count their own total/draft/final populations; relevance and comprehensive cards count separate record models.

NIS2 Assessments lists comprehensive records newest creation time first, default ten per page. Total / Drafts / Finalized cards count the full comprehensive population, not only visible rows; state follows the saved draft flag. The list derives a current display-only maturity label when saved answers are usable, without backfilling the record; a displayed stored score can predate that label. Open results for the canonical percentage. A loading error warns and returns to the NIS2 hub, not a verified empty list. Relevance Assessments is a separate newest-created/default-ten list of read-only relevance records. Neither list is an immutable version or a universal current-owner-only population.

Manual remediation, completion and supported external links

In the chosen comprehensive record’s Remediation Planning, use Add Remediation Item. Title is required. Description, Category, Priority and Target Completion Date are optional. Add Priority offers Low / Medium / High, default Medium; categories offer Risk Analysis/Security Policies, Incident Handling, Business Continuity, Supply Chain Security, Security in Network/Information Systems, Handling/Reporting Incidents, Crisis Management, Vulnerability Handling/Disclosure and General.

Edit additionally offers Critical priority, current comprehensive-domain/existing category, Open / In Progress / Pending / Completed, Progress 0–100 and Implementation Notes. There is no Assignee; put responsibility in description/notes or the supported external task. Blank target date clears it; an invalid date can fail rather than preserve an entered correction page. Reopen the item after Update.

Effective Completed can follow status Completed, progress 100 or a completion timestamp. Setting Completed or 100 writes full progress/time; Open with positive progress can become In Progress. To reopen, reduce progress below 100 and choose an active status—Open alone while progress remains 100 stays completed. Mark Complete records completion, not effectiveness testing or a new questionnaire score. A list “Complete” with zero open items also includes records with zero items; it does not prove all controls were addressed.

Use the selected item’s Delete confirmation only deliberately; it is not archive or assessment deletion. Quick status/edit/delete and detail/Mark Complete have different owner guards: a role or a return link is not proof of universal current-user isolation. Reconcile toast/error and saved state before repeating an action.

Use the exact Jira ticket fields

Visible controlChoice or requirement
ProjectRead-only ITSEC; this modal is not a project selector.
SummaryRequired; review the actual record/measure/question context.
DescriptionOptional; review any prefilled evidence and scope.
PriorityLow / Medium / High / Critical; template default Medium—review the current selection.
TypeTask / Bug / Story; template default Task—review the current selection. The visible label is Type, not Issue Type.
Labels (comma-separated)Enter separate labels with commas; inspect the offered defaults.

Use Cancel if the target or content is wrong. Otherwise choose Create Ticket once and inspect the returned issue and local reference. This is an external write, not a saved answer, approval or formal Risk Treatment. If the outcome is uncertain, reconcile the owning record before retrying. Each module’s reference identity remains different, as described below.

Per-item Jira uses the actual remediation ID and a nis2_remediation reference. Use the exact ticket fields above, submit once, then inspect the issue and owning item. The older assessment-level Jira/Confluence actions belong to the legacy assessment ID, not every comprehensive question. Confluence duplicate page ID is a no-op; a local link can save while an external stamp fails. Neither closes questionnaire gaps, approves a Risk Treatment or synchronizes supplier/document/training decisions.

Exports, saved context and older fifteen-question records

Comprehensive Single and All HTML

Use Export Report for the selected record, or Export Assessments for the combined population. The combined export is all comprehensive records, not only the current paginated view; it counts record states and linked items, not a new organisation mean. Single finds relevance by organisation text without a same-user filter; combined uses current user plus name for relevance while its assessment population is broader. Verify context identity rather than assuming a stored foreign-key/latest-relevance relationship.

Creation timestamps are not a separately entered assessment date. Missing response keys can print as No and explicit null can lack a proper Not Assessed label; the table is not evidence someone answered No. A known export confidence scale displays stored 0.95 as 0.95%, not 95%; compare the original relevance record. It remains algorithm confidence, not legal probability. Single’s domain Good/Fair/Poor ≥80/50 bands and ≥80/60/below-60 recommendation thresholds differ from the canonical overall bands. Its High-item recommendation count includes completed High items and excludes Critical items; it is not the count of remaining high-priority work.

Save as HTML uses a standalone-download helper: same-origin stylesheet reads, inline styles, scripts/Save button removed and links made absolute. A failed stylesheet fetch shows retry notice and re-enables Save; no assessment is rewritten by saving. Current disclosure state is captured, not every hidden detail automatically expanded. Verify saved readability/offline dependencies before sharing; Print is a browser operation.

Recognize an older legacy record before editing

The draft-only legacy editor is not comprehensive Edit Assessment and is not a new legacy-creation wizard. It has Organization Name/Assessor (required, ≤100), Sector, four size ranges and valid date; 15 Yes/Partial/No questions with optional Notes/Evidence, Remediation Actions and target dates; Enable Remediation Tracking, Review Date and Owner (≤100). Its seventeen sectors include Energy, Transport, Banking, Financial Market Infrastructures, Health, Drinking Water, Digital Infrastructure, ICT Service Management, Public Administration, Space, Research, Manufacturing, Food Production & Distribution, Waste Management, Chemicals, Digital Providers and Other.

The four governance questions concern approved policy, CISO/equivalent, risk assessments and treatment process. Five technical questions concern least privilege, MFA, network segmentation, IDS/IPS and encryption. Six operational questions concern incident response, authority notification, business continuity, backup/recovery, supplier risk and supplier contracts. Use its actual offered answer wording and validated form, Save Assessment or Cancel; Finalize changes the saved draft flag but does not perform legal review or guarantee successful regeneration.

Legacy score gives Yes 100, Partial 50, other/blank 0. Its 4/5/6-field domain means feed a rounded 40% governance +30% technical +30% operational total: domain means 100/50/0 give 55 overall. That is not comprehensive Yes/applicable. The hub’s seven-domain legacy averages and fixed targets are another view.

Legacy PDF needs the deployment’s pdfkit renderer and can show stored/stale headline values. It mislabels MFA and network-segmentation questions and does not include every manual remediation item; do not present it as an equivalent complete comprehensive export. Comprehensive deletion and its companion-item cleanup have same-ID association limits; relevance Delete remains relevance-only. Retain evidence and verify the exact record before any destructive action.

Check the result

Stored relevance/assessment evidence and visible remediation work.

Current limits and common mistakes

Ordinary NIS2 access requires its dedicated role; General Assessments or Admin alone is not a blanket bypass. The scoped demo exception does not grant ordinary write authority. Relevance is based on recorded ranges/assumptions, not verified legal applicability. Comprehensive has no Save Draft and submission can be incomplete. Editing/regenerating can remove open manual remediation; preserve needed plans before that action. User ownership and save/export behavior differ by path.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background
NIS2 relevance, assessment and remediation workflow

Retained orientation graphic; follow the module-specific fields and actions above. Relevance is optional context, and SoA belongs to ISO.

Start with accurate information

Complete the organisation and sector inputs required by the relevance workflow. Review the classification and its reasoning against the requirements applicable to your organisation.

Assess and remediate

Record the current implementation and evidence in the assessment. Review identified gaps and the available remediation actions. The score reflects the recorded assessment; it is not a legal determination of compliance.

BSI C5 Assessment

Use the C5 assessment to review cloud-security criteria for the selected service scope.

BSI C5 cloud-security criteria and assessment context

The module supports a scoped cloud-service assessment; it is not an independent C5 attestation.

Where to start

Assessments → BSI C5 → New Assessment

Use BSI C5 Assessment, General Assessments or Admin access. This does not automatically grant NIS2 access. Ordinary Read Only is subject to write guards; C5 has no ISO/NIS2 demo write carve-out.

Before you begin

Prepare the organisation, assessor, date and concrete scope, plus implementation evidence for the controls you will select.

Fields and choices

FieldRequired / choiceHow to use it
Organization Name / Assessor NameRequiredUp to 100 characters each; identify the actual entity and assessor.
Industry / Organization Size / Assessment DateRequiredUse the offered categories and date for the assessment scope.
Email / Phone / Reference IDOptionalUse a valid email if entered; phone and reference up to 20 characters.
Cloud Service TypeRequiredIaaS / PaaS / SaaS or the offered combination.
Assessment Scope / Cloud Provider(s)Optional; describe accuratelyState services/responsibilities and provider names. No connector is configured.
Primary Data LocationOptionalGermany / EU / EEA / Worldwide–Multiple Regions / Other. A chosen value is not verified residency.
Control domainsAt least oneSelect the actual cloud criterion scope before starting.
Implementation StatusAt least one for submissionEach applicable item: Implemented / Partially Implemented / Planned / Not Implemented / Not Applicable. Blank remains unassessed.
Maturity Level (0–5)OptionalOffered 0.5 steps; leave unknown maturity blank rather than entering zero.
Evidence / Identified Gaps / NotesEvidence-led reviewKeep source/version, missing implementation and scope rationale distinct.
Remediation Plan / Owner / Deadline / StatusFollow-up as neededNot Started / In Progress / Completed; record actual responsibility and supporting completion evidence.

Step-by-step

  1. Define the cloud service being assessed

    Complete Organization Name, Industry, Organization Size, Assessment Date, Assessor Name and required Cloud Service Type. Choose IaaS, PaaS, SaaS or the offered combination. Add Assessment Scope, Primary Data Location, Cloud Provider(s), Email, Phone and Reference ID where applicable. Identify the specific service boundary and your/provider responsibilities.

  2. Select at least one control domain

    Choose Next: Select Control Domains, review the named domains and select the scope, then Next: Start Assessment. The selected cloud-service context is descriptive; it does not query Azure/AWS or import assets. Current routes use the default 2020 catalogue; 2025 static definitions are not an offered edition selector. Read the actual criterion labels; Additional-tier coverage is not established merely because helpers exist.

  3. Review each cloud criterion

    Expand the domain/control and read its criterion and guidance. Choose Implementation Status: Implemented, Partially Implemented, Planned, Not Implemented or Not Applicable. Document the actual service’s implementation, not a general provider marketing statement.

  4. Supply service-specific evidence

    Use Evidence for configuration/report/document references, Identified Gaps for missing implementation, and Notes for shared-responsibility assumptions and exclusions. Supplier certificate evidence may support a claim, but supplier internal approval alone does not prove the C5 criterion.

  5. Assess maturity and follow-up separately

    Enter Maturity Level (0–5, offered 0.5 steps) only when assessed. Add Remediation Plan, Owner, Deadline and Status for needed work. Blank maturity is not zero; a remediation Completed label is not an independent cloud-control test.

  6. Save as Draft or Submit Assessment

    Use Save as Draft while evidence is incomplete. Submit Assessment requires at least one criterion with an implementation status, not every selected criterion. Reopen the result and inspect unassessed and Not Applicable populations as well as the score.

  7. Continue an existing draft

    Use Continue from the saved assessment list. Back to Domain Selection can revise the existing In Progress scope; verify the resulting selected domains and reported population before returning to the controls. Older out-of-scope response rows can remain stored; this differs from ISO category deselection, which prunes them. Do not begin a duplicate record merely to continue work.

  8. Review Gap Analysis and implementation tracking

    Select the intended assessment in Gap Analysis and Controls Implementation. Review the specific criterion, plan, owner, deadline and current status. A permitted Create Jira Ticket on an eligible gap is a separate reviewed external action; check the resulting issue reference.

  9. Produce a scoped cloud report

    Use Reports for this assessment and select executive, technical, gap or comprehensive output. Check service type, scope, catalogue, excluded/unassessed criteria, evidence and maturity coverage. An HTML/report output is not an independent C5 assurance opinion.

  10. Reassess or remove deliberately

    Reassess reopens the same completed assessment as In Progress and clears its completion date, retaining the current response context rather than making a historical copy. Preserve the preceding report if needed. Delete Assessment removes the selected assessment and its responses/domain links; do not use it to disguise unfinished work.

  11. Carry evidence across modules explicitly

    Maintain cloud assets in Asset Management, cloud retrieval/import in Azure/AWS, supplier assurance in Supplier Management and formal risk decisions in Risk Management. Cite those identities/versions in the C5 evidence. Their statuses are not automatically synchronised with this assessment.

Exact behaviour and worked examples

The retained domain chart describes the available C5 scope. Expand the calculation and save detail before interpreting a result.

Exact cloud choices, draft identity and validation

Organization Name and Assessor Name are required, up to 100 characters each. Select Industry and Organization Size and enter a valid Assessment Date (YYYY-MM-DD). Optional Email must be valid and at most 100 characters; Phone and Reference ID are at most 20 characters. A reference is an identifier, not an approval or a document version.

Industry choices: Finance & Banking; Healthcare & Medical; Retail & E-commerce; Manufacturing; Technology & Software; Government & Public Sector; Education; Telecommunications; Energy & Utilities; Transportation & Logistics; Professional Services; Non-Profit; Other. Size choices: Micro (1–9), Small (10–49), Medium (50–249), Large (250+). Required Cloud Service Type offers IaaS, PaaS, SaaS, IaaS+PaaS, IaaS+SaaS, PaaS+SaaS or Full Stack (IaaS+PaaS+SaaS). Optional Data Location offers Germany, EU, EEA, Worldwide–Multiple Regions, Other or blank. Cloud Provider(s) is up to 100 characters; Scope is descriptive. These fields neither configure Azure/AWS nor verify residency.

New clears the prior wizard identity. At least one of the active default-2020 domains is required; Start creates the draft after checks. The displayed domain chart preserves the current codes and names, including HR Human Resources, PS Physical Security, IDM Identity and Access Management and PSS Product Safety and Security—not Procurement. There is no offered 2025 edition or Basic/Additional-tier selector.

Continue/Back operates on the selected existing assessment ID. Domain changes commit the association without deleting old responses; completed records redirect to View and require deliberate Reassess. Verify the ID before returning to controls. Failed creation rolls back; an error is not a saved assessment. Ordinary Read Only writes are guarded, with no C5 demo carve-out.

The control form offers a blank choice or Implemented, Partially Implemented, Planned, Not Implemented and Not Applicable. Maturity is optional: the visible input offers 0–5 in 0.5 steps. Evidence, Identified Gaps and Notes are separate free-text fields. Follow-up offers Plan, Owner, Deadline and Not Started / In Progress / Completed. The Owner form declares a 100-character limit; the active response parser does not enforce every nested field validator. Do not rely on the UI as an all-or-nothing validation guarantee.

Entering a deficient status can show remediation and fill an empty suggested plan. Implemented, N/A or blank hides that card without clearing an earlier plan, date or status. Inspect retained work after changing the answer. The parser clamps numeric maturity to 0–5; malformed maturity becomes missing, not a verified zero. Final Submit requires one nonempty status, not every selected item. An invalid response deadline can roll back the response save and rebuild the page from previously saved rows; re-check your unsaved entries instead of assuming they survived.

Reassess and Delete need selected-record confirmation. Reassess changes the same completed record/date, not a new immutable version; invalid-state fallback can fail, so reopen the list and inspect saved status. Delete removes assessment/response/domain records, not an archive or an external ticket.

N/A credit, maturity and the four-control worked example

Implementation and compliance are not the same

Current detail/list/reports walk every control in the selected catalogue. Implementation = Implemented / all selected controls ×100. Compliance = (Implemented + N/A) / all selected controls ×100. Missing/blank, Partial, Planned and Not Implemented are status gaps. Unlike ISO and EU AI Act, N/A stays in the denominator and receives compliance credit.

Four assumed C5 controls produce 50 percent report compliance, 25 percent implementation and a lower Gap Analysis screen value

C5 report compliance credits N/A; the Gap Analysis screen additionally tests low maturity.

Assume Implemented 4, N/A 2, Partial 1 and unanswered. Report compliance =2/4=50%; implementation =1/4=25%; status gaps =2. Maturity averages the entered 4,2,1 =2.33, displayed 2.3/5 (Managed). Retained N/A maturity is included, with no 50% coverage gate. One rating of 5 among 100 selected controls can yield 5.0—state the number rated rather than implying complete coverage.

The Gap Analysis screen also treats maturity <3 as a gap, including retained N/A ratings. This example’s N/A 2 adds a screen gap, yielding 25% screen compliance versus 50% report compliance. An Implemented 2 can be a screen gap but not a report status gap. This is a current view-specific difference, not a reason to conceal a low rating. All N/A can yield 100% compliance and 0% implementation, not implemented cloud controls.

Maturity bands: ≥4 Optimizing, ≥3 Defined, ≥2 Managed, ≥1 Initial, below 1 Not Implemented; no ratings gives Not calculated/N/A.

Read the C5 hub and assessment list

The list includes all stored assessments newest creation date first, without a generic server filter/pagination. Each record uses current selected-state maturity; the list average is the simple mean of available completed per-assessment means, including numeric zero and excluding unavailable means. It is not a response-weighted organisation compliance score or immutable version history.

The hub cards count Completed and In Progress records; Not Started is a zero placeholder. Its radar uses non-null raw response ratings from completed records by catalogue domain, rounded to one decimal; absent ratings remain unavailable and target 4.0 is fixed. Its pie counts five recognized stored response statuses on completed records only: Implemented, Partially Implemented, Planned, Not Implemented, Not Applicable. Blank/unknown rows are not included. This is not the six-status selected-record bar or a denominator limited to each assessment’s current selected domains.

Implementation tracking, report populations and evidence handoffs

Select and order the Gap Analysis screen

Without an explicit saved assessment ID, Gap Analysis defaults to the latest completed assessment by completion date—not the newest-created record or newest assessment date. An explicit saved-ID link can open a different record; the dropdown lists completed records ordered by assessment date. Verify the displayed identity before acting. With no completed default available, the page warns and returns to the module hub.

Screen High priority means a missing/unassessed response or Not Implemented. Medium means other gaps included by this module’s screen rule. Rows sort High first, then Medium; within each group, saved remediation deadline sorts ascending, with unset deadlines last. These are screen priority/sort rules, not the report’s severity charts or suggested timelines. Preserve the module-specific N/A and maturity rules explained above.

Controls Implementation selects a completed assessment and shows nonempty plans only in its current selected domains. Pending and In Progress can overlap Overdue; Completed is not overdue, so do not add the tabs as disjoint totals. Save Changes supplies assessment and response identities; a stale/cross-scope response set is rejected before updates. Reopen the current assessment and retry the current form rather than reusing stale inputs.

Blank deadline clears an old date; invalid date silently leaves it unchanged. Completing the plan does not change the original Implementation Status or Maturity. Keep evidence of the completed work and reassess the response separately.

Use the exact Jira ticket fields

Visible controlChoice or requirement
ProjectRead-only ITSEC; this modal is not a project selector.
SummaryRequired; review the actual record/measure/question context.
DescriptionOptional; review any prefilled evidence and scope.
PriorityLow / Medium / High / Critical; template default Medium—review the current selection.
TypeTask / Bug / Story; template default Task—review the current selection. The visible label is Type, not Issue Type.
Labels (comma-separated)Enter separate labels with commas; inspect the offered defaults.

Use Cancel if the target or content is wrong. Otherwise choose Create Ticket once and inspect the returned issue and local reference. This is an external write, not a saved answer, approval or formal Risk Treatment. If the outcome is uncertain, reconcile the owning record before retrying. Each module’s reference identity remains different, as described below.

C5’s c5_response-labelled Jira reference uses assessment ID, not the exact criterion response ID. The returned ticket does not automatically approve C5 or synchronize each answer. Use Asset Management for assets, Azure/AWS for retrieval/import, Supplier Management for assurance, Document Dialog/ISP for saved evidence, and Risk Management for separately governed risk. Cite those identities/versions in this criterion’s Evidence; a provider certificate alone is not proof of your implementation.

Active HTML outputBoundary
ExecutiveCompliance includes N/A, implementation does not. Domain labels ≥80 Good / ≥60 Needs Attention / ≥40 At Risk / below 40 Critical are report bands, not Scanner severity or assurance.
TechnicalSelected control inventory, Basic/Additional metadata and maturity; gap text can be truncated to 100 characters. It is not a complete evidence export.
GapStatus-based gaps, not the screen’s maturity rule. Saved owner/date or Not documented/dash; suggested review/action advice is not a new saved plan.
ComprehensiveSix-status counts and inventory; Evidence/Notes cell contains an 80-character Evidence excerpt, not all notes. Inspect source rows for full evidence.

Reports require the selected completed assessment. No SoA, Evidence Package, native PDF or edition/tier selector is offered here. Unknown report type returns an error. Executive advice selects three scored domains below 70%, available maturity <3 and gaps >10. Minimum 2% visual bar width and outside labels below 15% do not change a numerical result. Report no-gap wording concerns selected controls implemented or N/A, not cloud-wide effectiveness or a C5 attestation.

Use the selected assessment’s report controls, then Save as HTML or Print. Print opens the browser print dialogue; choosing its PDF destination is not a native server PDF export. Save serializes the current report and can retain external/relative CSS, scripts and links. It is not a self-contained, signed or immutable evidence package. Check the saved file’s identity, date, scope, coverage and readability before sharing. Generation itself does not change answers, approvals or remediation.

Check the result

A BSI C5 assessment and evidence-led view of its selected controls.

Current limits and common mistakes

The cloud scope/provider/location fields do not configure cloud access or verify residency. Current catalogue and criterion coverage must be checked in the loaded module; do not promise additional-criterion or different-edition coverage from a generic diagram. Submission may be partial and Reassess reopens the same record. Reports are not a C5 attestation.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

Record responses and evidence

Select the relevant domains and complete the current assessment. Review each criterion and supporting evidence; do not assume an ISO assessment has completed the C5 work for you.

Review the result

Use the available gap and report views to plan further work. An application-generated report is not an independent C5 attestation.

Statement of Applicability

The SoA records the applicability of controls for the selected ISO 27001 assessment.

SoA applicability is separate from control implementation

Applicability, justification, implementation evidence and the parent report are separate decisions and records.

Where to start

ISO 27001 → Statement of Applicability → selected assessment

Use ISO 27001 Assessment, General Assessments or Admin access. This does not automatically grant NIS2 access. Read-only and scoped demo rules apply.

Before you begin

Prepare the scope, control decisions and their supporting rationale.

Fields and choices

FieldRequired / choiceHow to use it
Selected assessmentVerify before writingConfirm the parent ISO assessment identity, organisation, date and scope.
Applicability: Yes / No / UndefinedExplicit decision per controlYes/No selects applicability; Undefined is unset, not exclusion. Justification becomes enabled after a choice.
JustificationWrite and review substantive rationaleSave can persist blank text, so successful saving is not sufficient review.

Step-by-step

  1. Open the intended ISO assessment’s SoA

    Start from the selected ISO 27001 assessment or explicitly choose its identity in Statement of Applicability. The unqualified page may default to the most recent completed assessment; verify organisation, assessment ID/date and scope before changing anything.

  2. Review the loaded control population

    The SoA uses the selected assessment’s catalogue/categories. Compare the displayed controls with your real ISMS scope and required control population; the application does not guarantee a complete standard catalogue.

  3. Set the applicability decision

    For each control, choose Yes (applicable) or No (not applicable); Undefined means no saved choice. An unset decision must remain distinct from a justified exclusion. Implementation Status elsewhere does not automatically establish the SoA decision.

  4. Write the justification

    Explain why a control is included or excluded for this ISMS, including relevant obligations, risk/context and other treatment. The current handler can store a blank justification; successful saving therefore does not prove a defensible exclusion. Review the rationale yourself.

  5. Save the SoA and reopen the same assessment

    Use Save Changes, then reopen the selected assessment’s SoA. Confirm the saved choices and justification text. Select All as Applicable changes inputs and still requires saving. Filter by Category changes the view, not the decision. Saving is not a separate formal approval workflow.

  6. Compare implementation and gaps

    A control can be applicable but not implemented. Review its assessment response, supporting policy/version and remediation separately. Correct those through their owning assessment/document/control workflow rather than changing applicability to conceal a gap.

  7. Use the guidance and output controls for this assessment

    SoA Guidance explains the view. Report / Generate SoA Report uses the selected assessment and its saved decisions; report generation requires a completed parent assessment. The grid does not offer Implementation Method or Responsible Party fields merely because a similarly named form class declares them.

  8. Review and retain the SoA report

    Use the selected assessment’s SoA report and check identity, scope, omitted/unset decisions, justifications and implementation evidence. Record your organisation’s review/approval through its approved governance process; generation does not perform that approval.

  9. Maintain it when context changes

    When ISMS scope, risk treatment or obligations change, update the selected assessment’s applicability decisions deliberately and retain the earlier reviewed output if history is needed. Reassessing or deleting the parent ISO assessment is not a universal SoA version-history facility.

Exact behaviour and worked examples

The SoA is the ISO assessment’s applicability grid, not another implementation or maturity questionnaire.

Saved decisions, category filtering and exact grid controls

The unqualified selector defaults to a completed parent; a specific assessment’s grid can open an In Progress record. Verify the parent, categories and selected catalogue before writing. ISO/General Assessments/Admin access applies; scoped read-only/demo behaviour is not a separate approval grant.

Choose Yes or No for each control, then enter Justification and use Save Changes. Undefined is no saved decision, not a third stored exclusion. There is no offered clear-to-Undefined action for an already saved choice. A blank justification can save: include a substantive scope/risk reason even when the UI allows omission.

Select All as Applicable changes all rows, including rows hidden by Filter by Category. Filtering only hides rows; Save still submits chosen hidden rows. After a decision change, live counters can count visible rows while Total remains all rows. Remove the filter and reload the saved parent to confirm complete saved counts. SoA Guidance, category detail, Report and Save are distinct controls, not one approval operation.

The grid does not offer Implementation Method or Responsible Party merely because an unused form declares them. Selected ISO scope controls which rows are counted; old saved decisions outside the current scope do not expand that scope.

Four-control example and independent implementation answers
Four assumed controls with Yes,Yes,No and unset decisions yield applicable 2, not applicable 1, undefined 1 independently of implementation status

Saving an applicability decision does not rewrite the control’s implementation answer.

Assume four selected controls: saved Yes, Yes, No and no entry. Applicable =2, Not Applicable =1, Undefined =1. Undefined =selected total−Yes−No. An Implemented answer on the No control does not change those counts. Change only its SoA decision to Yes and Save: counts become 3/0/1 without changing implementation.

Implementation N/A and SoA No are independent facts. A control can be applicable but unimplemented, or have implementation evidence yet be excluded for a justified scope. A count is not a defensible exclusion, a compliance score or a signature.

Report counts, printable signatures and lifecycle

Generate SoA Report requires a completed ISO parent. It counts saved applicability separately from implementation. Implementation percentages use saved Yes decisions as denominator and only recognized implementation statuses as numerator; missing/N/A implementation on a Yes row can make the percentages total less than 100. No Yes gives displayed 0%, not a measured implementation outcome.

A No decision can print N/A without rewriting the implementation answer. Missing justification can be replaced by generic report prose; Implementation Method can fall back to old stored text or Evidence. Do not treat these fallbacks as newly supplied or validated rationale. Report Version 1.0 is hard-coded and Last Updated is generation day, not a saved revision history.

“Reviewed and approved” and blank name/signature/date lines are printable boilerplate—not stored approvals or electronic signatures. Use your approved governance process for actual review. Save as HTML / Print are browser operations and can retain relative/external dependencies. Retain the reviewed prior output before scope changes, Reassess or Delete of the parent; these actions do not create immutable SoA versions.

The ISO assessment owns implementation/gaps and its category scope; Risk Management owns treatment decisions; Document Dialog/ISP owns policy versions. Cite their exact identities in your rationale and evidence package. A SoA save does not approve those modules, create a ticket, or synchronize another framework.

Check the result

A scope-specific applicability reference for review.

Current limits and common mistakes

Applicability, implementation and formal organisational approval are separate. The current SoA save does not enforce a substantive exclusion rationale or provide its own approval/certification. It depends on the loaded ISO catalogue and parent assessment; verify complete scope and preserve prior outputs where needed.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

Prepare the underlying assessment

Complete the relevant responses and document the reasons for exclusions. Check that the evidence reflects the organisation's actual implementation.

Generate and review

Use the available SoA control, then review the resulting document for completeness and accuracy with the responsible owner. Maintain it when the scope or implementation changes.

Supplier Management

Maintain supplier information, assess the relationship and record the approval decision.

Three internal phases and a distinct assurance panel. Edit resets approval; questionnaire creation does not send an invitation.

Two separate decisions: internal approval above, filed assurance below. Neither changes Asset, CIA or Risk automatically.

Where to start

Find the supplier relationship and distinguish procurement approval from separately filed security assurance.

Supplier Due Diligence → Dashboard / View All / Approved / Pending / Categories / Reports

Supplier Due Diligence access; read-only users cannot change procurement/assurance decisions. A module role is not professional reviewer certification.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose the right population

    Use View All for the searchable inventory, Fully Approved for Phase 3-completed, or View Pending for everything not Phase 3-approved including null flags. A Fully Approved Supplier is not necessarily assurance-qualified.

  2. Filter the selected list

    Open View All Suppliers. In Filter Suppliers choose Toggle Filters to expand the initially collapsed controls. Set Search by Name, Category, Status and Criticality, then choose Filter. Use the undo/reset icon link to clear those selections before interpreting an empty result. View All is an all-row list; the Dashboard itself offers cards, charts and navigation, not a filter form or pager.

  3. Read cards separately from filtered rows

    Dashboard charts describe the whole estate. Its pending card excludes unfinished Phase 1, while View Pending includes those suppliers. Active phase bucket is 3 when Phase 2 passed,2 when Phase 1 passed, otherwise 1.

  4. Open a Supplier or category

    Inspect contact, services, factors, current phase, Related Assets and assurance panel. View Categories groups the full estate and separates uncategorized suppliers.

  5. Use the intended report

    View Reports gives estate metrics; Export produces ALL-Supplier HTML, not just current filtered rows. Open an individual Supplier’s report for its contact, current phase/assurance, Assets and history. The older Reports route redirects to View Reports, not another generator.

List choices and count units
View / metricActual meaning
DashboardCards/charts with View All Suppliers and Add New Supplier links. No rendered status filter or pagination controls are offered here.
View All: Search by Name / CategorySearch the supplier name; choose All Categories or an offered category. Category words are exact choices, not universal aliases.
View All: StatusAll Status, Approved or Pending.
View All: CriticalityAll Criticality, Critical, High, Medium or Low; the stored overall result.
Organisation rateCategorized Suppliers / total Suppliers ×100; uncategorized remains separate.
Approval rateApproved / (approved+pending) ×100, not certificates reviewed.
Heatmapx=dependency, y=overall criticality;1–4. Bubble count and radius 3/4/6/8 are display encodings, not risk scores.
HTML exportApproved if Phase 3 flag, Under Review if Phase 2, otherwise Pending; high/critical access counters, no contract-value total.
Empty, unknown and independent decisions

A category with no rows is not a missing supplier database, and an unassessed factor is not independently measured Low. Profile creation, Phase 3 approval, PDF evidence and questionnaire approval are different saved facts. Use Suppliers — Supplier assurance and questionnaires for the evidence decision; no universal compliance certification follows from these counts.

Diagrams and background
Supplier onboarding, security review and approval lifecycle

Record the relationship, assess its evidence and dependencies, and document the responsible approval.

Adding a Supplier

Open Supplier Management and use its creation control. Enter accurate information about the supplier and the services involved.

Three internal phases and a distinct assurance panel. Edit resets approval; questionnaire creation does not send an invitation.

Two separate decisions: internal approval above, filed assurance below. Neither changes Asset, CIA or Risk automatically.

Where to start

Create a complete supplier profile and eight-factor assessment, or update the intended existing identity.

Supplier Due Diligence → New Supplier; or Asset → Link Supplier → Create new Supplier

Supplier Due Diligence access and write permission. An Asset-context creation also needs the originating Asset workflow/access; standalone creation does not create an Asset relationship.

Step-by-step

  1. Avoid an unintended duplicate

    Search first. New Company Name must be 2–100 characters and rejects an exact existing name. Edit changes the same identity and does not apply the new-name duplicate guard.

  2. Complete company and service context

    Enter required Company Name, offered Category, Services Provided and the screen-required valid Email. Fill relevant contact/address/contract dates. Use real evidence, not public-demo placeholders.

  3. Answer all eight factors

    Choose Low/Medium/High/Critical for Dependency, Geography, Financial impact and the five access questions. Read the anchors in Criticality Scoring; all eight are required and overall is calculated, not a manual checkbox.

  4. Save and confirm the destination

    Choose Save Supplier; inspect the new draft/Phase 1 Supplier and permanent identity. From Create new Supplier in an Asset context, creation and Provider relationship are committed together; verify both.

  5. Edit with approval consequences in view

    An already reviewed Supplier shows a warning before editing. Choose Proceed & Reset Approval only if you intend to reset approvals; save the same record and inspect current-cycle/history. Cancel/leave before submitting changes nothing; a failed form needs correction, not another profile.

Company, contact and procurement controls
FieldRule / meaning
Company NameRequired 2–100; exact duplicate rejection on NEW only.
CategoryRequired offered dropdown: base Hardware/Software/Services/Consultancy/Other and actual configured/stored choices; no arbitrary alias or manual overall-criticality field.
Services ProvidedRequired ≤1000; scope of the purchased service.
EmailRequired by the current screen; valid email ≤100. The underlying optional declaration does not remove the screen requirement.
Contact Person / PhoneOptional ≤100 / ≤20.
Website / AddressOptional ≤100 / ≤500. No extra URL validation guarantee is promised.
Contract Start / Contract EndOptional dates YYYY-MM-DD. When both dates are set, Contract End must be on or after Contract Start; equal dates pass the current validation even though its error message says “after”. For example, Start 2026-10-15 and End 2026-10-14 fails: correct End on the same form to 2026-10-15 or later, then save again. Do not create another Supplier. Dates do not establish cost or approval.
Eight factorsAll required Low/Medium/High/Critical. Description/critical/risk_level legacy declarations are not extra current inputs.
Fictional intake and correction

Example Support Ltd, Services, support@example.invalid, Services Provided “Operate the example support desk”, plus eight evidence-based factor answers is a fictional complete profile. A malformed Email or missing Services/factor is a validation error: correct the existing form, do not create another Supplier. All-Low factors produce 1.0/Low; financial criticality is a business-impact anchor, not a currency amount. Saving does not complete any approval or create a Risk/Treatment.

Supplier Criticality

Use the supplier assessment to record the relationship, access, data and dependency information relevant to your organisation.

Three internal phases and a distinct assurance panel. Edit resets approval; questionnaire creation does not send an invitation.

Two separate decisions: internal approval above, filed assurance below. Neither changes Asset, CIA or Risk automatically.

Where to start

Rate dependency and access consistently using the eight actual intake questions, then understand the calculated overall result.

New/Edit Supplier → Supplier Criticality Assessment

Supplier write permission. Use your organisation’s evidence and replacement/service context; the application does not impose universal monetary thresholds.

Step-by-step

  1. Rate dependency and disruption

    Answer Dependency, Geographic impact and Financial impact using their four anchors. Dependency is only one input, not the final score.

  2. Rate actual access

    Answer Sensitive data, Application/system, Device/infrastructure, Network and Physical/facility access. Distinguish absence of direct access from privileged access.

  3. Save all eight answers

    Low=1, Medium=2, High=3, Critical=4. The application averages the valid answers; the current form requires all eight. Overall Low<1.5, Medium ≥1.5, High ≥2.5, Critical ≥3.5.

  4. Review overall and the source answers

    The calculation is an average, not maximum-factor escalation. A high access answer can coexist with a lower overall average; inspect the detailed factors before a decision.

  5. Read charts as a projection

    Heatmap x=Dependency/y=Overall,1–4. Counts/radius 3/4/6/8 encode populations; high/critical counters are per offered factor/overall scope, not independent security incidents.

Every offered Low→Critical anchor
FactorLow 1Medium 2High 3Critical 4
DependencyEasy to replaceTakes effort to replaceFew alternativesNo viable alternatives
Geographic impactLocalRegionalNationalGlobal/multi-regional
Financial impactMinimalModerateSignificantSevere, threatens business continuity
Sensitive data accessPublic dataInternal dataConfidential dataRestricted/highly sensitive data
Application/system accessNon-critical applicationsStandard business applicationsCritical business applicationsAdministrative access to core systems
Device/infrastructure accessNo direct device accessLimited device accessCritical infrastructure accessPrivileged access to core infrastructure
Network accessNo direct network accessBasic connectivityMultiple network segmentsAdministrative network access
Physical/facility accessNo physical accessEscorted common-area accessUnescorted general-area accessRestricted/secure-area access
Reconcile fictional calculations

Eight Low answers:8/8=1.0 →Low. Seven Low plus one Critical:11/8=1.375 →Low, not Critical. Four High and four Critical:28/8=3.5 →Critical. Eight High:24/8=3.0 →High. The handler’s no-valid-score fallback Low is not an evidence measurement; the current required eight-question form should be completed.

Financial anchors are Minimal/Moderate/Significant/Severe business-continuity impact, not invented euro bands. Overall criticality neither approves procurement nor verifies assurance.

No second hidden assessment

Retained SupplierAssessmentForm declarations data_access/system_access/business_impact/contracts/NDA/security-review/notes are not another currently offered questionnaire. The active eight-factor form is distinct from the 20-question security-assurance invitation and the three internal approval phases.

Supplier Lifecycle

Keep the supplier profile, evidence and approval status current throughout the relationship.

Three internal phases and a distinct assurance panel. Edit resets approval; questionnaire creation does not send an invitation.

Two separate decisions: internal approval above, filed assurance below. Neither changes Asset, CIA or Risk automatically.

Where to start

Update, reverse or remove the intended supplier scope while retaining the meaning of current and historical decisions.

Saved Supplier → detail → Edit / Revert / approval history / report

Supplier Due Diligence access and write permission; internal approvals and assurance remain separate workflows.

Step-by-step

  1. Inspect current cycle and evidence

    Read company/permanent identity, stage strip, current decisions, assurance and Related Assets. Earlier-review/prior-cycle comments are history, not automatic current approval.

  2. Edit deliberately

    Reviewed records first warn that editing resets approval. Choose Proceed & Reset Approval, then Save Supplier; saving resets all approval flags/security decision to draft/Phase 1 while keeping the Supplier identity. Correct new profile facts before reapproval.

  3. Revert only the latest completed phase

    Use Revert and confirm the actual selected Supplier. It clears highest completed phase only:3→2,2→1,1→0. Initial state is a no-op, not a new approval cycle. Recheck the stage and recorded reversal.

  4. Use the appropriate next review

    Continue the actual active phase with its required confirmations/decision. Existing PDF/questionnaire evidence retains its bytes and its own validity; procurement reset is not assurance approval or withdrawal.

  5. Distinguish unlinking from deleting

    Remove Asset under Related Assets removes that relationship only. Delete Supplier removes Supplier, relationship rows and approval logs, not Assets. Review destructive confirmation; Cancel or failing delete retains the data.

History and report interpretation

Read current-cycle entries separately from earlier reviews and explicit reset/reversal chronology. Unknown-timestamp comments must not be promoted into current evidence. The Supplier report projects current phase/assurance, contact, related Assets and approval history; it does not certify old comments as a current decision. Procurement approval, assurance qualification, Asset identity, CIA and Risk all retain independent statuses.

Supplier Approval

Use the supplier workflow to record the information, assessment and approval needed for the relationship.

Supplier review and approval lifecycle

Approval follows recorded supplier information, security review and a reasoned owner decision.

Where to start

Complete the three internal procurement phases with the actual required confirmations and decisions.

Supplier detail → current phase / approval action

All phases use general Supplier Due Diligence access and write permission. The Risk Owner title does not impose a separate Risk-role or distinct-person gate. Apply any stronger organisational segregation policy yourself.

Step-by-step

  1. Check current stage and Supplier

    Read identity, service, eight-factor assessment and prior-cycle history. Viewing a phase can update phase metadata; it is not final approval. Complete preceding phases before submitting a later one.

  2. Complete Phase 1 Data Entry

    Confirm all three: required supplier information complete/accurate; contact information complete/verified; criticality properly assessed. Notes are optional. Choose Complete Data Entry and inspect saved Phase 2.

  3. Submit Phase 2 Security Review

    Confirm I have conducted a security review, choose Approve—requirements met or Reject—requirements not met. Security Issues, Recommendations and Additional Notes are optional text. Submit Security Review once.

  4. Check a rejection before proceeding

    Security rejection returns draft/Phase 1 and clears Phase 1 completion. Correct the underlying facts; no automatic recovery or pending Phase 2 approval is implied.

  5. Submit Phase 3 Risk Owner Review

    Confirm review of all Supplier information/security assessment; choose Approve—business risk acceptable or Reject—business risk too high. Risk Assessment Notes are optional. Submit Final Approval.

  6. Reopen and verify the saved state

    Approval sets the third flag/Fully Approved. Final rejection returns Phase 1 and clears earlier Phase 1/2 flags. Edit later resets all approvals; Revert only clears the highest completed phase.

Required confirmations versus optional comments
PhaseRequiredOptional
1Three completeness/contact/criticality confirmationsPhase 1 Notes
2Security-review confirmation + Approved/Rejected decisionSecurity Issues, Recommendations, Additional Notes
3Risk-review confirmation + Approved/Rejected decisionRisk Assessment Notes

Missing confirmations/decision block the intended transition. Cancel/leave before submitting saves no new approval. No professional authority or enforced independent-person claim follows from the interface; a reasoned evidence record is still needed under your policy.

Pending views and independent assurance

Pending includes all not-Phase 3-approved records, including null flags. Dashboard pending excludes unfinished Phase 1; do not expect parity. Active review stage derives from completed earlier flags. Prior approvals/comments retained after reset remain historical. Fully Approved is procurement workflow state, not verification of certification, a qualifying PDF/questionnaire, CIA or legal compliance.

Supplier Module Connections

Supplier records can link to the assets they support and retain the approval history for the relationship.

Three internal phases and a distinct assurance panel. Edit resets approval; questionnaire creation does not send an invitation.

Two separate decisions: internal approval above, filed assurance below. Neither changes Asset, CIA or Risk automatically.

Where to start

Link the supplier’s real Asset scope and external follow-up without creating automatic Risk, approval or assurance.

Asset → Link Supplier; Supplier detail → Related Assets / Create Jira Ticket

Use permitted Asset/Supplier UI paths. Existing link creation checks Asset access; Supplier-side unlink checks Supplier/write, not an extra Asset role. The direct Supplier Jira handler lacks the same Supplier-role decorator as its UI; do not treat visible module restrictions as runtime-tested universal endpoint enforcement.

Step-by-step

  1. Create the relationship from the Asset

    Open the Asset, choose Link Supplier, select an existing not-yet-linked Supplier or Create new Supplier. A new Supplier created in that context gets an atomic Provider relationship; standalone Supplier creation does not.

  2. Choose a precise relationship

    Select Provider, Manufacturer, Service Provider, Integrator, Distributor, Partner or Other; add optional Notes. Save and verify the related record on both sides. A relationship does not approve the Supplier or copy CIA/Risk scores.

  3. Remove only a relationship when needed

    Supplier → Related Assets → exact relationship dropdown → Remove Asset. Confirm once or Cancel. An absent relationship warns; neither Asset nor Supplier is deleted.

  4. Create a Jira task deliberately

    Choose Create Jira Ticket, review the exact Supplier/service and modal, then submit once. Check actual issue key AND saved local reference. A duplicate warning is not protection against another issue.

  5. Continue the owning governance

    Use Supplier report, approval phases or Security Assurance for their separate decisions. Neither creating/linking a Supplier nor a Jira task automatically creates a formal Risk/Treatment or changes an assessment.

Actual modal inputs and provider outcome
ControlRule
Project / SummaryProject ITSEC read-only; Summary required, Supplier-specific prefill.
DescriptionOptional evidence/scope; no confidential material without authority.
Priority / TypeLow/Medium(default)/High/Critical; Task(default)/Bug/Story.
LabelsComma-separated; default supplier-management,due-diligence.

Non-Medium Priority/Labels are added to DESCRIPTION, not guaranteed real Jira fields. Provider success can have no extracted key, and local reference failure does not undo remote creation. Reconcile provider issue and local Supplier reference before retrying; Cancel before submit sends no task. Connector Online is not proof of every operation.

Relationships are not propagated approvals

Use an explicit supported Risk workflow for a business exposure; reuse actual Supplier evidence in Documents, assessments or Training with its source/date. A manual citation is not a reciprocal stored link or automatic policy/training completion. Supplier assurance and three-phase procurement states remain separate from the Asset relationship.

Document Dialog

Document Dialog helps you prepare ISMS documents from templates and organisation information.

Templates define inputs; one document retains its revisions

Templates define inputs; a Document keeps identity; versions retain saved bodies and change context.

Where to start

Document Dialog → Select Template / View Documents / Document Map

Admin or Document Dialog access applies. Read-only creation has a specific name-based Password Policy exception; it is not general document-write permission or a universal demo rule.

Before you begin

Decide whether you need a new identity, a new version, a selected export or an external handoff.

Step-by-step

  1. Find existing work

    Open View Documents, ordered newest-created first. Type in Search documents... to filter immediately by case-insensitive title substring; clear the input to restore all rows. There is no server Search/Reset button or category/version/approval filter. A filtered No documents found is different from a truly empty inventory: use its Create New Document action to choose a template. Content unavailable is a storage state, not a search result.

  2. Use the action menu for the exact row

    View Details reads the current body; Edit creates a new saved version; Version History reads stored revisions; Export downloads the selected current body; Delete is a separate destructive choice. Verify title and ID before choosing.

  3. Choose the right template path

    Select Template opens the latest existing document where one exists, otherwise generation. To create another document for an existing template, use Document Map’s +/create entry and the duplicate-choice dialog.

    Choose existing or new

  4. Save or revise deliberately

    Generate Document creates Document + version 1. Existing Document → Edit → Save New Version retains the identity. A draft in the editor is not a saved revision.

    Save and inspect the revision

  5. Interpret review and lifecycle separately

    Overdue/Due Soon/Active/Not Set are date bands, not approval. The lifecycle chart counts registered templates, not individual documents; an old overdue document can keep a template in Overdue.

  6. Read and retain the body

    Check exact version, dates, unresolved markers and current body. Missing body requires recovery, not empty replacement. Export or publish only after that check, following their separate procedures.

    Export and publish separately

Lifecycle example: templates are the denominator

Assume three registered templates: A has no document; B has one current document; C has one current and one older overdue document. The chart is To Create 1, Created 1, Overdue 1: its denominator is three registered templates, not individual saved documents. Each tooltip share rounds to 33%.

An old overdue C document still counts for C’s overdue state even when its newest document is current. Inspect the actual due documents rather than treating the donut as approval status.

Check the result

The correct Document identity/version and a deliberate next action.

Current limits and common mistakes

Generation is not approval, implementation or acknowledgement. Export is HTML, not a promised native PDF/DOCX or complete backup.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Diagrams and background
A usable template creates a Document with version 1. Edit saves a new body; export and external publishing have separate scopes.

Follow one Document identity through its stored versions. Export a chosen version; publish the current one deliberately.

Document Title and selected schema, generation and saved revisions, selected HTML export, current-body Confluence publication and Jira review follow-up

Use Document Title and the offered schema; Edit dates/Change Notes and Save New Version. Export a selected HTML body, or deliberately send the current body to Confluence or create a permitted Jira review ticket. Inspect local/provider outcomes. Approval, distribution and indexing remain manual; later edits do not auto-publish.

Create and review a draft

Select a template, complete its form and generate a document. Review the content and adapt it to your organisation before using it as policy.

Maintain the record

Use the editor, version history and available export controls. Configured Jira or Confluence actions are separate external actions and require the applicable permissions.

Document Templates

Browse the current Document Dialog catalogue to find a template that fits your purpose.

Choose a usable template before creating a document

Choose a usable catalogue entry. Revise an existing document through its version workflow.

Where to start

Document Dialog → Select Template or Document Map

Use the document access and read-only limits stated in the overview.

Before you begin

Prepare real business facts; source examples and a policy title are not verified organisational content.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose an available registered template

    Read the available registered template’s category, purpose and actual form. If Select Template is empty, use its Document Map path. The map also lists unavailable source-only entries; those cannot be generated and are not a coverage guarantee.

  2. Open or create intentionally

    Select Template’s View Document opens its latest record. To create another identity use Map +/create. Existing Document Found shows the latest three titles, versions and dates plus an extra count when more exist. Check them before choosing: Create New Version opens the latest editor; Create New Document or Close returns to the new unsaved form. Neither silently saves.

    Maintain an existing version

  3. Read each actual field

    Check label/help, requiredness, type, limits, choices and defaults. Forms can use text, long text, dates, integers and checkboxes; do not substitute a generic Company/Owner/Version form.

    Field types and full ISMS inputs

  4. Use the specialised guide where applicable

    Canonical ISMS uses the source-driven 46-input form below in Generating a Document. Password Policy’s rotation boolean changes prose, not the account system. Other templates depend on their actual registered stored schema.

  5. Correct validation before generation

    Use clear real values, valid ISO dates and any displayed numeric range. Required-looking checkboxes do not universally mean checked is mandatory; do not infer a numeric validator from an asterisk alone.

  6. Recover unavailable legacy links

    An old convert-template link redirects a single registered match; ambiguous matches return selection and missing matches are unavailable. It is not a self-service conversion/seeding tool.

How schema-driven input types behave
Offered typePreparation and validationEffect
Text / long textRead required flag/help and the actual length validator. Replace illustrative prose with real scoped facts.Escaped literal substitution; pasted block Markdown is not automatically parsed as a new structured table.
DateUse YYYY-MM-DD and inspect resulting metadata/body; creation effective dates can clamp to today.A date is content/metadata, not approval or scheduling.
Whole numberUse the displayed range and required-input behaviour. A metadata star alone does not establish every numeric validator.Ranges/zero support vary by actual form.
CheckboxUnchecked can be valid; inspect the actual form instead of equating required-looking styling with must-check.Password rotation changes policy prose, not account configuration.
Unknown/source-only markersDo not invent SECTION/REPEAT add-row controls or assume all source files are registered.Use the offered form and authorised owner clarification for dynamic stored schemas.

Check the result

An available template and a deliberate new-document or existing-version path.

Current limits and common mistakes

The 88 source files/marker inventory is not a census of offered templates or fields. Non-ISMS stored schemas were not read from private data; follow the rendered form and obtain authorised schema clarification if it is unclear.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Diagrams and background

Choose by scope

Review the template description and fields. Select what you need for the actual process or policy; a template title is not proof that every requirement is covered.

Adapt and review

Complete the form with accurate information and review the generated draft. The available catalogue is the application view, not a fixed count promised by this guide.

Generating a Document

Open Document Dialog and select a suitable template. Complete the fields shown in the form using accurate organisation information.

Generate a document: inputs, validation and stored output

Inspect the saved body, dates and unresolved markers after generation; generation is not approval.

Where to start

Document Dialog → selected registered template → creation form

Admin/Document Dialog access applies. The read-only Password Policy name exception is narrow, not general write permission.

Before you begin

Prepare Document Title and the selected form’s required facts. Check for an existing intended document before generation.

Step-by-step

  1. Confirm template and identity

    Document Title is required and at most 200 characters. Check the template context and the Existing Document Found choice; Create New Document makes another identity, while Create New Version opens the latest editor.

  2. Complete the actual schema

    Use the visible fields and help. Canonical ISMS has the 46 inputs grouped below; only Review Cycle defaults to 12. Supply actual organisation/scope/contacts/references and policy text, not unexplained sample claims.

    Template availability and schema

  3. Handle field types deliberately

    Text has its actual length validator; long text/blocks can have different limits. Dates use YYYY-MM-DD. Integer fields use the stated range. Checkbox false is a valid value unless its real validator says otherwise; an asterisk alone is not proof checked is mandatory.

  4. Check specialised effects

    For Password Policy, the rotation boolean changes the generated rotation sentence; it does not configure account passwords. For ISMS, entered Approvals/Version History are escaped authored content, not approval or version events.

  5. Generate once

    Use Generate Document. It saves the Document, version 1 and persistent body. A missing/past effective date is clamped to today; next review uses effective date plus the calendar-month cycle. Template/generation/storage failure is not a saved draft.

  6. Inspect the entire saved output

    Read headings, scope, responsibilities, dates, tables, references and remaining placeholders. Review any fixed sample communication/history claims. Effective Date is automatic at creation; unresolved approval/signature/employee/department/acknowledgement markers are not extra offered approval inputs.

  7. Revise through the actual editor

    Use Edit, correct the current body and dates, add Change Notes and Save New Version. Entered block Markdown was substituted as literal escaped content; use Insert Table if a real table is required.

    Link, table and save controls

  8. Reopen before sharing

    Check the same Document ID/current version and body. Export the intended stored version. Publish sends current content separately; neither action approves or implements the policy.

    Selected export versus current publication

Canonical ISMS Policy — all 46 offered inputs

The current canonical English/German form has 46 inputs: 44 required and two optional blocks (Reviewers and Distribution). The separate required Document Title is at most 200 characters. Only Review Cycle is prefilled, at 12; template prose examples are not business-prefill.

Whole-number ranges are shown below and include zero where the minimum is 0. Required numeric fields must be supplied. For text, the effective stored length limit can be inherited; the helper fallback is 500, not a universal promise for every field. Long text/blocks have distinct handling. Read the displayed field validation.

The form does not offer separate Effective Date, Approved By, employee/department/signature/acknowledgement inputs for those removed/automatic/unresolved markers. Generation is not a signed approval or Training acknowledgement.

Policy identity, scope and authored history
Input (English / German)Required and typeRange / defaultWhat to supply
Organization Name / OrganisationRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Use the actual organisation named in this policy, not an assumed global profile value.
Policy Owner / RichtlinienverantwortlicherRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.State the policy-owner function/title responsible for maintaining it.
Review Cycle (months) / Überprüfungszyklus (Monate)Required · whole number1–36; default 12Choose the policy review cycle; this supplies date calculation, not automatic approval or notification.
Version History / VersionshistorieRequired · long textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Enter accurate authored history context. This block is not the database version ledger.
Reviewers / PrüferOptional · long textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Optionally state the actual reviewers/context. This does not assign or record their reviews.
Approvals / GenehmigungenRequired · long textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Describe approval evidence truthfully. Entered names/text do not perform application approval.
Distribution / VerteilungOptional · long textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Optionally describe the intended approved distribution; generation does not send it.
ISMS Scope Description / Beschreibung des ISMS-GeltungsbereichsRequired · long textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Define systems, locations, services and organisational boundaries actually in scope.
Risk Register Reference / Referenz RisikoregisterRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Give the reviewed register reference; text is not a validated Risk-record foreign key.
SoA Reference / Referenz SoARequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Identify the intended Statement of Applicability; the field does not create or approve it.
Interested Parties List / Liste interessierter ParteienRequired · long textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Identify relevant parties and their requirements for this scope.
External Context Description / Beschreibung externer KontextRequired · long textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Describe real external drivers, dependencies and constraints.
Internal Context Description / Beschreibung interner KontextRequired · long textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Describe real organisational structure, processes and internal context.
Responsibilities and contacts
Input (English / German)Required and typeRange / defaultWhat to supply
CISO Name / Name CISORequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Name the actual responsible CISO/contact, only where appropriate for the document audience.
Information Security Officer / InformationssicherheitsbeauftragterRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Name the responsible information-security officer/function.
IT Security Team Lead / Leiter IT-SicherheitsteamRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Identify the lead for the actual IT-security responsibilities.
Information Owner / InformationseigentümerRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Identify responsibility for the policy’s information/scope.
HR Contact / Personalabteilung-KontaktRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Give the approved HR contact for policy-related people responsibilities.
Training Contact / Schulungs-KontaktRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Give the learning contact; this does not assign curriculum or complete courses.
Risk, improvement and competence
Input (English / German)Required and typeRange / defaultWhat to supply
Risk Assessment Methodology Reference / Referenz RisikobewertungsmethodikRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Cite the methodology actually used; generation does not run it.
Risk Appetite Level / RisikobereitschaftsniveauRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Describe the organisation’s agreed risk appetite, not an invented score or acceptance.
Corrective Action Tracker Reference / Referenz Korrekturmaßnahmen-TrackerRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Identify the actual follow-up tracker; it does not create tasks.
Continual Improvement Lead / Verantwortlicher Kontinuierliche VerbesserungRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Identify responsibility for reviewing continual-improvement work.
Improvement Review Frequency (months) / Häufigkeit Verbesserungsüberprüfung (Monate)Required · whole number1–24; no prefillState the agreed improvement-review interval, not a scheduler.
Training Frequency / SchulungshäufigkeitRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.State the actual training cadence/process; no course assignment is created.
Skill Review Frequency (months) / Häufigkeit Kompetenzüberprüfung (Monate)Required · whole number1–36; no prefillState the competence-review interval.
Competency Matrix Reference / Referenz KompetenzmatrixRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Cite the maintained competence matrix/evidence source.
Continuity and recovery objectives
Input (English / German)Required and typeRange / defaultWhat to supply
DRP Reference / Referenz DRPRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Cite the applicable disaster-recovery plan; no restore test is performed.
BCP Reference / Referenz BCPRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Cite the applicable continuity plan; this does not establish resilience.
Change Management Policy Reference / Referenz Änderungsmanagement-RichtlinieRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Cite the current change-management policy/version.
RTO (hours) / RTO (Stunden)Required · whole number1–72; no prefillState the agreed recovery-time objective; entering it does not prove it is met.
RPO (hours) / RPO (Stunden)Required · whole number1–48; no prefillState the agreed recovery-point objective; entering it is not a backup guarantee.
Targets, audit and management review
Input (English / German)Required and typeRange / defaultWhat to supply
KPI - Policy Compliance Target % / KPI - Ziel Richtlinienkonformität %Required · whole number0–100; no prefillEnter a target percentage, not a measured compliance result.
KPI - Policy Review Count / KPI - Anzahl RichtlinienüberprüfungenRequired · whole number1–12; no prefillEnter the target/count used in the authored policy, not automatic audit evidence.
KPI - Policy Exceptions Count / KPI - Anzahl RichtlinienausnahmenRequired · whole number0–100; no prefillEnter the policy’s exceptions target/count truthfully; no exceptions are created.
Audit Frequency (months) / Audithäufigkeit (Monate)Required · whole number1–24; no prefillState the planned audit interval; it does not schedule or perform an audit.
Management Review Frequency (months) / Häufigkeit Managementbewertung (Monate)Required · whole number1–24; no prefillState the planned management-review interval.
Audit Owner / AuditverantwortlicherRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Name the actual responsible audit function/person.
Legal, configuration and licence references
Input (English / German)Required and typeRange / defaultWhat to supply
Legal Register Reference / Referenz RechtsregisterRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Cite the applicable maintained legal register, not a legal sufficiency claim.
Regulatory Contact / Regulatorischer KontaktRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Give the approved regulatory contact.
GDPR Article Reference / DSGVO-ArtikelreferenzRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.State the relevant reviewed reference; a citation is not legal advice.
Contractual Register Reference / Referenz VertragsregisterRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Cite the maintained contract-requirements register.
Configuration Template Repository / Repository für KonfigurationsvorlagenRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Identify the approved repository/reference, not a credential or automatic integration.
Config Review Frequency (months) / Häufigkeit Konfigurationsüberprüfung (Monate)Required · whole number1–36; no prefillState the agreed configuration-review interval.
IPR Policy Reference / Referenz IPR-RichtlinieRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Cite the applicable intellectual-property policy/version.
License Compliance Register Reference / Referenz Lizenz-Compliance-RegisterRequired · textNo business prefill; use actual field length validation.Cite the maintained licence-compliance register, not a scanning result.

Check the result

A readable persisted draft with correct identity, body, version and dates, or a specific failure requiring reconciliation.

Current limits and common mistakes

Handled storage/DB failure retains input and reports no save. Non-ISMS fields remain schema-driven, not a privately inspected catalogue. Do not promise a universal 500-character limit or automatic organisation-wide propagation.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Diagrams and background
Document Title and selected schema, generation and saved revisions, selected HTML export, current-body Confluence publication and Jira review follow-up

Use Document Title and the offered schema; Edit dates/Change Notes and Save New Version. Export a selected HTML body, or deliberately send the current body to Confluence or create a permitted Jira review ticket. Inspect local/provider outcomes. Approval, distribution and indexing remain manual; later edits do not auto-publish.

Review the generated draft

Check populated fields, missing information and the meaning of each section. Edit the document to reflect your actual processes.

Keep the right evidence

Review the saved version and use the available history or export controls. Publication to a configured external service is a separate action.

Document Version History

Document Dialog provides version history and comparison views for saved documents.

One document identity, distinct saved revisions

Illustrative saved revisions of one identity. Compare or export a selected body; no Restore/Revert control.

Where to start

Saved Document → Edit / Version History

Use the permitted account and exact Document ID. Read-only does not give a general editing exception.

Before you begin

Read the current body, version, effective/review dates and desired changes. Retain required evidence first.

Step-by-step

  1. Open Edit on the existing identity

    Do not generate a duplicate merely to revise wording. Missing metadata or a missing saved body is an error/recovery case; do not replace unavailable history with an empty document.

  2. Format selected text or the cursor position

    Use Bold, Italic, Underline, Bullet List, Numbered List, H1/H2/H3 or Paragraph. These affect the editor only until Save New Version; the editor does not rerun every original template field.

  3. Insert a link safely

    Use Insert Link with the intended selection/cursor. Enter a safe URL and nonblank Text, then Insert. Correct inline URL/selection errors; Cancel or Escape abandons that panel. Enter submits the panel’s intended action.

  4. Insert a real table

    Use Insert Table. Default is 3×3; rows are whole numbers 1–100 including the header, columns 1–20. Insert creates header/body rows at the saved cursor. Correct inline errors, or Cancel/Escape. Resolve open link/table panels before saving the document.

  5. Set version metadata

    Effective Date and Next Review Date are optional ISO inputs; Change Notes is optional, at most 500 characters. Blank effective retains the current value. Blank next review recalculates today plus existing cycle; enter it explicitly when a different schedule is agreed.

    Review-date rules

  6. Save the new version

    Use Save New Version. The sanitised body must remain nonempty. Correct validation errors and inspect storage feedback; Cancel is not a save. Metadata dates do not rewrite every date typed in the body.

  7. Inspect Version History

    Confirm the new number, Current marker, editor/time and Change Notes. Entries are newest first; Content unavailable is not an empty valid revision. Numbered Export preserves the chosen version rather than changing current_version.

  8. Compare the intended pair

    Use Compare with previous or Version 1 / Version 2 → Compare. Red means removed, green added, orange changed. This is a text-line comparison, not a complete formatting diff. Missing version is unavailable; missing body needs recovery.

  9. Retain or adapt deliberately

    Export the exact numbered/current body as HTML and inspect it. There is no native Restore/Revert action; to reuse earlier content, review it and save a deliberate new revision.

    Retain the chosen output

Link and table field reference
ControlAccepted input / actionWhat is saved
Link URLHTTP, HTTPS, mailto or clear relative /, ./, ../, # or ?; no unsafe scheme, spaces or control characters.Insert changes the editor; Save New Version persists it.
Link Text / selectionNonblank Text and a valid retained selection/cursor; resolve a stale-selection error rather than inserting in the wrong place.Existing-link edits also remain unsaved until the document save.
Table Rows / ColumnsWhole rows 1–100 including header; whole columns 1–20; default 3×3.Insert creates a real table in the editor, not a stored version yet.
Panel Cancel / Escape / EnterCancel/Escape dismisses the panel; Enter performs its valid insert action.An open panel blocks Save until resolved.

Check the result

A new stored body/version and checkable history, or an explicit validation/storage failure.

Current limits and common mistakes

Handled storage failure can retain submitted input; invalid field redisplay does not guarantee every draft value survives. Version history is not organisational approval or a complete backup.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Diagrams and background

Compare changes

Open the document's version controls and select the versions you want to compare. Review the actual content changes and the available author and timestamp information.

Retention

Confirm your deployment's retention and backup policy with the responsible operator. Version history is not a guarantee against every form of data loss.

Information Security Policy

The ISP area provides a structured policy reference with sections, subsections and search.

Policy reference, document versions and external tasks differ

Read the applicable source in context; perform document changes and workflow decisions in their actual modules.

Find relevant content

Browse the table of contents or use the policy search to locate a topic. Read the relevant section in context before relying on it.

Related work

Where enabled, create a reviewed Jira task or link an existing Confluence page from a policy section. Use Document Dialog when preparing a separate organisation-specific document.

Where to start

Information Security Policy → table of contents → section → subsection

Reference reading is public. Integration actions are separately authenticated/configured; reading is not a permission grant.

Before you begin

Know the topic and whether you need a reference passage or an organisation-specific maintained document.

Step-by-step

  1. Browse the hierarchy

    Open a section, then the intended subsection. Use parent/overview navigation and the collapsible table of contents; click or Enter/Space can toggle it. A missing section/deep path returns the overview with a notice, not an editor.

  2. Search locally

    Enter q through Search using useful terms at least two ASCII-alphanumeric characters long. Results rank title/body matches and are limited to 20. No matches is a local search outcome, not proof there is no applicable policy.

  3. Reset and broaden carefully

    Use Clear to remove the query, browse the parent and try recognised terms. This search is not an external provider search or an Ask query. German content can use English source fallback.

  4. Read the full context

    Check the selected paragraph and its parent before citing it. Reference text is not your organisation’s signed policy register or evidence that a control is implemented.

  5. Retain the reference URL

    On a subsection use Show URL to reveal the link and Copy URL for the clipboard. Verify the copied destination. The Asset Management shortcut navigates to inventory; it creates no Asset.

    Inventory shortcut is navigation

  6. Choose a separate follow-up

    On a full section, eligible Integrations can offer Create Jira Ticket, Link Confluence Page and Open ISC Space. Open ISC Space is external navigation to the fixed ISC Confluence space, subject to provider access; it does not create/link/publish a page or adopt policy. A subsection has the eligible Jira/link actions but no Open ISC Space option. Use Document Dialog separately for a maintained organisational version.

    External action and evidence boundaries

Check the result

The intended source topic, reference link and deliberate next action.

Current limits and common mistakes

Legacy #documents/isp links are normalised to #policy/isp by this Help copy on initial load, navigation and browser history. Use Policy Reference as the canonical destination. This compatibility is in Help only; no application bridge was edited or runtime-tested.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Reviewing Documents

Keep policy documents aligned with the organisation's current processes and responsibilities.

Review dates guide work; they do not perform approval

Review-date bands guide attention. They do not assign, approve or publish work.

Where to start

View Documents → intended document → Edit / Version History

Follow your organisation’s actual reviewer/approver responsibility process.

Before you begin

Check the saved version and Next Review Date, plus changes in scope/process since the last review.

Step-by-step

  1. Interpret the date band

    Past date is Overdue. Today through 30 days ahead is Due Soon, inclusive. More than 30 days ahead is Current on detail / Active on list. Blank is Not Set. None means approved or already reviewed.

  2. Review the content and context

    Compare the saved body with current Assets/CIA, Supplier evidence, assessments, incidents and responsibilities. A due badge is attention guidance, not an assigned reviewer or automatic ticket.

  3. Record the actual result

    Use Edit and Save New Version when recording revised content, dates or review notes. Maintain reviewer/approver evidence through the organisational process; typing an approval block is not an application approval event.

    Record a versioned review

  4. Choose the next date explicitly

    Creation calculates effective date plus cycle. Edit with blank next review calculates today plus cycle, not necessarily the effective date. Use an explicit ISO Next Review Date for an agreed exception/schedule.

  5. Reopen the same identity

    Confirm version, metadata, body dates and Change Notes. Metadata edits do not rewrite dates embedded in prose. Preserve any review evidence needed separately.

  6. Publish or track follow-up separately

    Create a reviewed Jira task or Publish current content only through its intended action. Jira completion is not a local version save/approval, and later edits are not automatically republished.

    Check deliberate publication

Worked calendar-month review rule

Use an explicit agreed Next Review Date when its exact value matters. A creation cycle is based on the saved effective date; an edit left blank uses today plus the existing cycle. These are not universally the same base date.

After saving, compare metadata and body text and keep reviewer/approval evidence separately. A changed date alone neither distributes the policy nor confirms a review was performed.

Check the result

A maintained Document version and truthful next-review evidence.

Current limits and common mistakes

Example relative to today: yesterday → Overdue; today and +30 days → Due Soon; +31 days → Current/Active; blank → Not Set. No universal automatic notification or legal approval is implied.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Diagrams and background

Plan the review

Agree a review owner and schedule through your organisation's document-control process. Check the current document and its available history.

Record the outcome

Update and save the relevant changes, then follow your organisation's approval process. Confirm any notification or automation capability in the actual deployment.

Document Dialog Workflow

Choose a template, complete the form and generate a draft. Use the editor to refine it and the version views to inspect changes.

Local authoring and external handoffs are different stages

Local revisions, selected-version exports and current-body publication have separate outcomes.

Where to start

Document Dialog → existing Document; View Documents action menu for Delete

Use eligible Document/integration access; external actions require enabled services and their own gates.

Before you begin

Confirm exact Document ID/current body and whether the intended output is a historical export or current-body publication.

Step-by-step

  1. Finish and save local review

    Read the entire draft. Use Edit → Save New Version for corrections and reopen it. A preview or typed Approvals paragraph is not saved approval or adoption.

    Save the intended local revision

  2. Export the chosen persisted body

    Use current Export or a numbered Version History export. Check filename/version/date and the actual sanitised HTML body. No native DOCX/PDF is promised; browser printing is separate.

  3. Prepare a current-body publication

    Only after confirming readable current storage, open Publish to Confluence. Check read-only Document identity, required Page Title and the offered ISC space. A historical export selection is not what Publish sends.

  4. Cancel or Publish once

    Cancel leaves that publication unsent. Publish can create or update a same-title page. If the body is missing/unavailable, recover it first rather than risk timestamp-only or incomplete external content.

  5. Reconcile both sides

    Inspect the remote Page ID/body and local reference. Provider success does not guarantee local reference persistence. Do not blindly republish after an unclear outcome or assume another local version was created.

    Reconcile remote and local outcomes

  6. Create review work separately

    Use Create Review Ticket if a Jira task is intended. Its completion does not approve the policy, save a version or republish future edits.

    Ticket consequences

  7. Delete only after retention review

    In View Documents use the exact row’s actions → Delete. Check the named title, then Cancel or Delete. Deletion removes the Document/version database rows; failure requires inspection, not assumed removal.

  8. Inspect the actual removal boundary

    Deletion is not archive, template removal, retraction of Jira/Confluence/exported copies or complete physical-file erasure. Retain required evidence before the action.

Check the result

An inspected chosen-version export, deliberate current-body publication or correctly bounded deletion outcome.

Current limits and common mistakes

No general Document Dialog approval, send-back or version-revert endpoint is established. Provider and local writes are not one atomic transaction.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Diagrams and background

Export the document

Use the export controls available for the document or selected version. Review the exported content before distributing it.

Optional Confluence publication

When the integration and permissions allow it, review the target and content before publishing. Check the resulting Confluence link and page; an external update is a separate action from saving locally.

Training

Training provides role-based security learning through knowledge cards, quizzes and completion records.

An account administrator assigns curriculum. Learners complete cards and submit quizzes; qualifying quiz submission creates a certificate. Renewal resets progress.

Retain required certificate evidence before Renew. A certificate is course completion, not policy approval or a technical control test.

Where to start

Training → My Training / My Progress / Certificates / Course Catalog

Use the eligible learner account. Trainer/Admin oversight and Account Admin assignment writes are different responsibilities.

Before you begin

Check the primary/assigned role, available curriculum and any missing role guidance before starting.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose the intended course

    Use My Training → View My Courses for assigned mandatory work and optional explored courses; use Course Catalog → Browse Catalog for available roles. No primary role or Coming Soon/missing content is not completed learning.

    Course and assignment choice

  2. Open the course overview

    Inspect actual loaded cards/quizzes and existing progress. Opening the course or quiz can create empty progress; it does not mark a card complete.

  3. Study the card

    Read text/examples and infographic. The card position bar is your current card number divided by loaded count, not saved completion.

  4. Record completion explicitly

    Use Mark Complete & Continue or final Mark Complete after study, or pass the corresponding quiz. A page visit alone is not the completion action.

  5. Submit every required quiz

    Answer every question with at least one choice and Submit Quiz. Exact-set scoring, metadata thresholds and latest-score rules apply; inspect feedback and remaining work.

    Exact quiz scoring

  6. Check progress and the certificate separately

    Use My Progress → View My Progress for Overall Completion, Courses Completed, In Progress, Cards Completed and Training History; the detailed procedure is linked below. Quiz submission can create the certificate only when all loaded cards/quizzes qualify; marking the final card alone does not generate it. Use Certificates → View Certificates to check identity, issue and expiry.

    Certificate trigger and renewal

    My Progress — entry, history, status and exact denominators

  7. Use administration for assignments

    Training Role Assignments is reference/navigation. Account Admin → User Management → Edit User saves curriculum roles/primary role; Training Admin alone cannot save them there.

Training charts — exact populations and examples
ChartUnit and calculationInterpretation
Training Role DistributionActive TrainingRole definitions grouped by tier, not users or assignments. Tooltip = tier role count / total active roles × 100, formatted to two decimal places; missing tier is Unknown.Example: 6 Specialist + 2 Executive + 2 Functional definitions gives 60.00%, 20.00%, 20.00%. Zero/no data does not establish compliance.
Completion StatusAll TrainingProgress rows for active users. completed_at set → Completed (C); unset → In Progress (I), including empty-started and optional rows. Not Started = max(0, active-user assignment-row count (A) − C − I).The Course Assignments label does not make this an assigned-only reconciliation. Reports uses a different assignment denominator.
Assumed population exampleA = 3 assignments; C = 2 progress rows; I = 3 progress rows, including optional/empty started work. Not Started = max(0, 3 − 2 − 3) = 0.Displayed progress counts total 5 although assignments total 3. This is a population difference, not five completed assignments or a compliance finding.

Check the result

Saved card/quiz progress and, after qualification, a specific course certificate.

Current limits and common mistakes

Dashboard progress can include optional/empty started rows; assigned-only reports have a different denominator. Training is learning evidence, not policy approval or technical/legal compliance.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Diagrams and background
Catalogue role families, loaded course content and training evidence—not a current database census

Check the active catalogue and actual loaded curriculum. The fixed 24-view layout is not a promise of 24 available cards or quizzes.

Loaded cards and quiz thresholds, qualifying Submit Quiz, certificate inspection, 365-day validity and renewal reset

Complete all loaded cards and meet each quiz threshold, then use a qualifying Submit Quiz and inspect the certificate. Validity is 365 days; authorised renewal resets progress and removes the old certificate, not an automatic extension.

Learn and complete the course

Open an assigned course, read and complete its cards, then take the quizzes. The normal passing threshold is 80%; follow the criteria shown for the quiz.

Certificate and review

A certificate is issued after all required cards and quizzes are completed. Training records support evidence of learning; they do not automatically determine compliance with a regulation.

Training Courses

The training catalogue groups roles into specialist, executive and functional learning areas. Open the current catalogue or your assigned courses to see what is available.

Catalogue role families, loaded course content and training evidence—not a current database census

Check the active catalogue and actual loaded curriculum. The fixed 24-view layout is not a promise of 24 available cards or quizzes.

Where to start

Training → Course Catalog / My Training

Use actual Training/module access. Read-only learning scope is limited to the offered CISO/General Staff paths, not all courses.

Before you begin

Know the learner’s responsibility and whether the course is assigned or optional.

Step-by-step

  1. Browse the active catalogue

    Roles are grouped Specialist, Executive and Functional. Start Course means content is offered; Coming Soon or missing content is not a complete curriculum. Localised display names can change without changing the English-name-derived course identity.

  2. Check assignment separately

    My Training distinguishes mandatory assigned courses and optional explored courses. A catalogue visit or empty progress row does not create an Account Admin assignment.

  3. Use the actual editor for assignments

    Account Admin uses User Management → Edit User → selected training roles/primary role → Save. Training Admin’s Role Assignments view is not an assignment-write form. Unassignment retains earlier learning progress/certificates.

    Save curriculum assignments

  4. Read the course overview

    In the course overview inspect actual loaded cards/quizzes and results. Start Course appears when no cards are complete; Continue (Card n) uses highest completed card + 1 while incomplete; All Cards Completed! appears when its card count is complete. My Courses instead offers its Start/Continue Course/Review Course branches. Neither navigation silently resets progress.

  5. Fill gaps deliberately

    Continue can choose highest completed card + 1, not the first missing card. Use individual card/quiz links to return to a gap, Previous/Back to Overview for navigation, and actual completion controls to save learning.

    Complete a card or quiz

  6. Compare denominators correctly

    My Courses currently uses a fixed 24 denominator. The course/progress view uses actual loaded counts (with a fallback where needed). Do not infer every course has 24 cards or that unlike percentages are equivalent.

    My Progress — rows, certificate states and weighted totals

Check the result

The intended learner-course identity and a specific next unfinished task.

Current limits and common mistakes

Course availability is deployment/content-dependent. This guide does not create a course editor, source catalogue census or role grant.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Diagrams and background

Match the role to the responsibility

A learner may have more than one training role. Administrators assign the roles appropriate to the person's actual work.

Complete the curriculum

Work through the knowledge cards and quizzes shown for the course. Review the completion requirements and resulting certificate; course completion is evidence of training, not a legal compliance verdict.

Knowledge Cards and Quizzes

Each training role has a curriculum of knowledge cards and quizzes. Work through the cards and use the course controls to record completion.

An account administrator assigns curriculum. Learners complete cards and submit quizzes; qualifying quiz submission creates a certificate. Renewal resets progress.

Retain required certificate evidence before Renew. A certificate is course completion, not policy approval or a technical control test.

Where to start

Training → selected course → card / quiz

Use the intended learner and course identity.

Before you begin

Read the actual lesson and the displayed quiz requirements before answering.

Step-by-step

  1. Study and inspect the illustration

    Read the card’s text and examples. Click an infographic to enlarge; clicking the image can zoom, and close resets it. Missing content is a content error, not completion.

  2. Navigate without confusing position and progress

    Previous and Back to Overview move between views. The position bar is current card number / actual loaded count; it can be full while saved learning is incomplete.

  3. Record the card

    Use Mark Complete & Continue or final Mark Complete. This idempotently stores the card number and returns next/overview. It does not itself issue a certificate.

  4. Answer every quiz question

    Take Quiz, select at least one option for each question and Submit Quiz. Multi-select needs every correct option and no extras. Inline unanswered highlighting retains the page; a server fallback can redirect without an answer draft.

    Confirm the actual curriculum

  5. Read exact-set scoring

    Each question is all-or-zero: if correct choices are A+C, A alone or A+C+D earns no credit. Four exact-correct questions out of five gives 4/5 × 100 = 80%.

  6. Separate raw pass from displayed score

    Raw percentage is compared with quiz metadata, then saved to one decimal. A raw 79.96 can fail an 80 threshold while displaying 80.0 after rounding; later stored-score qualification can differ. Use actual feedback and criteria.

  7. Review or retry the actual result

    Latest submission overwrites the score; it is not a best-attempt ledger. Failed output can offer Retry/Review/Next. Review mode at stored score ≥80 shows disabled answers and no Submit, even if metadata qualification differs.

  8. Check course qualification

    A passing quiz also marks its card. At a qualifying Submit Quiz, the application checks recorded completion counts and quiz scores against the loaded-course requirements before attempting certificate creation. These count/score checks are not independent proof that every lesson was reviewed or mastered. Later failure does not necessarily clear an existing completion date/certificate; inspect saved state rather than assuming clean recomputation.

    Inspect the certificate

My Progress — open the history and read its measures

Position example: viewing card 10 of 10 shows 100% position even if only 5 are marked complete. Saved card completion for that 10-card course is 50%.

For loaded courses of 10 and 20 cards with 5 completed in each, My Progress Overall Completion = (5 + 5) / (10 + 20) × 100 = 33.33%, not the 37.5% mean of 50% and 25%. Per-course progress is floored to an integer.

My Courses currently uses 24 per course: 5 / 24 × 100 floors to 20%. That view-specific display must not replace the loaded-course denominator. The same saved scores/retained completion can produce different status displays across these views.

  1. Open the actual view

    Training → My Progress → View My Progress. Use Back to Training to return. No Training History has a Start Learning action; an empty history is not proof the assigned curriculum is complete.

  2. Read the four summary measures

    Overall Completion is total completed cards / total loaded-card capacity across this learner’s progress rows × 100, shown to two decimal places (zero when no capacity). Courses Completed counts retained completed_at; In Progress counts rows with cards or quiz scores but no completion date; Cards Completed sums completed-card counts. Optional courses are included.

  3. Read every history column

    Training History lists Course, Type, Status, Progress, Quizzes, Certificate and Last Activity, with a right-arrow link to that row’s course overview. Newest Last Activity is first; missing activity is shown separately. Course/tier and learner identity remain important.

  4. Interpret Type and Status

    Mandatory reflects current assigned roles, otherwise Optional. Completed uses retained completed_at even after a later failed score; otherwise cards or quiz scores mean In Progress, and an empty row is Not Started. This differs from the landing chart’s broader In Progress bucket.

  5. Read Progress and Quizzes

    Progress uses actual card count or 24 fallback and an integer-floored per-course percentage, with cards done / total shown. Quizzes shows passed / total based on latest stored scores and course criteria, not an attempt ledger or a fresh test of every lesson.

  6. Inspect the certificate independently

    A recorded certificate is labelled Valid or Expired and offers View & Print. No certificate recorded is an explicit state, not a promise one was issued. Use its permitted view and retention rules; the row’s right arrow opens the course, not a reset.

Check the result

A recorded card and latest quiz score, with any remaining course qualification explicit.

Current limits and common mistakes

There is no persisted answer draft or complete attempt history. Some next-card/result links retain fixed-24 assumptions; use the actual overview to resolve curriculum gaps.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Diagrams and background

Take the quizzes

Read each question and select the appropriate answer or answers. The normal pass threshold is 80%; check the criteria and feedback shown in the current quiz.

Complete the curriculum

Certificate issuance requires the required cards to be completed and every quiz to be passed. Review any remaining work on the course overview.

Training Certificates

A qualifying Submit Quiz can create a course certificate from the application’s recorded completion counts and scores. Check its identity, verification hash and validity dates.

An account administrator assigns curriculum. Learners complete cards and submit quizzes; qualifying quiz submission creates a certificate. Renewal resets progress.

Retain required certificate evidence before Renew. A certificate is course completion, not policy approval or a technical control test.

Where to start

Training → Certificates → exact certificate

The owner or global Admin can view; Training Admin alone is not an owner-view bypass. Renewal is owner-only.

Before you begin

Verify learner/course/issue/expiry and retain any required evidence before Renewal.

Step-by-step

  1. Find the exact certificate

    Certificates lists your records newest-issued first. No certificate is an explicit state; verify course qualification rather than assuming the final card issued one.

  2. Read identity and validity

    Check learner/course, issue/expiry, Valid/Expired, days left, CERT identity and 16-character hash. Validity is 365 days; the hash is not a digital signature, public verification or external qualification.

  3. Open View & Print

    This opens the separate certificate view. Print Certificate invokes browser printing; inspect preview and the intended private destination. There is no dedicated native PDF download endpoint.

  4. Recognise the offered renewal condition

    The menu offers Renew when expired or floored days-left is at most 30. This UI rule can differ from an exact 30-day report boundary; the owner-only handler has no separate expiry gate.

  5. Retain before the one-click action

    Renew immediately posts from the menu without a separate confirmation. It clears completed cards, quiz scores and completion date, restarts the start date and deletes the old certificate; it does not reset last activity.

    Retain evidence before renewal

  6. Retake and requalify

    A renewed course is not an extended old certificate. Complete the needed cards/quizzes and verify a newly qualified certificate through the actual quiz-triggered workflow.

    Requalify through actual quizzes

Check the result

An identifiable retained certificate or a deliberate reset for retraining.

Current limits and common mistakes

The reset is destructive to the old active certificate/progress state. Learning evidence does not establish policy acknowledgement, mastery or legal compliance.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Diagrams and background

Review and retain

Open the certificate to check the name, course and completion information. The certificate has a print-friendly view; use the browser's print controls when you need a PDF.

Understand the evidence

A verification hash is not an unforgeability guarantee or an independent certification. Certificate creation uses the application’s recorded completion counts and quiz scores; it is not independent proof that every lesson was reviewed or mastered. Review the renewal action carefully because it restarts the course's progress.

Training Administration

Account administrators assign curriculum through User Management. Training Admin reviews role assignments, learner progress and reports.

An account administrator assigns curriculum. Learners complete cards and submit quizzes; qualifying quiz submission creates a certificate. Renewal resets progress.

Retain required certificate evidence before Renew. A certificate is course completion, not policy approval or a technical control test.

Where to start

Training → trainer/Admin → Role Assignments / Reports / View All Users

Admin or Training Admin reads/exports these views. Account Admin alone owns assignment writes in User Management.

Before you begin

Identify whether the question concerns active assignments, optional exploration, learner status or all certificates.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose the relevant view

    Trainer landing offers Role Assignment → Manage Roles, Reports → View Reports and Course Management → Manage Courses. These open assignment reference, aggregate reporting and active-user progress, not a course editor or assignment-write grant. In Reports, View All Users, Export CSV and Print Report are separate read/output controls.

  2. Read assignments as pairs

    Each active user/active assigned role is one assignment. A learner assigned two roles contributes two to the report denominator. Optional courses are excluded from assigned-only completion.

  3. Calculate the example

    For two active users, the first assigned two roles with one completed and the second assigned one with none completed: coverage = 2/2 = 100%; assignment completion = 1/3 = 33.33%, not 1/2 users = 50%.

  4. Check user-detail semantics

    Completed can include optional courses while assigned In Progress/status uses the assigned population. Compliant means the nonempty assigned learning set is complete; it is not regulatory compliance.

    Learner My Progress — complete history and denominator guide

  5. Read certificate cards separately

    Global certificate totals, valid/expired/within-30-days and last-ten completions are not the active-assignment denominator. Role presentation bands ≥80/≥50 are visual categories, not legal thresholds.

  6. Export only the offered scope

    Export CSV downloads the seven fields listed below; Print Report opens current HTML/browser output separately. No learner quiz-score ledger, all-answers export or complete backup is implied.

    Check format and sharing scope

  7. Inspect and protect the output

    Check population, identities, rows and time before retention/sharing. Keep learner email/activity/certificate data limited to authorised recipients. Use the Account Admin editor for any actual assignment correction.

    Correct the assignment through Account Admin

Training CSV columns
ColumnMeaning / boundary
UsernameAccount identity; not a learner-course row ID.
EmailPrivate account contact.
Assigned RolesCurrent active role selection, not module permissions.
CompletedCompleted assigned courses for this export.
In ProgressAssigned-course progress count; optional learning differs by view.
Valid CertificatesCertificate validity population; not identical to assigned completion.
Last ActivityLatest observed learning activity; optional work can contribute.

Check the result

A correctly interpreted assigned-learning report/export with explicit population.

Current limits and common mistakes

Optional exploration can affect user totals and last activity. Compare like-for-like views instead of averaging unrelated percentages.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Diagrams and background

Review completion

Use the training dashboard to identify completed and outstanding work and inspect the relevant course or certificate record.

Export evidence

Use the available CSV or HTML reports and review their scope before sharing. Training completion does not automatically update every external compliance assessment.

Ask amara -- Your GRC Co-pilot

Ask a concrete question or select a supported domain and capability. Check its source, scope and status, then use the owning module for an actual saved change or decision.

Typed Send, capability automatic submission and confirmed scan execution

Ask helps locate and interpret permitted evidence. It does not turn advice into an approved assessment, completed treatment or certificate.

Where to start

Ask amara → chat

Use your permitted application session and enabled capabilities. The answer's scope follows its governed sources and optional connectors.

Before you begin

Use a specific question and know whether you want a record fact, policy source or analysis.

Fields and decisions

ControlRequiredness / actionActual boundary
Message / SendNonempty requestUse concrete record/topic and scope. Raw streaming UI does not enforce the retained form’s1000-character maximum.
Select a domain → capabilityAvailable registry entryAvailability controls which capabilities appear. Internal module-role flags are not uniformly used to filter this catalogue; selection is not proof of module-role parity.
Complete queryCapability-specific required argumentsIssue key, board/page ID, search term, IAM user name or Registered Asset, as offered.
Provider choiceBase mode only when offeredOpenAI initially selected; Local alternative. Pro uses automatic routing, not a per-query force-local toggle.
Confirm actionFor selected active scan capabilitiesQueues real work after guarded confirmation; passive capabilities have different behavior.
Clear chat memoryCurrent-tab resetDoes not erase provider thread, server records, audit, corpus or other tabs.

Step-by-step

  1. Open the correct account and chat

    Use Ask amara under the intended authenticated session. Anonymous demo streaming is separate from the logged-in workflow. Do not submit private material there or infer a private-corpus boundary from the demo label.

  2. State a concrete task

    Name the module, record or topic, intended population and date/scope. A Context setup: message gives conversational context, not durable organisation settings or new account rights.

  3. Choose a supported capability where useful

    Select a domain and an offered query. Availability affects the registry; a disappeared option may mean an unavailable backing service rather than missing data. A visible internal-data choice does not prove module-role filtering.

  4. Complete required arguments

    Use Complete query for the exact issue/page/board/user or registered Asset required. Compile query submits the completed request automatically; do not press Send again. A valid-looking ID does not itself establish access.

  5. Read the submitted response

    Inspect route/source/status and the returned result. Unsupported data-shaped questions must not be read as live evidence; an interrupted stream is not a finished verified answer.

  6. Open and verify the source

    Compare underlying identity, date, scope and unknown values. A data answer does not create a record; a source quotation does not approve a policy.

  7. Keep follow-up context bounded

    Current-tab memory retains a limited recent conversation. The server trims accepted history further. Repeat the exact record/scope when needed rather than assuming unlimited context.

  8. Clear current-tab memory deliberately

    Clear chat memory removes this tab’s saved/displayed conversation and reloads. It does not reset every provider/session/audit layer or retract sent information.

  9. Use owning module controls for decisions

    Open the specific Asset, CIA, Risk, Supplier, VA, Document or assessment to save, approve or verify. A conversational recommendation is not that action.

Submit a typed request or a selected capability

  1. Typed message

    Enter a specific question, for example “how many risks?”, then press Send once. Read whether the result is a supported data answer, curated guidance, a quotation or generated analysis.

  2. Capability selection

    Choose the domain and capability. A choice with no required arguments submits immediately. If Complete query opens, fill every required field and use Compile query; that submits the completed request. Cancel closes it without sending.

  3. Consequential scan

    For an offered active scan, choose the Registered Asset, read the confirmation and confirm only an authorised target. Successful confirmation submits the request; do not press Send again. Follow the returned Scan ID to inspect the job, not just the chat text.

The result is an answer or, for a structured scan, a queued job. Use the owning record to change, approve or verify business work.

Check the result

A supported answer whose source and scope can be checked.

Current limits and common mistakes

History has no bound history collection; Settings has no form/save persistence logic. Their presence is not working account-wide chat history or preferences. Opening the chat can initialize a provider thread; even page entry is not guaranteed provider-free.

Generated explanations can be inaccurate. Ask History and Settings pages do not currently provide a complete saved-history/settings workflow. Do not promise durable chat history or unrestricted module actions.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background
Ask amara Pro reference pipeline; Base, grounded and public routes differ

Ask amara Pro reference pipeline, not the universal Ask route. Stages depend on configuration and route; privacy checks apply to external Pro processing and audit recording is best-effort. Base, grounded and public paths differ.

How to use Ask amara

Click Ask amara under Resources in the left sidebar. Use the rendered message field and Send control. Type your question in natural language (English or German) and press Enter or click the arrow.

Review important answers against their cited sources before making decisions. Generated analysis can contain errors.

Examples of questions to scope

These examples illustrate the question type. Actual supported matching, permissions and source population must be checked; unavailable or unsupported is not a zero result.

Try this queryWhat you'll getRoute
"How many assets do we have?"Supported stored-record count; inspect the handler’s populationGoverned data query
"Show me our top risks"Ranked risk records where that query is availableGoverned data query
"Show recent supplier reviews"Recent stored supplier approval/review log entries; not an overdue-review-date listGoverned data query
"What does our access control policy say about remote work?"Relevant passages from loaded documentation to reviewDocument retrieval
"NIS2 assessment summary"Stored legacy and Comprehensive NIS2 totals/latest records and legacy remediation counts; not a current-tenant largest-gap rankingGoverned data query
"Draft a risk treatment plan for unpatched servers"A draft for responsible human reviewGrounded analysis

Why Ask amara is different from a general-purpose chat tool

For a supported data request, Ask amara uses a defined query service. Query-handler access checks differ; selector visibility is not proof of uniform per-module RBAC. Policy questions can retrieve loaded ISP or corpus passages; corpus ingestion is not policy approval. Responses must remain reviewable; they are not an automatic decision or approval.

Data boundary

Local processing and configured external routes have different boundaries. Review the active deployment and each enabled integration before sending sensitive material; the platform records relevant audit evidence for governed actions.

Scoped
Check handler access
Grounded
Supported routes
Audited
Governed actions
Review
Important decisions

How the AI decides what to do with your question

Ask amara selects an appropriate governed route for supported questions:

1

Governed data route

Supported counts, lookups and status requests use defined data handlers with their own scope and access checks. The system does not turn a free-text question into unrestricted database access.

2

Document retrieval

Policy and compliance questions can use loaded source documents. Treat returned material as supporting information and confirm the source before relying on it.

3

Grounded analysis

Where enabled, analysis and drafting use the configured intelligence route with the applicable policy, privacy and audit controls. Drafts remain for human review.

MCP Architecture Overview

Full architecture: configured integrations → amara GRC → Ask amara controls → governed processing → approved external clients

What you can ask

Question typeExampleRouted to
Counts"How many active assets?"Grounded data handler
Specific data"Show our top 5 critical risks"Severity-filtered ranked risk records via the governed data handler
Policy questions"What does our access control policy say?"Source retrieval
Analysis of supplied findings"Help interpret these supplied compliance findings: [findings and scope]"Draft interpretation of user-supplied findings, where enabled; not discovery of current gaps
Drafting"Draft a risk treatment plan"Grounded drafting, for review
Complex reasoning"Compare our NIS2 posture to last quarter"Configured route, subject to policy
Check the configured boundary

Processing and egress depend on the active deployment and enabled integrations. Check the applicable configuration and governance controls before using sensitive information.

Query Routing

Ask amara does not treat every message as an open-ended request. The grounding classifier distinguishes supported data, ISP, explicit provider, general analysis and unsupported intents; access and privacy handling depend on the actual route.

Separate grounded data/provider, source and Base/Pro analysis possibilities, with conditional Pro external shielding

These are possibilities, not successive stages. Base can use OpenAI or Local; AI_MODE=openai/both can override Local selection. Pro’s route/fallback and external Shield differ. Inspect actual provider and egress—no force-local or universal shielding promise.

Where to start

Ask amara → query and visible source/processing information

Use your permitted application session and enabled capabilities. The answer's scope follows its governed sources and optional connectors.

Before you begin

Separate data lookup, document retrieval, analysis and optional external information.

Fields and decisions

ControlRequiredness / actionActual boundary
Explicit prefixProvider query routeA configured/authorized connector can access external account data.
Internal-data intentSupported direct dispatchCount/list/lookup/summary where implemented; not unrestricted SQL or all filters.
ISP section/topicSource retrievalExact section/appendix or loaded topic passages; missing retrieval is not policy content.
Quick fact / general chat / analysisConfigured intelligence routeMay use the enabled provider policy; verify actual source and outcome.
Unsupported / failed / unconfirmedDistinct result statesNone establishes zero data, a completed scan or a passed privacy stage.

Step-by-step

  1. Identify the evidence question

    Decide whether you want a current record fact, policy passage, provider lookup or generated interpretation. State the intended source and scope.

  2. Use the supported entry

    Write a specific question or select a capability and supply its arguments. Prefix routes, data intents and ISP retrieval are considered before general intelligence.

  3. Read what actually answered

    Inspect response source/route, returned references and displayed status. A planned route or capability name does not prove which provider/data service supplied the final answer.

  4. Separate raw evidence from interpretation

    Keep retrieved facts/quotes and the generated summary distinct. Verify each important assertion against its source; a source badge does not validate every sentence.

  5. Follow the source safely

    The module-index reader exposes its fixed cited At a Glance section, not arbitrary filesystem paths or the project’s operating history.

  6. Keep context and identity current

    History accepts bounded role/content context. A login-ownership freshness mismatch can return409/reload; it is not a new authorization grant.

  7. Handle missing service or unsupported intent

    Read the actual error/unavailable/clarification state. An unsupported AWS resource query or missing ISP topic must not turn into invented live records.

  8. Perform changes through the owning workflow

    Provider query output is not an Asset import, saved external reference, document version or approval. Open the appropriate explicit control when a real change is intended.

Tell a live result from guidance

  1. Ask for a current fact

    Use a supported explicit intent such as “how many risks?”. Check the returned population and source; a narrative about risk management is not a current count.

  2. Ask for policy text

    Name the section or topic. Compare the returned passage and cited location. Curated quick facts are fixed English guidance; a citation string does not mean the referenced file was opened.

  3. Check exact subsection scope

    Appendix A 1–4 and B 1–4 have specific mappings. A C/D subnumber can fall back to the whole appendix while its footer names the subnumber; verify the actual passage before attributing it to that subsection.

An Ask quotation does not create a DocumentVersion, ingest a file, or approve an ISP section. Keep those actions in their owning workflows.

Check the result

An answer with an identifiable evidence and processing context.

Current limits and common mistakes

A routing diagram describes possible configured paths, not a guarantee that every request uses one fixed provider or is free of error.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

Supported routes

RoutePurposeBoundaryBest for
DataSupported, defined product queriesProduct permissionsCounts, records and status
DocumentsLoaded source materialDocument access and source reviewPolicy and procedure questions
Local intelligenceDeployment-managed processingLocal deployment controlsAnalysis and drafting
Configured external routeOptional approved serviceActive configuration and policyWork that is explicitly enabled

Availability, response time and cost depend on the active deployment, role and configured route. The interface indicates when a supported route cannot be used.

How the router decides: a behind-the-scenes look

The grounding classifier first selects a supported data, source or general-chat route. Where Pro general-chat is enabled, its Smart Router separately chooses a configured local/mid/complex processing tier. Neither grants access merely from prompt wording.

Grounded data decision: "Is this a supported record request?"

For supported requests such as counts, lists and status, the router uses a defined data capability. It does not create arbitrary database queries, and the returned population depends on the individual handler and available records. Do not infer a universal module-permission check from the route label.

Example: "How many critical assets do we have?" can route to the relevant governed data capability when it is available to your role.

Grounded source decision: "Is this a supported policy request?"

For supported policy requests, the router can use loaded source material. The result should identify or link to its relevant source where possible; always review the underlying policy for a decision.

Example: "What does our access control policy say about remote work?" can return relevant source material that you can review in context.

General-chat processing: "This needs analysis"

Where enabled, the local intelligence route can help with analysis, drafting, comparison and structured work. Its output is a draft or supporting explanation, not a replacement for the responsible owner or required approvals.

Example: "Draft a risk treatment plan for our unpatched server vulnerability" can create a starting point that the Risk Owner must review and approve.

Configured external route

An external route is available only where an administrator has configured and approved it. Its use is subject to the deployment's privacy, egress, consent and audit controls. Do not assume an external route is enabled or suitable for sensitive data.

How to write better queries

The routing system is designed to work with natural language, but a few tips help you get faster, better answers:

  • For data questions, be specific: "How many active assets do we have?" requests the status-only Asset count; it does not also filter Hardware.
  • For policy questions, name the document: "What does our Access Control Policy say about remote work?" helps identify the material you need to review.
  • For analysis, give context: Explain the decision, scope and time period, then review the draft and its sources.
Check your active route

Before relying on an answer, check whether it is based on governed data, documentation, a configured analysis route or an external connector. Those routes have different evidence and privacy boundaries.

Supported Ask amara Questions

Ask amara provides defined capabilities for authorised data and product information. The supported questions depend on the current implementation and your role.

Typed Send, capability automatic submission and confirmed scan execution

Ask helps locate and interpret permitted evidence. It does not turn advice into an approved assessment, completed treatment or certificate.

Where to start

Ask amara → a specific record question

Use your permitted application session and enabled capabilities. The answer's scope follows its governed sources and optional connectors.

Before you begin

Know the module and population the question should cover.

Fields and decisions

ControlRequiredness / actionActual boundary
Module / record identityState explicitlyUse the actual saved Asset, Supplier, Risk, Document, assessment or learner/course.
Population / status / timeOnly supported scopeA natural-language filter is not necessarily implemented. Inspect the returned population.
Count / list / lookup / summarySupported projectionA zero result differs from Unsupported, unavailable or denied.
Source/footer/linkEvidence checkNot a universal proof of uniform RBAC or every generated sentence.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose a supported fact question

    Ask for a count, list, lookup or status of a specified module record. Add an identifying name and any important status/scope.

  2. Read whether the request was supported

    A route/permission failure, missing integration or unsupported query differs from an actual zero result.

  3. Check returned record links

    Open the underlying record when the number or status affects a decision.

  4. Follow up with the same scope

    Clarify which population or record you mean. Do not assume a broad total includes every tenant, permission scope or historical status.

  5. Use the selector for exact supported intent

    Choose the offered amara data domain/capability where available. Do not infer arbitrary SQL, all filters or create/update/delete from a list of example questions.

  6. Distinguish query scope from display permission

    Internal query handlers differ. A visible selector and a role-aware label do not prove uniform per-module or tenant enforcement for every query; inspect the service’s returned scope.

  7. Check learner and document references

    A Training summary is not quiz submission or a certificate. A Document answer is not a selected-version export or a newly saved DocumentVersion.

  8. Keep the decision outside the query

    Carry reviewed facts and their source identity into the owning assessment or business process explicitly; asking a follow-up does not approve or mutate records.

Reconcile a query with its source module

  1. Keep the population fixed

    Record the selected capability, status/category and time. A list can be capped; do not use its visible row count as the total unless the output says it is complete.

  2. Check the meaning of severity

    Name the exact producer: Risk Summary uses Critical ≥16, High ≥9, Medium ≥4; Complete Risk List uses Critical ≥12, High ≥8, Medium ≥4. For score 8, Summary is Medium, Complete Risk List High, and canonical 4×4 Risk Management Medium. Score 9 is High in both Ask producers. Open the Risk record for the saved decision.

  3. Check stored versus derived values

    Ask Asset criticality reads the stored field, not necessarily the current approved CIA-derived rating. Training counts use assigned learner/course pairs. Document “pending approval” queries concern review-due dates, not an approval queue.

Reading through Ask does not save a relationship or inherit every module’s UI role filter. The current capability catalogue is not filtered by its supplied module-role flags; have the administrator confirm the approved Ask access model.

Capability fields and their exact purpose
Selected capabilityRequired inputAfter Compile query
Search IAM userIAM user nameSubmits a provider lookup, not local account editing.
Find ticket by keyJira issue keySubmits an issue lookup; no ticket creation.
Show board issuesBoard IDCurrent adapter can fail on its status argument; failure is not zero issues.
Search all spacesSearch termProvider search, limit 20; not a stored local link.
Show page childrenPage IDProvider child-page lookup.
DNS / WHOIS-labelled / nmap / TLS / Nikto / NSERegistered AssetSelected registered target; active choices add confirmation. The WHOIS-labelled Ask choice currently runs standard DNS.

Empty required values block submission. Text fields do not validate every provider key/number format in the browser; check resolution and returned error. Cancel submits nothing.

Find a supported question

Three query examples distinguish returned rows, assignment pairs and document review status

Worked examples, not live results: rows are not totals, assignments are not people, and review dates are not approvals.

Choose a domain below. Selector entries submit automatically; typed examples require Send once. Use the input shown here rather than adding unsupported date, tenant or category filters. These queries read stored evidence; they do not approve, import, edit or delete records.

Risk questions — selection, population and limits
Choose or typeInputWhat comes back
How many risks?
how many risks?
No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Count of saved Risks; optional status. Accepted means distinct Risks with any joined formal acceptance record, not current approval or merely Accepted status. Acceptance-record and overdue-record counts are separate; overdue does not remove a Risk. The all-status breakdown has a broader population than a filtered count.
Top 5 risks
top 5 risks
No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Highest saved scores first, default five. Typed top N can set the limit; optional severity ranges: Low 1–3, Medium 4–8, High 9–15, Critical 16–25. Shows ID, name (25-character excerpt), score, category and status; not a complete register. Missing scores can display zero, not a measured Low risk.
Typed: cybersecurity risks (also IT/operational/compliance/strategic/financial; exact stored category, no free category dialog)No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Case-insensitive exact stored category, descending score, all matches. Shows ID, name, score and status. The formatter reads a different category-heading key, so the heading can be blank.
Risk overview / summary
risk overview
No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.All saved Risks: status/severity breakdown, average/highest score and treatment rate. Untreated means blank or missing mitigation strategy, not absence of a Treatment record. Treatment rate = (all − untreated) / all × 100, one decimal; no records displays 0. Summary bands start at 4/9/16; missing score is placed in Low via zero fallback. Average excludes SQL-null scores; no average displays zero.
Untreated risks
untreated risks
No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Blank or missing mitigation strategy; highest scores first, default ten displayed. Total untreated can exceed those rows. Does not inspect whether a separate Treatment exists or is complete.
Show open risks
show open risks
Show accepted risks
show accepted risks
No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.All matches, score descending then ID; names shortened to 25 characters. Accepted uses formal records with workflow status and overdue review evidence kept separate; it is not necessarily the current Accepted-status population.

Open risk instructions to change, approve, export or verify the source. Querying does none of those actions.

Service reference — parameters and result fields, not extra UI controls

For technical reconciliation only. These are method parameters/defaults and known returned fields (outer and populated nested groups separated by /). Internal filter enums and resource-type values are not result field names. A service signature is not a customer form: use only the selector inputs or typed patterns documented above. Failure uses success=false and error, with licence/permission fields where documented; exceptions and unavailable/unsupported feedback mean no sourced result, not a verified zero. Provider-defined additional fields can vary. A full returned object can contain more than the displayed excerpt.

ServiceBackend parameters/defaultsResult fields
risk:get_risk_countstatus: str='all'success, count, acceptance_scope, status_filter, status_label, total_all, breakdown, message / record_count, review_overdue_records
risk:get_top_riskslimit: int=5, severity: str=Nonesuccess, count, risks, severity_filter, message / id, name, risk_score, likelihood, impact, category, status
risk:get_risks_by_categorycategory: strsuccess, count, category, risks, message / id, name, risk_score, status
risk:get_risk_summaryNonecritical, high, medium, low / success, total_risks, by_status, by_category, by_severity, statistics, untreated_count, message / average_score, highest_score, treatment_rate
risk:get_untreated_riskslimit: int=10success, count, total_untreated, risks, message / id, name, risk_score, category, status
risk:get_risks_by_statusstatus: strsuccess, count, acceptance_scope, status_filter, total_with_status, risks, message / id, name, risk_score, category, workflow_status / record_count, review_overdue_records
Asset questions — selection, population and limits
Choose or typeInputWhat comes back
How many assets?
how many assets?
No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.All Assets or case-insensitive exact status; status breakdown covers all Assets. Typed status parsing is narrow: inactive contains active and can be interpreted as active. Use the module list to verify that filter.
Hardware assets
hardware assets
No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Case-insensitive exact category, alphabetical, first 20 with a separate total. Shows name, status and stored criticality. Hardware/Software/Data/Service/Facility are recognized typed categories.
Critical assets
critical assets
No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Case-insensitive stored criticality, alphabetical, first 20 with total. Shows name, category and status. This is not recomputation from the latest approved CIA.
Asset summary
asset summary
No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.All Asset totals and stored status/category/criticality buckets, plus missing-owner count. Null or empty owner counts as missing; whitespace is not normalized into missing.
Assets without owner
assets without owner
No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Null or empty owner; alphabetical, default 20 displayed with total. Shows name, category and stored criticality. A blank-looking whitespace value can be excluded.
Typed: show retired assets (active/maintenance/inactive supported with the parsing qualification above)No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Case-insensitive exact status; alphabetical, first 20 with total. Shows name, category and stored criticality. Typed active/retired/maintenance/inactive matching is order-sensitive; verify inactive in the module.

Open asset instructions to change, approve, export or verify the source. Querying does none of those actions.

Service reference — parameters and result fields, not extra UI controls

For technical reconciliation only. These are method parameters/defaults and known returned fields (outer and populated nested groups separated by /). Internal filter enums and resource-type values are not result field names. A service signature is not a customer form: use only the selector inputs or typed patterns documented above. Failure uses success=false and error, with licence/permission fields where documented; exceptions and unavailable/unsupported feedback mean no sourced result, not a verified zero. Provider-defined additional fields can vary. A full returned object can contain more than the displayed excerpt.

ServiceBackend parameters/defaultsResult fields
asset:get_asset_countstatus: str='all'success, count, status_filter, breakdown, message
asset:get_assets_by_categorycategory: strsuccess, count, total, category, assets, message / name, status, criticality, owner
asset:get_assets_by_criticalitycriticality: strsuccess, count, total, criticality, assets, message / name, category, status, owner
asset:get_asset_summaryNonesuccess, total_assets, by_status, by_category, by_criticality, active_count, without_owner, critical_count, message
asset:get_assets_without_ownerlimit: int=20success, count, total_without_owner, assets, message / name, category, criticality, status
asset:get_assets_by_statusstatus: strsuccess, count, total, status, assets, message / name, category, criticality, owner
Supplier questions — selection, population and limits
Choose or typeInputWhat comes back
How many suppliers?
how many suppliers?
No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.All Suppliers or exact case-insensitive stored status; breakdown covers all records. Typed approved/rejected/in review/draft counts are supported; these labels need to match stored values.
Typed: critical suppliers (also high/medium/low)No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Case-insensitive stored criticality; alphabetical, first 20 with total. Shows name, category and criticality, not independent assurance or contract risk recalculation.
Typed: suppliers by criticalityNo required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.All stored criticality buckets including unknown; up to five sample Suppliers per bucket returned, only three displayed. Samples are not the whole bucket.
Typed: recent supplier reviews / supplier review status (ten entries)No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Newest Supplier approval-log entries, default ten. Shows Supplier, phase, action, reviewer, timestamp and optional comments. Historical entries do not prove the present cycle remains approved.
Typed: supplier risk overviewNo required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.All status/criticality counts, high-or-critical count and non-approved stored-status count; up to eight high/critical samples. SQL non-approved excludes null status, while buckets can label null unknown.
Typed: suppliers missing evidenceNo required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Review-log/status proxy, not an explicit missing-document flag or assurance verdict. Counts distinct logged Suppliers and gaps; returns at most 20 gap rows, displays ten with reason/status/phase.
Supplier summary
supplier summary
No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.All Suppliers, category/status/criticality breakdowns and approved/critical counts. These use stored fields, not a fresh assurance or phase decision.
Typed: hardware suppliers (also software/IT/cloud/service/consulting)No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Case-insensitive exact category; alphabetical, first 20 with total. Typed IT/cloud/service/consulting/hardware/software terms are not category aliases: a stored Services or Consultancy value need not match Service or Consulting.
Approved suppliers
approved suppliers
Draft suppliers
suppliers with draft status
No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Case-insensitive exact status; alphabetical, first 20 with total. Approved/rejected/draft/in review phrases are supported; query output does not change approval phase.

Open supplier instructions to change, approve, export or verify the source. Querying does none of those actions.

Service reference — parameters and result fields, not extra UI controls

For technical reconciliation only. These are method parameters/defaults and known returned fields (outer and populated nested groups separated by /). Internal filter enums and resource-type values are not result field names. A service signature is not a customer form: use only the selector inputs or typed patterns documented above. Failure uses success=false and error, with licence/permission fields where documented; exceptions and unavailable/unsupported feedback mean no sourced result, not a verified zero. Provider-defined additional fields can vary. A full returned object can contain more than the displayed excerpt.

ServiceBackend parameters/defaultsResult fields
supplier:get_supplier_countstatus: str='all'success, count, status_filter, breakdown, message
supplier:get_suppliers_by_criticalitycriticality: strsuccess, count, total, criticality, suppliers, message / name, category, criticality, status, services
supplier:get_supplier_criticality_summaryNonesuccess, total_suppliers, by_criticality, samples, message / name, category, status
supplier:get_recent_supplier_reviewslimit: int=10success, count, reviews, total_suppliers, message / supplier, phase, action, reviewed_by, timestamp, comments
supplier:get_supplier_risk_overviewNonesuccess, total_suppliers, by_status, by_criticality, high_or_critical, not_approved, sample_high_risk, message / name, category, criticality, status
supplier:get_supplier_evidence_statusNonesuccess, explicit_evidence_field, total_suppliers, with_review_logs, without_review_logs, proxy_gap_count, suppliers, message / name, status, approval_phase, reason
supplier:get_supplier_summaryNonesuccess, total_suppliers, by_status, by_category, by_criticality, approved_count, critical_count, message
supplier:get_suppliers_by_categorycategory: strsuccess, count, total, category, suppliers, message / name, criticality, status, services
supplier:get_suppliers_by_statusstatus: strsuccess, count, total, status, suppliers, message / name, category, criticality, services
Training questions — selection, population and limits
Choose or typeInputWhat comes back
How many training courses?
how many training courses?
No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Active database role catalogue when populated; static metadata fallback otherwise. Counts courses/roles, not enrolled people. Optional Specialist/Executive/Functional tier, with all-tier breakdown.
Specialist training courses
specialist training courses
No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.All courses in the selected Specialist/Executive/Functional tier from that same database-or-static catalogue; displays course names. No enrolment, quiz or certificate mutation.
Typed: show training rolesNo required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Active role catalogue and tier counts; displays up to eight role names per tier. Static fallback is possible. Not application access roles and not learner assignments.
Training summary
training summary
No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Catalogue/tier totals plus current assignment progress; returns ten course samples, displays five. Catalogue fallback and assigned learner population can differ.
Training progress overview
training progress
No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Current active-user/active-role assignment pairs, not unique people or exploratory courses. Completed, in-progress, not-started and completion rate; five recent completions. Certificate totals use their own broader population. No assignments means unavailable rate, not 0% failure.

Open training instructions to change, approve, export or verify the source. Querying does none of those actions.

Service reference — parameters and result fields, not extra UI controls

For technical reconciliation only. These are method parameters/defaults and known returned fields (outer and populated nested groups separated by /). Internal filter enums and resource-type values are not result field names. A service signature is not a customer form: use only the selector inputs or typed patterns documented above. Failure uses success=false and error, with licence/permission fields where documented; exceptions and unavailable/unsupported feedback mean no sourced result, not a verified zero. Provider-defined additional fields can vary. A full returned object can contain more than the displayed excerpt.

ServiceBackend parameters/defaultsResult fields
training:get_training_counttier: str='all'success, count, tier_filter, breakdown, catalog_source, message
training:get_training_by_tiertier: strsuccess, count, tier, courses, catalog_source, message
training:get_training_rolesNonesuccess, total_roles, by_tier, roles_by_tier, catalog_source, message / code, name
training:get_training_summaryNonesuccess, total_courses, by_tier, progress_stats, courses, catalog_source, message / assignment_count, completed, in_progress, not_started, completion_rate
training:get_training_progress_overviewNonesuccess, assignment_count, progress_scope, total_enrolled, completed, in_progress, not_started, assigned_users, unique_users, completion_rate, recent_completions, total_certificates, valid_certificates, expiring_soon, message, no_assignment_data / success, error, message, no_assignment_data, assignment_count, completed, in_progress, not_started, assigned_users, completion_rate, recent_completions
Document questions — selection, population and limits
Choose or typeInputWhat comes back
How many documents?
how many documents?
No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Templates only, created Documents only, or both; selector asks Documents only because its prompt says documents. Versions are not separate Documents. Typed template count selects templates; combining both words selects both.
Typed: policy templates (also ISO 27001/NIS2/procedure/form)No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.All exact case-insensitive category matches, alphabetical. Typed ISO 27001/NIS2/Policy/Procedure/Form terms are not arbitrary category filters. Shows name and description, not the generated document body.
Document summary
document summary
No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Template and created-Document totals plus template-category counts. Returns first 20 alphabetical templates, displays five. Not selected DocumentVersions or an approval queue.
Recent documents
recent documents
No required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Newest created_at first. Selector fixes five; typed recent/latest/new document request fixes ten. Displays title (25 chars), template/creator (15 chars) and creation date—not the full body or last-edit time.
Typed: documents pending approvalNo required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.No stored approval-status field: returns review-cycle counts and due-soon/overdue items instead. Returns ten review items, displays five. pending_approval=0 here is not evidence that all Documents were approved.

Open document instructions to change, approve, export or verify the source. Querying does none of those actions.

Service reference — parameters and result fields, not extra UI controls

For technical reconciliation only. These are method parameters/defaults and known returned fields (outer and populated nested groups separated by /). Internal filter enums and resource-type values are not result field names. A service signature is not a customer form: use only the selector inputs or typed patterns documented above. Failure uses success=false and error, with licence/permission fields where documented; exceptions and unavailable/unsupported feedback mean no sourced result, not a verified zero. Provider-defined additional fields can vary. A full returned object can contain more than the displayed excerpt.

ServiceBackend parameters/defaultsResult fields
document:get_document_counttype: str='all'success, count, type_filter, breakdown, message / templates, documents
document:get_templates_by_categorycategory: strsuccess, count, category, templates, message / id, name, category, description
document:get_document_summaryNonesuccess, total_templates, total_documents, by_category, templates, message / id, name, category
document:get_recent_documentslimit: int=10success, count, documents, message / id, title, template, created_by, created_at
document:get_documents_pending_approvalNonecurrent, due_soon, overdue, unknown / success, total_documents, pending_approval, approval_status_supported, review_counts, review_items, message / title, review_status, message, next_review_date
Assessment questions — selection, population and limits
Choose or typeInputWhat comes back
Typed: ISO 27001 assessment summaryNo required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.All ISO records, draft/final/status counts and average entered maturity. Latest means newest created record, including drafts, with ID/organisation/status/maturity/date. Not the Reports completed-record selector.
Typed: NIS2 assessment summaryNo required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Legacy and comprehensive populations separately: totals/draft/final, latest created entity/score/status/date, legacy average and remediation open/completed. Not one combined compliance percentage.
Typed: BSI C5 assessment summaryNo required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.All C5 records, status counts and average entered maturity; newest created record with ID/organisation/status/maturity/date. Not legal certification or evidence every control was answered.
Typed: EU AI Act assessment summaryNo required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.All EU AI Act records, status counts and average entered maturity; newest created record with ID/organisation/status/maturity/date. Not the completed-only report chooser or an organisation-wide legal conclusion.
Typed: current compliance postureNo required dialog for these entries. Named typed filters are parsed, not universal form fields.Risk total/open/Accepted-status/score≥12; Supplier total/approved/high-or-critical; active Training roles; created Documents and NIS2-comprehensive/ISO/C5/EU counts. Not a single compliance score, CIA/Rapid inventory or formal acceptance evidence.

Open assessment instructions to change, approve, export or verify the source. Querying does none of those actions.

Service reference — parameters and result fields, not extra UI controls

For technical reconciliation only. These are method parameters/defaults and known returned fields (outer and populated nested groups separated by /). Internal filter enums and resource-type values are not result field names. A service signature is not a customer form: use only the selector inputs or typed patterns documented above. Failure uses success=false and error, with licence/permission fields where documented; exceptions and unavailable/unsupported feedback mean no sourced result, not a verified zero. Provider-defined additional fields can vary. A full returned object can contain more than the displayed excerpt.

ServiceBackend parameters/defaultsResult fields
assessment:get_iso27001_assessment_summaryNonesuccess, total, draft, final, by_status, average_maturity, latest, message / id, organization, status, maturity, date
assessment:get_nis2_assessment_summaryNonesuccess, legacy_total, legacy_draft, legacy_final, legacy_avg_score, comprehensive_total, comprehensive_draft, comprehensive_final, latest_legacy, latest_comprehensive, remediation, message / entity, score, level, date / entity, score, status, date / open, completed
assessment:get_c5_assessment_summaryNonesuccess, total, by_status, average_maturity, latest, message / id, organization, status, maturity, date
assessment:get_eu_ai_act_assessment_summaryNonesuccess, total, by_status, average_maturity, latest, message / id, organization, status, maturity, date
assessment:get_compliance_posture_summaryNonesuccess, risks, suppliers, training, documents, assessments, message / total, open, accepted, high_or_critical / total, approved, high_or_critical / active_roles / created / nis2_comprehensive, iso27001, c5, eu_ai_act
Policy / ISP — all offered selector questions

Select one of these 14 entries, or type its exact prompt and Send. Quotation, curated guidance and raw retrieval are different results; read the source type below. A quotation does not save or approve a policy. Missing retrieval, dependency failure or an empty eligible corpus is not evidence the organisation has no policy.

Offered choiceEquivalent typed promptSource and result boundary
ISP § 4.2 — Access Controlisp section 4.2Packaged section/appendix quotation; English/German file selected by language. Missing file/read is unavailable, not policy content.
ISP § 4.3 — Cryptographyisp section 4.3Packaged section/appendix quotation; English/German file selected by language. Missing file/read is unavailable, not policy content.
ISP Appendix A-1 — Password Standardsappendix a-1Packaged section/appendix quotation; English/German file selected by language. Missing file/read is unavailable, not policy content.
ISP Appendix A-2 — Encryption Standardsappendix a-2Packaged section/appendix quotation; English/German file selected by language. Missing file/read is unavailable, not policy content.
ISP Appendix B-1 — Incident Response Proceduresappendix b-1Packaged section/appendix quotation; English/German file selected by language. Missing file/read is unavailable, not policy content.
ISP Appendix B-3 — Backup and Recoveryappendix b-3Packaged section/appendix quotation; English/German file selected by language. Missing file/read is unavailable, not policy content.
What is our password policy?what is our password policy?Curated fixed English guidance with a citation label; not a fresh read of that cited file or your organisation’s approved policy.
Which encryption standard is approved?what encryption standard is approved according to the ISP?Curated fixed English guidance with a citation label; not a fresh read of that cited file or your organisation’s approved policy.
I found a USB stick. What should I do?I found a USB stick on the parking lot, what should I do?Curated fixed English guidance with a citation label; not a fresh read of that cited file or your organisation’s approved policy.
I clicked a suspicious link. What now?I clicked a suspicious link, what should I do?Curated fixed English guidance with a citation label; not a fresh read of that cited file or your organisation’s approved policy.
How should I report phishing?how should I report a phishing email?Curated fixed English guidance with a citation label; not a fresh read of that cited file or your organisation’s approved policy.
What is acceptable use of company assets?what is acceptable use of company assets?Up to three raw eligible ISP passages in the selected language; source/section citations, no generated summary. RAG must be enabled and loaded, with knowledge-base / ISP / language metadata; distance must be ≤0.7.
What is our data retention policy?what is our data retention policy?Up to three raw eligible ISP passages in the selected language; source/section citations, no generated summary. RAG must be enabled and loaded, with knowledge-base / ISP / language metadata; distance must be ≤0.7.
How do I report an incident?how do I report an incident?Up to three raw eligible ISP passages in the selected language; source/section citations, no generated summary. RAG must be enabled and loaded, with knowledge-base / ISP / language metadata; distance must be ≤0.7.

Open Policy Reference for the source; open RAG administration for approved ingestion. Ordinary knowledge-base upload does not automatically mark content as ISP. General RAG similarity scores and ISP distance are different measures; lower ISP distance is closer.

Retained complete-list services — not additional grounded Ask choices

Do not infer a current selector/button from a retained tool declaration. The following complete-list methods remain in source, with differing severity/sort rules; the current grounded selector/direct matcher does not establish them as offered commands. Use the owning module for a complete register/export.

ServiceMeaning and limitation
risk:list_all_risksRetained service, no current grounded selector/direct-match entry established. All rows, default score order; name/status alternatives. List bands start at 4/8/12; names shortened to 30 characters. Not an additional customer button.
asset:list_all_assetsRetained service, no current grounded selector/direct-match entry established. Service returns all rows; default stored criticality string descending, then name—not a numeric severity ranking. Name/category sorts exist in the service. Formatter displays only exact lowercase critical/high/medium/low buckets; missing, unknown and other-case values are omitted despite the all-row total. Names display at 30 characters. Use the owning Asset list/export for a complete register.
supplier:list_all_suppliersRetained service, no current grounded selector/direct-match entry established. Service returns all rows; default criticality string descending then name, with name/status service alternatives. Formatter displays only exact lowercase critical/high/medium/low buckets; missing, unknown and other-case values are omitted despite the all-row total. Names shortened to 30 characters. Use the owning Supplier list/export for a complete register.
Service reference — parameters and result fields, not extra UI controls

For technical reconciliation only. These are method parameters/defaults and known returned fields (outer and populated nested groups separated by /). Internal filter enums and resource-type values are not result field names. A service signature is not a customer form: use only the selector inputs or typed patterns documented above. Failure uses success=false and error, with licence/permission fields where documented; exceptions and unavailable/unsupported feedback mean no sourced result, not a verified zero. Provider-defined additional fields can vary. A full returned object can contain more than the displayed excerpt.

ServiceBackend parameters/defaultsResult fields
risk:list_all_riskssort_by: str='score'success, total, sort_by, risks, message / id, name, score, severity, status, category
asset:list_all_assetssort_by: str='criticality'success, total, sort_by, assets, message / id, name, category, criticality, status, owner
supplier:list_all_supplierssort_by: str='criticality'success, total, sort_by, suppliers, message / id, name, category, criticality, status
Worked example — rows, totals and decisions

Illustration, not a query performed here: if 25 Hardware Assets match, the category response can return 20 alphabetical rows and total 25. Do not report “20 Assets” as the full category count. Three active learners assigned two active roles each create six assignment pairs; four completed pairs means 66.7% assignment completion, not four completed people. If a document query says pending approval is unsupported, its overdue-review rows are reminders—not approval records.

Compare chart populations; retain the exact query, source, scope and time. Open the underlying record before a decision.

Check the result

A scoped record answer rather than an assumed global total.

Current limits and common mistakes

Supported functions use defined query services with differing access/scope checks. They do not imply uniform per-module enforcement, arbitrary database querying or write access.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

Start with a specific request

For example, ask for an asset count or the highest recorded risks. Check the source and scope of the answer, and use the relevant module to verify important records.

When a request is unavailable

An unsupported query should remain unavailable or request clarification. Do not treat generated text as evidence that a data export or external action was performed.

Privacy Shield & Data Sovereignty

For organisations with sensitive information, data handling must follow the active deployment, configured integrations and approved governance controls. amara supports local processing and controlled integrations, but neither is a substitute for your organisation's own data-protection review.

Illustrative organisational classification, not Privacy Shield sensitivity states

Illustrative organisational classification, not automatic Privacy Shield tiers or ISO mapping. Pro’s actual sensitivity levels are standard/elevated/high/critical.

Where to start

Ask amara → processing/source context; administrator → processing configuration

Use your permitted application session and enabled capabilities. The answer's scope follows its governed sources and optional connectors.

Before you begin

Use the organisation’s approved data boundary and only supply information permitted for the selected route.

Fields and decisions

ControlRequiredness / actionActual boundary
Base provider / Pro automatic routeDifferent processing pathsDo not assume identical privacy behavior across legacy/base/anonymous/Pro routes.
Privacy/filter stage statusRead actual outcomeChecking, pending, blocked, unconfirmed or failed is not Passed.
History / prompt / responseMultiple data layersRecognized history PII can be shielded with shared mapping; clearing tab memory does not retract provider content.
Actual provider / fallbackResult metadataLocal-only intent depends on configured routing, not a hidden input or badge.

Step-by-step

  1. Identify the active processing route

    Read the displayed local/external context and the deployment’s approved settings.

  2. Review the material you submit

    Limit personal, confidential and regulated data to the task and the approved processing policy.

  3. Inspect shielding and source information

    Where privacy controls are enabled, they process the request before the configured analysis route. A shield label is not a legal assurance for every possible data type.

  4. Check important output

    Review sources, scope and any privacy/failure warning. Human review remains necessary when relying on generated text.

  5. Escalate configuration uncertainty

    Use the administrator/implementation team for data-residency, retention and provider terms instead of inferring them from a help-page diagram.

  6. Interpret Pro’s actual shielding behavior

    The Pro path anonymizes recognized PII for external routing, can reassemble output and checks mapped raw values across prompt/system/history at egress. Recognition is not complete detection of every secret or personal fact.

  7. Read failure and fallback explicitly

    A privacy failure on the external shield path forces local fallback. That behavior does not establish that every base, legacy or public path uses the same processing.

  8. Do not turn stage labels into approval

    checked_no_pii does not prove the original request was non-sensitive or its external transfer authorized. An interrupted/error stream cannot be treated as verified compliance.

  9. Keep sent information and local memory separate

    Clear chat memory removes current-tab context, not provider-thread data, server/audit records or the RAG corpus. Follow the approved retention/data process for those layers.

  10. Distinguish audit metadata from conversation storage

    Current structured grounded/Pro audit stores prompt/query hash and length rather than raw prompt/response text, alongside user/session/route/status metadata. Browser text and provider conversation remain separate; Clear does not delete these records. This does not establish identical storage in every legacy or provider log.

Use the approved data boundary

  1. Before submission

    Confirm the deployment’s provider policy before entering sensitive material. The Base Local radio, Pro label or a matching High/Critical rule is not an unconditional local-only guarantee.

  2. Interpret the threshold

    Strict 0.3, Balanced 0.5 and Permissive 0.7 are minimum detector scores. Lower thresholds accept more possible matches and can produce more false positives; they are not percentages of data protection.

  3. Review the evidence

    Recognizers have language, validation and dependency limits. A missing library or recognizer can reduce coverage. Do not infer that checked_no_pii means no confidential information was present or transfer was authorised.

Do not upload sensitive material to the normal knowledge-base interface or rely on the public demo as a private workspace. Clear chat memory does not remove provider content or corpus chunks.

Check the result

A deliberate use of the permitted processing route.

Current limits and common mistakes

Privacy controls do not replace a data-processing agreement or guarantee that all confidential context is removed. Air-gapped operation and external connectors are different deployment choices.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

What does "data sovereignty" actually mean here?

Data sovereignty depends on the chosen deployment and configuration. Local processing can keep defined workloads within your environment; configured integrations and optional external routes have their own egress and access boundary. Review the relevant integration documentation, deployment settings and audit evidence before enabling or using them.

What "Privacy Shield" means

  1. Deployment boundary: Local processing is governed by your chosen environment and access controls.
  2. Protected data handling: Use only approved routes for personal or sensitive material, following the applicable policy and configuration.
  3. Configured external routes: Treat every enabled connector or external route as a separate data-flow decision.
  4. Audit evidence: Use the available audit trail and source information to review governed actions.

Privacy and legal review

amara does not determine your legal obligations. Whether you need a data-processing agreement, impact assessment, transfer assessment or other control depends on your deployment, enabled services, data categories and jurisdiction. Obtain the appropriate legal and privacy review.

Air-gapped deployment

An air-gapped deployment is a deliberate operational design. Its feasibility and maintenance requirements depend on the selected environment, update process and integrations. Do not enable a networked connector in an environment intended to remain isolated.

Compliance evidence is not certification

amara can help collect and review evidence, but an assessment or certification outcome depends on the scope, implementation and independent evaluation of your environment.

Ask amara processing options

Ask amara may offer local and externally configured processing routes, depending on the deployment and administrator settings. This page explains the governance distinction; it does not promise that a particular route is enabled or appropriate for every request.

Separate grounded data/provider, source and Base/Pro analysis possibilities, with conditional Pro external shielding

These are possibilities, not successive stages. Base can use OpenAI or Local; AI_MODE=openai/both can override Local selection. Pro’s route/fallback and external Shield differ. Inspect actual provider and egress—no force-local or universal shielding promise.

Where to start

Ask amara → available processing options; Admin → Ask amara Pro / System Settings

Use your permitted application session and enabled capabilities. The answer's scope follows its governed sources and optional connectors.

Before you begin

Check the options actually enabled for your account and deployment.

Fields and decisions

ControlRequiredness / actionActual boundary
Base modeProvider choice when enabledOpenAI initially selected; Local offered where configured.
Pro modeAutomatic routingNo rendered per-query force-local toggle. Grounded routes have first refusal.
History / SettingsNo offered persistence workflowScreens are not durable chat CRUD or functioning preference saves.
Warm-upActual model operationNot a harmless display refresh or every-provider readiness test.

Step-by-step

  1. Read the active mode

    Inspect the available UI and administrator-approved configuration rather than assuming Base or Pro always implies the same infrastructure.

  2. Choose the task

    Use supported record lookup or policy retrieval where it answers the question. Analysis and drafting may use a separately governed route.

  3. Inspect processing context

    Review the source/provider information displayed for the response and any fallback/failure message.

  4. Review generated advice

    Open source records and validate important instructions before acting. Mode selection does not grant record-write or approval permissions.

  5. Check the mode’s real controls

    Base mode can show OpenAI/Local choice when LLM is enabled. In Pro it is replaced by automatic-routing presentation/hidden input; do not document a per-query force-local switch there.

  6. Use administration for approved global changes

    Provider enabling, rules, privacy confidence and tier defaults belong to Ask amara Pro administration, not the inactive learner Settings form.

  7. Inspect fallback rather than assuming success

    Read actual/planned provider, source and failed dispatch where recorded. Warm-up can invoke a model; do not use it merely to browse settings or resolve every failure by activating another provider.

Choose a mode without assuming its provider

  1. Inspect available controls

    Base can show OpenAI/Local radios; Pro shows automatic routing. Check the actual response provider and deployment policy, not only the selected radio.

  2. Understand the deployment override

    AI_MODE configured as openai or both can choose the normal OpenAI path even with the Base Local radio. Ask the operator to establish the required processing boundary before submitting private text.

  3. Change global policy in Admin

    Use the dedicated provider/rule/tier controls for approved global changes. Ordinary Ask Settings has no functioning preference-save workflow; a chat option is not a global policy save.

Local tier defaults, enabled providers and fallback behavior are separate settings. Warm-up and healthy Admin status checks can execute models.

Check the result

A response processed under the selected deployment’s available configuration.

Current limits and common mistakes

No universal cost, provider, data-residency or accuracy promise is made by the mode name alone.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

Choose the route deliberately

Local processing may be appropriate where your environment and operating model require it. It still needs normal access control, patching, logging and operational governance.

Configured external processing is optional and available only when your administrator enables it. Before using it, assess the destination, contractual and privacy controls, the data involved and the purpose of the request.

The practical advice: use the smallest approved route that meets the business need, and keep a human owner responsible for any decision, document or treatment plan.

Comparison

ConsiderationLocal processingConfigured external processing
AvailabilityDepends on deployment configurationRequires explicit configuration and approval
Data boundaryDefined by the local environmentDefined by the approved destination and route
Governance reviewAccess, patching, logging and local policyPrivacy, contract, egress and local policy
Use caseApproved local workloadsOnly approved workloads that need the route
Air-gap suitabilityDepends on the full deployment designNot suitable while the external route is enabled
Cost and response timeDeployment-specificAgreement and configuration-specific
Legal and privacy review

Do not rely on this guide as legal advice. Before enabling an external route, determine the appropriate contractual, privacy and security controls for your organisation.

MCP and Integration Queries

Ask amara can reach configured external systems as well as authorised local data. Each connector uses a strict prefix — type the prefix, then your question in natural language. The connector must be enabled and your role must permit the request.

Typed Send, capability automatic submission and confirmed scan execution

Typed queries use Send; selecting a capability submits automatically. A structured scan requires confirmation, then returns a job whose state and evidence you must inspect.

Where to start

Ask amara → enabled integration prefix

Use your permitted application session and enabled capabilities. The answer's scope follows its governed sources and optional connectors.

Before you begin

Have the connector, external project/page/resource and account scope clear.

Fields and decisions

ControlRequiredness / actionActual boundary
jira:Issue key / project / board IDSearch/read/project/board intents; create-ticket prose returns draft/missing-field guidance, not silent creation.
confluence:Page ID / search / spaceProvider lookup, not a local link or publication.
azure: / aws:Supported identity/resource intentExternal scope and provider permissions apply; not every cloud service/query is implemented.
security scan: / retained kali:Structured scan capability + Registered AssetTyped execution alone does not start a scan. Execution has separate Scanner/write/target guards.
Complete query / Confirm actionOffered capability controlsArguments and active-scan confirmation vary by selected capability.

Step-by-step

  1. Check connector and access first

    Integration query paths require the captured Admin/Integrations guard and an enabled backing service. Scanner additionally needs Scanner/write access; feature flags are not permissions.

  2. Choose the exact prefix or domain

    Use jira:, confluence:, azure: or aws: for the intended supported provider question. The current Security scan domain/capability is separate from free-text execution.

  3. Complete exact identifiers

    Supply the required issue key, board ID, page ID, IAM user or search term through Complete query. A typed raw IP or URL is not a substitute for the registered-Asset picker.

  4. Read supported Jira query output

    Search/read issue/project/board results under connector scope. A full-looking create-ticket sentence still returns drafting/missing-field guidance; create actual work in the owning module modal.

  5. Read Confluence without confusing it with a link

    Inspect the returned page identity/content. A chat search/read does not store a Risk/Document reference or publish an external page.

  6. Keep cloud intent within actual support

    Azure supports specified identity/resource/activity queries; AWS supports IAM/user/MFA/recent CloudTrail/EC2 intents. Unsupported S3, IAM-role or broad account requests are not zero-count evidence.

  7. Start scanner work only through the structured action

    Select an offered scanner capability, choose a registered authorized Asset, read the action and confirm where required. The server checks write/access/target and can queue a persisted Scan job.

  8. Check queue state and source

    Read the returned Scan ID/detail link. Queued is not Completed or clean. Typed status inquiry, passive capability and active scan execution are distinct operations.

  9. Reconcile a failure before retrying

    Preserve permission, unavailable, provider or unsupported feedback. A missing connector answer is not proof the external record is absent.

  10. Return to the owning module

    Use its explicit import/link/ticket/publish/review controls for changes. MCP is integration infrastructure, not an extra normal-user CRUD module.

Supply the exact query arguments

  1. Issue or page lookup

    For Find ticket, enter a Jira issue key such as ITSEC-42. For page children, enter Page ID. For Search all spaces, enter the search term. Empty fields block Compile query; a nonempty value still needs to resolve under provider access.

  2. User and board queries

    Search IAM user requires the IAM user name, not a local amara username. Show board issues requires Board ID; its current adapter has a status-argument mismatch and can fail, so do not treat that failure as an empty board.

  3. Confluence space search

    Search ISC space uses the fixed ISC space and literal text “isc space”, limited to 20 results. This is a text search, not all pages in that space. Page/space inventory and owning-record linking are separate actions.

  4. Scan lookup versus execution

    Passive DNS and active nmap/TLS/Nikto/NSE capabilities require the registered-Asset picker. The Ask option labelled WHOIS currently maps to a standard DNS scan, not WHOIS execution. After Compile query and any active-scan confirmation, the request submits automatically. The registered path returns a persisted Scan job/status, not a legacy Kali formatter result; use the Scan ID for actual tool/results.

Jira, Confluence, Azure and AWS reads do not create local links or imported Assets. Use the Integration guides for deliberate writes.

Exact registered scan choices and presets
Ask choiceActual scan / presetResult to inspect
DNS lookupdns / standardPersisted Scan ID and queue/state.
WHOIS lookup labeldns / standardCurrently DNS, not WHOIS execution.
Nmap port scannmap / standardRegistered Scanner run and findings.
TLS / SSL checktestssl / https-443Registered TLS run on its selected target.
Web app scannikto / https-443Registered web-server check.
Vulnerability scanvuln / standardRegistered service/CVE observations, not automatic VA verification.

These six Ask choices differ from the nine-choice Scanner form and the two-choice VA discovery surface. Standalone legacy Kali tools are not extra rendered Ask actions.

Atlassian query catalogue

Use the selector for the named choice; type the example only for entries labelled typed-only. The five Jira and five Confluence selector choices share these eight service contracts. Compile query submits once; Cancel does not send. None of these reads creates Jira work, saves a local link or publishes a page.

Jira and Confluence — exact inputs and displayed results
Choice or typed entryInput/default scopeResult and limit
Show open tickets in ITSEC / Search for risk ticketsNo fields; default 20. ITSEC open search means status != Done; risk search means text contains risk in ITSEC, both priority/created descending.Key, summary (100-character excerpt), status, issue type and assignee. Displayed count is returned issues, not necessarily the provider total. Done exclusion is not every terminal Jira status. Typed supported search is a read, not Create Ticket.
Find ticket by keyRequired Jira issue key, e.g. ITSEC-42. Empty blocks Compile query; the server expects one letters-number key, not multiple keys or an arbitrary sentence.Key, summary, status, assignee, optional link and description excerpt up to 300 characters. Verify key/provider scope; missing/denied differs from an empty issue.
List all projectsNo fields; provider-accessible projects.Project key and name. Not access to every issue or permission to create work in each project.
Show board issues by board ID / typed: jira: show board issues board_id:42Required numeric Board ID. Current service passes a status argument unsupported by the adapter.Can fail rather than return issues. Retained formatter would show up to 20 keys/100-character summaries/statuses; that is not proof this adapter path works. Do not report failure as empty board or retry as creation; use the authorised Jira view/operator.
Find SoA page / Search ISC space / Search all spaces / Find data backup policyDefault 20 search results. SoA and backup use fixed ISC with soa/data backup policy; Search ISC uses literal isc space. All-spaces requires Search term and removes the ISC filter.Displays up to five pages with 105-character snippets. Not all pages in a space. Confirm returned Page ID/title/space; missing access or provider failure is not no policy.
Show page childrenRequired Page ID. Empty blocks Compile query; the typed compiled request needs a numeric ID that resolves under provider access.Page titles, optional links/IDs; up to 30 displayed children. Paged envelope can identify parent and requested offset; no universal paging control is offered here. Unreadable payload differs from no returned children. Not a descendant tree or content export.
Typed only: confluence: page 12345Numeric Page ID in typed request; no dedicated selector entry.Page content excerpt up to 500 characters. Not complete body, local DocumentVersion, stored link or publication.
Typed only: confluence: list spacesNo added fields; derived from first 50 accessible search pages.Space key/name, at most 30 displayed. No returned spaces describes that search scope, not all permissions/data. Not authoritative all-space inventory, permission audit or space creation.
Service reference — parameters and result fields, not extra UI controls

For technical reconciliation only. These are method parameters/defaults and known returned fields (outer and populated nested groups separated by /). Internal filter enums and resource-type values are not result field names. A service signature is not a customer form: use only the selector inputs or typed patterns documented above. Failure uses success=false and error, with licence/permission fields where documented; exceptions and unavailable/unsupported feedback mean no sourced result, not a verified zero. Provider-defined additional fields can vary. A full returned object can contain more than the displayed excerpt.

ServiceBackend parameters/defaultsResult fields
jira:jira_search_issuesjql: str, limit: int=20Provider-shaped result; see query row.
jira:jira_get_issueissue_key: strProvider-shaped result; see query row.
jira:jira_list_projectsNoneProvider-shaped result; see query row.
jira:jira_get_board_issuesboard_id: str, status: str=NoneProvider-shaped result; see query row.
confluence:confluence_searchquery: str, spaces_filter: str=None, limit: int=20Provider-shaped result; see query row.
confluence:confluence_get_childrenpage_id: strProvider-shaped result; see query row.
confluence:confluence_get_pagepage_id: strProvider-shaped result; see query row.
confluence:confluence_list_spacesNoneProvider-shaped result; see query row.
Typed search options — supported patterns, not arbitrary natural-language filters

Jira search defaults to ITSEC. A typed project:ABC overrides it with a letters-only project token. Open/unresolved/active/pending means status != Done; closed/done/resolved/completed means Done; in progress and to do/backlog have their named status mappings. Critical/blocker/urgent, high and low map provider priority predicates; medium has no dedicated predicate. “My tickets” uses Jira currentUser() under the connector identity, not necessarily the logged-in amara person. Unassigned maps empty assignee; bug/task/story map type. label:example uses the next nonspace token. Updated means the last seven days of updates; recent/latest/newest/last means created within seven days—not an arbitrary date window. Recognized text terms risk/remediation/treatment/supplier/evidence/security/nis2 are joined with OR. Example: jira: search project:ITSEC open risk tickets. Inspect returned scope; words not recognized by the matcher are not enforced filters.

Confluence typed search can use space:ISC or in ISC space; default is fixed ISC. confluence: search all spaces for backup removes that space restriction and searches backup, with limit 20. Without the search term that typed all-spaces form can search *, while the selector still requires a nonempty Search term. Bare confluence: requests the derived space list, not all page bodies. Prefer exact numeric page IDs for a page read or children; check resolved identity and scope.

Cross-module services retained in source — not offered Ask controls

These eight services are not in the current authenticated grounded selector/direct matcher. Some legacy/standalone infrastructure callers remain; that is not a new customer capability or permission grant. Inspect relationships through Asset connections and Supplier connections rather than inventing a typed command.

Source serviceScope, not an offered command
cross_module:get_suppliers_for_critical_assetsSuppliers related to stored criticality-filtered Assets; default critical. Aggregates by Supplier name, so duplicate names can merge. Displays only first three related Asset names, shortened to 20 characters, plus a more-count.
cross_module:get_assets_by_supplierFirst matching Supplier name and its linked Assets; absent Supplier can return zero.
cross_module:get_asset_supplier_summaryAll Asset/Supplier/relationship totals and stored critical-Asset link counts.
cross_module:get_suppliers_by_asset_typeSuppliers joined to exact case-insensitive Asset category.
cross_module:get_unlinked_assetsAssets without Supplier relationship, default 20 returned with total; formatter displays 15 names, shortened to 25 characters.
cross_module:get_unlinked_suppliersSuppliers without Asset relationship, default 20 returned with total; formatter displays 15 names, shortened to 25 characters.
cross_module:get_critical_supplier_critical_asset_pairsStored critical Supplier/Asset relationship pairs; not new assessments. Groups by Supplier name, so duplicate names can merge. Displays first three related Asset names, shortened to 20 characters, plus a more-count.
cross_module:get_dependency_concentrationDefault top ten Suppliers by linked-Asset count; top count / all relationship count, not all Assets. Displayed Supplier names are shortened to 20 characters.
Service reference — parameters and result fields, not extra UI controls

For technical reconciliation only. These are method parameters/defaults and known returned fields (outer and populated nested groups separated by /). Internal filter enums and resource-type values are not result field names. A service signature is not a customer form: use only the selector inputs or typed patterns documented above. Failure uses success=false and error, with licence/permission fields where documented; exceptions and unavailable/unsupported feedback mean no sourced result, not a verified zero. Provider-defined additional fields can vary. A full returned object can contain more than the displayed excerpt.

ServiceBackend parameters/defaultsResult fields
cross_module:get_suppliers_for_critical_assetscriticality: str='critical'success, count, asset_criticality_filter, suppliers, message / name, criticality, category, assets / name, criticality, type, relationship
cross_module:get_assets_by_suppliersupplier_name: strsuccess, count, supplier_name, supplier_criticality, assets, message / success, count, supplier_name, assets, message / name, type, criticality, status, relationship
cross_module:get_asset_supplier_summaryNonesuccess, total_assets, total_suppliers, total_relationships, assets_with_suppliers, assets_without_suppliers, suppliers_with_assets, suppliers_without_assets, critical_assets_with_suppliers, by_relationship_type, message
cross_module:get_suppliers_by_asset_typeasset_type: strsuccess, count, asset_type, suppliers, message / name, criticality, category, asset_count
cross_module:get_unlinked_assetslimit: int=20success, count, total_unlinked, assets, message / name, category, criticality, status, owner
cross_module:get_unlinked_supplierslimit: int=20success, count, total_unlinked, suppliers, message / name, category, criticality, status
cross_module:get_critical_supplier_critical_asset_pairsNonesuccess, supplier_count, total_pairs, pairs, message / name, category, critical_assets / name, category, relationship
cross_module:get_dependency_concentrationlimit: int=10success, count, suppliers, concentration_stats, message / total_relationships, top_supplier_assets, top_supplier_concentration_pct / name, criticality, category, asset_count, critical_asset_count
Worked query and handoff — one issue, no accidental duplicate
  1. Look up an existing issue

    Select Find ticket by key. Enter its real key, for example ITSEC-42; Compile query submits automatically. Do not press Send again.

  2. Check the result

    Verify returned key and provider access. The description can be a 300-character excerpt; open the approved Jira destination for full evidence. Failure is not a missing issue.

  3. Choose a separate owning action only if needed

    Create Jira Ticket writes external work from an eligible owning record. Confluence Link/Publish can stamp or replace remote content. Neither follows merely from a lookup.

  4. Reconcile uncertain writes before retry

    Check both external key/page ID and the local reference. Remote success can outlive local linking failure. Pending Review and VA verification are separate decisions, not another query.

Provider payload shape matters: missing raw data can produce “No results”, malformed JSON can display plain provider text, and an unrecognized JSON shape can be shown as a 600-character excerpt. None is a complete export or proof of absence. Source labels and backend response hints do not validate omitted fields.

For every Azure/AWS selector and typed-only option, use the Azure catalogue and the AWS catalogue. They distinguish Ask reads, saved Admin Sync and deliberate Asset import. For the six scan dialogs use the exact mapping above and the persisted Scan lifecycle.

Check the result

A scoped connector response whose external reference can be inspected.

Current limits and common mistakes

Missing access or an unavailable connector is not proof that the external record does not exist.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

What MCP means here

MCP (Model Context Protocol) is supporting integration infrastructure. It is not a separate everyday CRUD module. Use Ask amara or the relevant integration surface to make a permitted request; check the selected connector, returned source and account scope. A configured connection does not grant access to every external record or bypass review of a write.

Configured connector prefixes

PrefixSystemAvailabilityWhat it queries
jira:JiraEnabled connectorTickets, projects and issue details
confluence:ConfluenceEnabled connectorAvailable pages and content
security scan: / retained kali:Security ScannerEnabled service, Scanner/write permissionChoose the structured capability and registered Asset; typing execution text alone does not start a scan
azure:AzureEnabled connectorApproved identity and activity evidence
aws:AWSEnabled connectorApproved read-only cloud evidence
Prefix is strict

Put the supported connector prefix at the beginning of the request. If the connector or request is unavailable, follow the visible feedback rather than assuming that external data was retrieved.

Jira Examples

jira: show open tickets project:ABC

Uses the explicit letters-only project token ABC; project ABC also works. Without that override the matcher defaults to ITSEC. Plain in ABC is not an enforced project filter. Inspect returned issues and connector scope.

jira: get PROJECT-123

Returns available details of a specific issue, subject to connector configuration and permissions.

jira: list all projects

Shows all Jira projects your service account has access to.

Confluence Examples

confluence: find password policy

Searches page titles and content for "password policy". Returns matching pages with links.

Read a Confluence page by exact page ID

Use the supported typed request, for example confluence: page 12345, with the actual numeric page ID. The current selector offers search and page-children entries, not a read-page capability. A page read does not store a local link.

Search before selecting a page

Use the supported search capability with a precise term. Check the returned page identity and connector scope; do not assume every natural-language filter or space restriction is implemented.

Security Scanner via Ask amara

Registered Assets only

Do not enter raw IP addresses or hostnames into Ask amara. Use the Security Scanner module or Ask amara's registered-Asset picker, select an Asset that is already recorded and authorised for scanning, then choose an allowed scan type. Read the ownership notice before deliberately starting; the current form has no separate acknowledgement checkbox.

What the result means

A scan records technical observations for the selected Asset. It can support the software basket and a later VA re-verification, but a non-detection does not remove recorded software or automatically close a Vulnerability Assurance finding.

Azure Examples

azure: list all users

Returns supported Entra user evidence when permitted. Returned fields, licences and Graph permissions vary; absent sign-in evidence is not proof of no sign-in.

azure: show MFA status

Returns the supported MFA evidence where permissions/licensing allow it. A request failure or unavailable field must not be described as no MFA.

azure: list all groups

Returns the first page of group inventory, without expanding members. The phrase get groups and members also selects only this generic group inventory, not membership.

azure: members of group Security Team

Resolves the first substring-matching group from the returned group page, then its first page of direct members. Verify the resolved group name. This is not nested membership, all Graph/ARM operations or a complete RBAC inventory.

Tips for Better Results

  • Choose the project explicitly. jira: show high-priority open tickets project:ABC uses the letters-only project token ABC. Without project:ABC or project ABC, the default is ITSEC; plain in ABC does not select ABC.
  • Use the documented prefix for the intended connector and check the source shown in the response.
  • Check the exact operation. Health/readiness and a successful query differ. Health checks may contact providers; preserve permission, configuration and unavailable-operation errors rather than treating them as zero results.
  • Keep context explicit. State the relevant Risk or Asset record in a follow-up. Available context handling depends on the active route and session controls.

Reports and Evidence

Open the module relevant to your question and use its available report or export controls.

Report the recorded scope, not an imagined all-clear

Keep record identity, generation time, filters and underlying decisions with each output. Formats and snapshot behavior vary by module.

Where to start

The owning module → Reports / Export

Use the owning module's access. Reports can have narrower populations than the full application.

Before you begin

Define the question, record, time range and audience before choosing an output.

Controls and inputs

ControlUse it forImportant boundary
Owning record / selected assessmentIdentity, tenant, domains and answersReporting has no universal common population or date wizard.
Report typeUse actual module selectorISO Audit Evidence is disabled; Rapid Evidence Package is HTML, not ZIP.
Current projection / stored snapshotDifferent lifecycleVA saves a report run; many other HTML reports recompute current records.
HTML / CSV / PrintModule-specific controlsBrowser PDF printing is not a native server PDF export or pagination acceptance.
Generation / sharingEvidence output versus authorityDoes not approve records, close work or authorise disclosure.

Step-by-step

  1. Define the evidence question

    Identify the record, selected domains/categories, tenant or learner population, period and authorised audience. Choose the module that owns that evidence.

  2. Open the actual output entry

    Use its Reports, record Report/Export, VA Create report or Admin View Audit Snapshot. There is no universal report hub/type/date wizard.

  3. Choose a supported type and assessment

    Use the offered completed-assessment selector where present. UI selection and generator guards differ; Completed does not mean every answer was supplied or control approved.

  4. Read scores in their actual population

    Check evaluated, unassessed, Not Applicable and excluded counts; maturity availability; gap/plan status; and denominator. Unknown maturity is not zero.

  5. Check freshness and version behavior

    VA View retains saved inputs/generator/hash/time. Document export can select a stored version. Many Risk/Supplier/Asset/framework HTML reports read current records at request time.

  6. Use the offered output

    Choose Save as HTML, a native HTML/CSV attachment or Print Report as actually provided. Browser Save as PDF is separate from a server export.

  7. Inspect before retaining or sharing

    Check title, record identity, date, body, rows, missing data and evidence references. Existing print/reopen/coverage qualifications are not cleared by successful generation.

  8. Keep decisions beside the report

    Retain assessment approval context, risk/acceptance details, document version, change and verification evidence as appropriate. Report generation performs none of those decisions.

  9. Regenerate only where needed

    Create a new VA report for current work; reopening an old snapshot is not a new run. Reassessing an assessment can change later output for the same ID.

  10. Use separate recovery and distribution procedures

    Exports are selected evidence, not a universal backup/restore. No scheduled report, automatic email or whole-module evidence ZIP is established here.

Produce and retain a scoped report

  1. Select the source

    Open the intended completed assessment in its Reports selector, or the exact operational record/run/version. Confirm ID and selected scope before choosing the type.

  2. Read the body

    Check answers, gaps, maturity and denominator against the source. A Completed label or No gaps sentence is not evidence every selected control was answered or implemented.

  3. Save and reopen

    Use the offered HTML output, then reopen the file and inspect text, links and charts. Browser-generated HTML can need external scripts/styles; preserve the original source context and review print output separately.

  4. Retain the decisions

    Store the approved output with assessment identity/scope, generation time and underlying open work. Generating it does not approve the assessment or close remediation.

A VA saved run retains its input time; a fresh report of a current assessment can change after same-ID reassessment.

Check the result

A reviewed report for a defined purpose.

Current limits and common mistakes

Reports are projections of stored data; generating one does not approve records or create an immutable whole-application snapshot.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background
Examples of module reporting and evidence contexts

Reporting and export coverage varies by module; review completeness and permissions before sharing.

Choose a useful scope

Risk, assessment, training and scanner reports serve different purposes. Check the selected records, time period and the meaning of any score.

Review before sharing

Confirm completeness and the recipient's needs. This guide does not promise a separate universal reporting hub, a fixed report catalogue or automatic distribution.

Choosing a Report

Use the report available in the module whose evidence you need.

Report the recorded scope, not an imagined all-clear

Keep record identity, generation time, filters and underlying decisions with each output. Formats and snapshot behavior vary by module.

Where to start

Open the owning module → Reports

Use the owning module's access. Reports can have narrower populations than the full application.

Before you begin

Choose a report type because it answers the audience’s question.

Controls and inputs

ControlUse it forImportant boundary
Select an AssessmentOffered in Rapid/ISO/C5/EU reportsSelect the intended completed record in the UI; report handler guards are not identical.
CIA ReportSelected evaluationOne executive report, not a six-type framework selector or universal completed-only guard.
VA Create reportCurrent workspace snapshotNo type/scope selectors; requires report and write access.
Scanner scopeOne scan / Asset / Executive90-day rollups differ from one-run evidence; CSV contains scan rows, not finding/CVE rows.
Audit SnapshotAccount Admin aggregate HTMLCurrent bounded projections, not VA’s saved run or database backup.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose the owning evidence

    Use the module links in the catalogue below. A name such as Executive or Comprehensive is not proof of universal module coverage.

  2. Use the exact framework selector

    Rapid has six HTML types; ISO has five active types with Audit Evidence disabled; C5 and EU AI have four. Select the intended completed assessment rather than a similarly named one.

  3. Read CIA separately

    Open the selected evaluation’s Report for Asset/CIA ratings, approval context and measures. The report is not the CIA approval action and is not restricted by a universal completed-only guard.

  4. Distinguish NIS2 outputs

    Use Export Report for the selected comprehensive/owning context or Export Assessments for the combined list. Relevance result and retained legacy PDF path are different workflows.

  5. Use current operational reports

    Asset, Supplier and Risk HTML show their stated current records/relationships. Supplier phase approval is not independent assurance; Risk Accepted status alone is not a complete Acceptance record.

  6. Generate a VA snapshot deliberately

    Create report persists current workspace inputs, generator/version/hash and notice context. Later View/Save as HTML reuses that saved evidence; create anew for fresh work.

  7. Select exact document and learning output

    Document Export downloads the chosen stored sanitized HTML version. Training Admin CSV/HTML uses active users and assigned courses; certificates have separate browser printing.

  8. Choose scanner scope precisely

    Single-scan report describes one run. Asset/Executive 90-day rollups choose current per-Asset/type context; do not add repeat runs or parent/child totals as independent evidence.

  9. Check audit and policy boundaries

    Activity CSV is selected/capped. Admin Audit Snapshot is current aggregate HTML. Policy Reference has no universal report-generator family; an Ask answer is not a saved report run.

  10. Validate the output against the owner

    Inspect representative source records, exclusions, stale/missing bodies and open work. No report title or zero-gap wording certifies compliance or effective remediation.

Report and format catalogue

Module / sourceOperationMeaning and limitsProcedure
RapidCompleted UI selection: Comprehensive, Executive Summary, Technical Details, Gap Analysis, Remediation Plan, Evidence PackageHTML/print/save. Evidence Package aliases Technical HTML, not ZIP; same-ID reassessment changes later output.Open guide
ISO 27001 / SoACompleted selection: Comprehensive, Executive, Technical, Gap, Statement of ApplicabilityHTML. Audit Evidence is Coming Soon/Not Available. SoA save/report is not approval.Open guide
BSI C5Completed selection: Comprehensive, Executive, Technical, GapHTML. Loaded/default 2020 scope; no promised selectable edition or Additional tier.Open guide
EU AI ActCompleted selection: Comprehensive, Executive, Technical, GapHTML. Role/system relevance exclusions differ from N/A/unassessed; zero gaps is not legal certification.Open guide
NIS2Export Report (selected) / Export Assessments (combined)Standalone HTML. Relevance and legacy PDF paths are separate; current comprehensive does not universally offer native PDF.Open guide
CIASelected evaluation → ReportExecutive HTML/print: Asset, CIA ratings, approval context and measures. No six-type or universal completed-only chooser.Open guide
AssetsExport AssetsCurrent standalone HTML, Save as HTML/Print. Approved eligible CIA-derived criticality; unfinished latest CIA does not revive older completed rating.Open guide
SuppliersReports / Export Suppliers / selected Supplier ReportCurrent aggregate/all or selected HTML. Phase approval differs from assurance; no recorded contract-value total.Open guide
RiskReports → Generate ReportCurrent comprehensive Risk/Treatment/Acceptance HTML. Accepted status alone differs from complete Acceptance evidence.Open guide
Vulnerability AssuranceReports → Create report; later View / Save as HTMLOne current-workspace frozen snapshot with generator/hash/time. No scope/type selector; generation needs report+write roles.Open guide
Document DialogExport current or numbered stored versionNative sanitized .html attachment. No native DOCX/PDF; missing body warning must remain explicit.Open guide
Training AdminExport CSV / HTML; certificates separatelyActive-user/assigned-role basis; detail exploratory counts can differ. Print Certificate is browser print, not native PDF.Open guide
Scanner reportsSelected Scan / Asset 90-day / Executive 90-dayStandalone HTML/print. Current selected per-Asset/type context; retain report-language/rollup/metadata qualifications.Open guide
Scanner CSVHistory filters → Export CSVOne row per scan, not findings/CVEs. Check actual dates; invalid date text can be ignored.Open guide
Activity Log CSVActive / Archive / All + filtersUp to 10,000 ordered events; signed UTC browsing context is not an immutable dataset or backup.Open guide
Admin Assets / Audit SnapshotImport/Export Data → Export CSV / View Audit SnapshotAsset columns versus current bounded aggregate HTML. Neither is database backup/restore.Open guide
Policy Reference / AskSource reader / supported queryNo universal ISP report-generator family; chat answer is not ReportRun, DocumentVersion or approved export.Open guide

Choose a report for its actual body

  1. Rapid

    Executive summarises score/bands and recommendations; Technical shows answer detail and scored-only charts; Evidence Package is an alias of Technical HTML, not a distinct evidence archive. Gap Analysis and Comprehensive use different gap cut-offs.

  2. ISO and SoA

    Read numeric status/maturity even if empty gap prose says No gaps. SoA Version 1.0, Last Updated and blank sign-off rows are output boilerplate, not persisted approval or revision history.

  3. C5 and EU AI Act

    C 5 Compliance includes N/A in its numerator while Implementation does not. EU compliance excludes N/A from its denominator, with possible retained N/A maturity. Truncated evidence excerpts are not complete source export or legal certification.

  4. NIS2 and CIA

    NIS 2 comprehensive HTML and legacy 15-field PDF differ; the legacy PDF has retained label/body omissions. Confidence 0.95 can display 0.95%, not 95%. CIA ratings are ordinal and measure acceptance is not implemented-control effectiveness.

Use the owning assessment guide for exact calculation and saved scope. Snapshot/report chart labels can differ from canonical module metrics; review the chart guide before comparing totals.

Report body differences that affect interpretation
FamilyActual body boundary
Rapid: five unique bodies, six choicesEvidence Package aliases Technical. Technical score-complement donut is not record counts; scored heatmap caps 160 cells. Standalone Gap uses ≤0.5; Comprehensive detailed gaps use <0.6. Suggested timelines are not saved owners/deadlines.
ISO: five active bodiesEmpty gap prose can differ from numeric deficiencies; histograms use integer bins. SoA sign-off/version rows are boilerplate, not approval records. Audit Evidence is unavailable.
C5: four bodiesCompliance includes N/A; Implementation does not. Evidence/gap excerpts can be truncated; report and Gap screen use differing deficiency rules.
EU AI Act: four bodiesSelected, applicable and retained N/A-maturity populations differ. Generic no-gap/full-scope prose is not an organisation-wide legal conclusion.
NIS2: selected/all HTMLComprehensive 40-question scope differs from legacy fields. Fractional confidence is formatted as an unscaled percent; missing answers can display No. Combined record counts are not a new organisation score.
NIS2: legacy PDF15-field body, retained label mismatches and limited remediation sections; not equivalent to comprehensive HTML. Confirm native renderer support and the actual file before relying on it.
CIA: executive bodyOrdinal impact and accepted/all-measures ratio; missing chart values can fall back Low. Acceptance is not implementation or reduced CIA impact.

Check the result

A report suited to the question and the evidence available.

Current limits and common mistakes

A report type name is not a complete functional certification. Empty/unavailable sections must not be read as passed controls or absence of risk.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

Examples

An ISO assessment can provide SoA and gap information; Training provides progress evidence; Security Scanning provides scan and asset reports. The available formats differ.

Inspect the output

Review the data scope, missing information and conclusions before using the output for management or audit work.

Preparing Audit Evidence

Agree the required evidence with the responsible reviewer, then collect the relevant module records and available exports.

Keep the source, output and approval evidence together

Current projections, frozen snapshots and version bodies support reviewed evidence, not universal certification.

Where to start

Select the source records and their offered reports/exports

Use the owning module's access. Reports can have narrower populations than the full application.

Before you begin

Identify the audit question, scope, period and authorised audience.

Controls and inputs

ControlUse it forImportant boundary
Audit scopeQuestion, period, population and audienceAgree required evidence before collecting exports.
Source identityModule / record / version / generation time / filtersPreserve how each output was selected.
Approval and verificationUnderlying stored decisionsHTML generation or a closed external issue is not approval.
Evidence Package labelRapid’s single HTML outputNot an automatically complete cross-module ZIP.
Sharing approvalAuthorised recipient and confidentialityExport permission alone does not release external disclosure.

Step-by-step

  1. Collect the underlying decisions

    Include the relevant assessment responses, CIA/supplier phase history, risk/acceptance decisions, document versions and treatment/verification evidence.

  2. Label scope and dates

    Keep the originating module, record identity, report generation date and filters with each export.

  3. Include unresolved work

    Show missing answers, open gaps, unassessed maturity, unknown applicability and exceptions with their owners/review dates.

  4. Review the package

    Check that supporting documents and changed controls match the dates being assessed. Do not silently mix an old policy with a current status report.

  5. Share under the approved process

    Review access, confidential content and distribution approval before sharing the collected files.

  6. Separate saved from recomputed evidence

    Identify VA ReportRun snapshots and DocumentVersion bodies versus current framework/Risk/Supplier/Asset/Admin projections. Preserve the chosen output under the approved retention process when a historical baseline is needed.

  7. Include the lifecycle qualification

    Training scores are latest state, not every attempt; certificate renewal removes the previous certificate; NIS2 edits can remove open manual plans. A generation date does not recreate prior state.

  8. Reconcile provider evidence

    Keep Jira issue/status/approval and Confluence page/version/stamp references distinct from the local decision. A chat query or cloud sync does not universally attach an approved evidence relationship.

  9. Check the format and reopen limits

    Review browser printing and saved HTML separately from native downloads. Source support for a format is not proof of correct pagination, complete body coverage or acceptance in every viewer.

Build a small evidence index

  1. Create the index outside the application

    For each retained output record module, source ID, selected domains/filters, version/run, generation time, saved filename and outstanding decisions. This is a manual index, not an offered app form.

  2. Keep a concrete chain

    Retain the Risk report, its Treatment validation and Jira key/status/review; the selected DocumentVersion export; and a chosen VA report run with its generator/hash/time. Record which evidence is current and which was captured earlier.

  3. Show unresolved work

    Include unknown applicability, missing answers, open plans and unverified external results. A report hash establishes content identity, not completeness, authenticity of every input or technical effectiveness.

A Rapid Evidence Package is Technical HTML, not this cross-module index. Sharing approval and recovery coverage remain separate.

Check the result

A manually assembled, traceable evidence package.

Current limits and common mistakes

There is no universal one-click export that certifies all modules or supplies an auditor’s conclusion.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

Check completeness

Review assessment responses, risk decisions, policy versions and training or supplier evidence as applicable to the scope.

Share deliberately

Confirm permissions and sensitive-data handling before sharing. No automatically complete cross-module ZIP package is promised by this guide.

Charts and Visualisations

Module dashboards and reports use charts to summarise the records in their scope.

Worked report percentages and recent versus full populations

Reporting and export coverage varies by module; review completeness and permissions before sharing.

Where to start

Open the module’s dashboard/chart

Use the owning module's access. Reports can have narrower populations than the full application.

Before you begin

Read the chart’s date range, filters, units and data population.

Controls and inputs

ControlUse it forImportant boundary
Population and dateRead selected module scopeTraining active/assigned populations differ from exploratory progress; log cards can differ from filtered rows.
Scale and denominatorCIA, Risk, Supplier, framework, scan, VAThese scales are not interchangeable; unassessed/excluded/unknown must remain explicit.
Repeat runs / parent-childScanner aggregation90-day current per-Asset/type rollup is not all-time unique-finding proof.
Source rowsUnderlying records and outputUse them for decisions; a chart cannot perform review or approval.

Step-by-step

  1. Identify what is counted

    Distinguish records, completed assessments, selected controls, scan observations and affected locations.

  2. Check denominator and exclusions

    An unassessed value, Not Applicable response or tenant-hidden item can change the population. Unknown is not automatically zero.

  3. Compare with the list/report

    Open the associated rows or report and inspect representative records.

  4. Use the chart for the next question

    A high score or count tells you where to investigate; use the underlying evidence for an actual approval or remediation decision.

  5. Check course and log denominators

    Training assigned-role export and exploratory detailed progress are different populations. Activity Log daily cards are separate UTC-day totals, not the selected filtered list.

  6. Check report age

    A VA snapshot’s visualisation represents its saved input time, not today’s workspace. A current assessment chart may change after same-ID reassessment.

  7. Keep output-specific limitations

    Not every chart has drill-down or export, and historical Scanner rollup/language/metadata qualifications remain. A graph displayed successfully is not underlying-data UAT.

Calculate before comparing

  1. Risk worked example

    Likelihood 3×Impact 3=9. Canonical Risk bands put 9 in Medium; Ask summary can use High and other displays use different predicates. Do not treat a red scatter point as the canonical saved severity.

  2. Assessment worked example

    For four C 5 controls Implemented, N/A, Partial and unanswered: Compliance=(1+1)/4=50%; Implementation=1/4=25%. For EU AI with the same statuses, compliance=1/(4−1)=33.3%. Compare within the named view, not as one interchangeable score.

  3. Count recent versus complete populations

    Snapshot Assessment Usage counts at most five recent records per CIA/Rapid/ISO/NIS 2 family. Completion uses full populations for those four. Example:12 Rapid records can contribute only 5 to the usage pie, not 12.

  4. Check unknown and missing series

    Snapshot Risk bars omit unassessed scores; Supplier criticality can default missing values to Low. ISO category trend extraction currently cannot populate ordinary A.5/A.6/A.7/A.8 series. Missing chart data is not no gaps.

Use the exact source rows and the detailed Snapshot legend below. Store date, population and exclusions alongside any chart used as evidence.

Exact Snapshot chart populations
ChartCount / denominatorInterpretation
Asset categoriesAll category buckets / plotted category sumInventory counts, not security assurance.
Asset conditionExcellent/Good/Fair/Poor plus unknown; good/excellent / all AssetsStored condition, not measured service availability.
Asset statusFive recognized statuses / their sumUnset/unrecognized values can be outside the plotted denominator.
Risk severityFour assessed-score buckets / assessed-score totalUnassessed omitted; tooltip “total risks” is broader than this denominator.
Compliance trendFirst 12 dated records per Rapid/ISO/NIS2 family, averaged by quarterUnlike scores; lexical quarter order is not a complete chronological history.
ISO category trendCurrent control-ID split cannot populate A.5–A.8 seriesNo populated series is not evidence of zero deficiencies.
Supplier criticalityStored four buckets / plotted sumMissing values can default Low; unknown values can be omitted.
Risk heatmapNumeric likelihood and impact 1–4; coincident points overlapImpact-based color differs from canonical product-score severity.
Supplier heatmapFirst 20 Suppliers; axis fallbacksNot a full-estate or independently assessed impact population.
Assessment usageRecent lists, each capped five: CIA/Rapid/ISO/NIS2Not all assessment records or all modules.
Assessment completionCompleted / full population for those four familiesExcludes C5/EU/VA/Training; workflow state is not effectiveness.

Check the result

An interpreted visual summary with known scope.

Current limits and common mistakes

Do not add scanner parent and child totals as independent work, or compare unlike CIA/risk/VA/supplier scales.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

Read the labels

Check what the chart counts, which time period it covers and whether missing or unassessed records are represented separately.

Use available controls

Follow links or export controls offered by the current chart or report. Do not assume every chart supports the same interactions or file formats.

Exporting Information

Use the export or print control available in the relevant module. Formats and included fields vary.

Keep the source, output and approval evidence together

Current projections, frozen snapshots and version bodies support reviewed evidence, not universal certification.

Where to start

The selected module → Export / report view

Use the owning module's access. Reports can have narrower populations than the full application.

Before you begin

Choose the intended record or population and check the offered output.

Controls and inputs

ControlUse it forImportant boundary
Save as HTMLBrowser document save where offeredAsset/Supplier/Risk/framework/Audit Snapshot; not a universal native attachment or stored history.
Native .html downloadExact document version / VA snapshot where offeredCheck chosen version/run and actual file; publication remains separate.
CSVAdmin Assets / Training / Scanner / ActivityDifferent columns, populations and caps; none is a universal export.
Print Report / Print CertificateBrowser actionClient Save as PDF is separate; inspect pagination and coverage.
CSV re-importDataset-specific creationAdmin import creates new Assets, does not preserve asset_id or restore relationships.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose the exact source

    Confirm assessment, evaluation, document version, VA run, scanner filters, learner population or audit scope. An identical format extension does not mean identical coverage.

  2. Select only the offered format

    Use the output catalogue below. Do not advertise native Word/Excel/PDF or a universal ZIP where the active UI only supplies HTML/CSV/browser print.

  3. Export document versions precisely

    Select current or numbered stored DocumentVersion and Export. The native sanitized .html attachment is separate from current-body Confluence publication and local policy approval.

  4. Export VA from the chosen run

    Open saved report and its HTML output. It retains the original snapshot; Create report is the separate action to save current work.

  5. Check each CSV’s population

    Training CSV concerns active-user/assigned-role evidence; Scanner CSV has one row per scan, not raw findings; Activity CSV is ordered selected scope and capped at 10,000 events; Admin CSV covers Asset fields.

  6. Validate filters before trusting scanner output

    History/export share scan_type/status/date-from/date-to. Invalid date text can be ignored while still visible in filters; inspect actual resulting records and coverage.

  7. Inspect the file or print view

    Open the result, verify identity/time/rows/body/link/table content and missing information. A successful download does not clear retained print/reopen qualifications.

  8. Retain source context safely

    Keep filters, selected record/version/run and generation time with the approved evidence. User/audit/operational data may be private; authorise its audience separately.

  9. Do not use CSV as restore

    Admin Import CSV creates new Assets and ignores imported asset_id, can skip bad rows and can fail after a first commit. It is not ID-preserving round-trip, universal upsert or complete rollback.

  10. Follow separate backup/distribution procedures

    Use the responsible operator’s approved recovery and sharing process. No built-in universal scheduled export, automatic mail or full backup ZIP is established.

Choose the actual output format

Module / sourceOperationMeaning and limitsProcedure
AssetsExport AssetsCurrent standalone HTML, Save as HTML/Print. Approved eligible CIA-derived criticality; unfinished latest CIA does not revive older completed rating.Open guide
SuppliersReports / Export Suppliers / selected Supplier ReportCurrent aggregate/all or selected HTML. Phase approval differs from assurance; no recorded contract-value total.Open guide
RiskReports → Generate ReportCurrent comprehensive Risk/Treatment/Acceptance HTML. Accepted status alone differs from complete Acceptance evidence.Open guide
Vulnerability AssuranceReports → Create report; later View / Save as HTMLOne current-workspace frozen snapshot with generator/hash/time. No scope/type selector; generation needs report+write roles.Open guide
Document DialogExport current or numbered stored versionNative sanitized .html attachment. No native DOCX/PDF; missing body warning must remain explicit.Open guide
Training AdminExport CSV / HTML; certificates separatelyActive-user/assigned-role basis; detail exploratory counts can differ. Print Certificate is browser print, not native PDF.Open guide
Scanner CSVHistory filters → Export CSVOne row per scan, not findings/CVEs. Check actual dates; invalid date text can be ignored.Open guide
Activity Log CSVActive / Archive / All + filtersUp to 10,000 ordered events; signed UTC browsing context is not an immutable dataset or backup.Open guide
Admin Assets / Audit SnapshotImport/Export Data → Export CSV / View Audit SnapshotAsset columns versus current bounded aggregate HTML. Neither is database backup/restore.Open guide

Check a downloaded or printed output

  1. Save HTML

    In the offered report choose Save as HTML, then reopen its file. Framework/CIA/Snapshot saves serialize the browser document, not rendered canvas pixels; CDN scripts and external/site-relative styles can be required for charts/layout.

  2. Print separately

    Use Print Report or Print Certificate and inspect browser preview before choosing a PDF destination. Check page breaks, tables, missing charts and confidential fields. This is browser printing, not a native server PDF.

  3. Check exact attachment scope

    Document Export uses the selected stored version; VA HTML uses the chosen saved run. Asset Export Assets queries all Assets regardless of list filters. Scanner CSV is scan rows, not finding/CVE rows.

  4. Do not reimport as restoration

    Admin Asset CSV omits addresses/relationships and its importer creates new identities. Retain files as scoped evidence; use the approved recovery procedure for source/database restoration.

NIS2 HTML uses a separate clone/inlining helper and captures current disclosure expansion. Reopen the actual export before assuming complete offline presentation.

Check the result

A checked export whose scope is clear.

Current limits and common mistakes

An export is not a complete application/data backup. Generated document/report bodies and print paths retain their own qualifications.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

Check the result

Open the exported file and verify its scope, labels and completeness before sharing.

Recurring distribution

Agree any recurring export or email process separately with the responsible operator. This guide does not describe an installed universal scheduling service.

Admin Panel

Administrators manage users, roles and the settings available in the current deployment. Configured integration pages provide activity and connection information.

Account roles change access; approvals have separate workflows

Account roles, training assignments, VA roles, audit views and module approvals are separate records and controls.

Where to start

Admin → dashboard

Use administrator access for administrator actions; own-account setup/profile and integration access have their own checks.

Before you begin

Use administrator access for account and environment administration.

Controls and inputs

ControlUse it forImportant boundary
User ManagementAccounts, activation, roles and recoveryUse the existing account identity; deletion is destructive, not suspension.
System SettingsRead-only environment displayConfigured credentials are not proof that an API request succeeds.
Activity LogScope, filters, UTC history and CSVThe display window does not delete older rows.
Pro / RAGProvider/rule/routing and corpus administrationThese controls change persisted policy or searchable content.
IntegrationsHealth, sync, references and pending reviewsProvider calls, local imports and approvals have separate consequences.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose the action’s owner

    Use User Management for accounts; System Settings for inspection; Activity Log for recorded events; the dedicated Pro/RAG pages for AI administration. Use the business module for approvals.

  2. Inspect the current state

    Confirm the target user, record, provider and environment. An available Admin menu item does not prove every optional service is configured or every handler adds a read-only guard.

  3. Follow the dedicated procedure

    Open Accounts for create/edit/activation/password/MFA; Role Permissions for module access; AI Pipeline for provider and rule changes; Knowledge Sources for ingestion. Do not treat all Save buttons as equivalent.

  4. Separate inspection from execution

    System Settings is a configuration display. A sync requests external evidence. RAG file selection starts ingestion immediately. Provider/rule controls can persist on the individual action.

  5. Use the consequential action once

    Read the form and warning before submitting. Unchecking Require MFA may disable enrolled MFA. Delete User can remove owned records and learner evidence; deactivate for ordinary access suspension.

  6. Inspect success or failure

    Reopen the same account or record and check actual stored values. A flash message, health label or redirected page is not a whole-system verification.

  7. Continue in the owning module

    Check training assignments versus learner progress, VA IT Owner versus VA review roles, and CIA/Supplier/Risk decisions versus application roles. Administrative access does not supply those approvals.

  8. Retain bounded evidence

    Use Activity Log, Integration Activity, source records and offered exports. Follow the operator’s separate recovery procedure; an aggregate HTML Audit Snapshot is not a full database backup.

Read referral attribution without changing accounts

  1. Open Referrals where offered

    Use the Admin referral view to inspect attribution codes and their status, sign-ups, active-user counts and last referred-login time. This is a reading view, not a code creation or deletion tool.

  2. Read the recent activity scope

    The recent referred-login list is limited to 50 events. A zero or short list is not the entire account history; use Activity Log for the appropriate event scope.

  3. Keep attribution private

    Do not paste actual codes, users or login details into public support. Use User Management for account changes; referral totals do not grant or revoke access.

For every Admin action, separate configuration display, local database change, provider call and business approval. The dedicated guides below explain those effects.

Check the result

An intentional administrative task with its actual effect verified.

Current limits and common mistakes

Administrator status does not prove every optional provider is connected or that a recovery mechanism has been tested.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background
Illustrative application and operating boundary

Infrastructure, service versions and hardening depend on the selected deployment and its approved operating procedures.

Control access

Assign only the roles required for each person and verify the resulting access. Review changes when responsibilities change.

Operating procedures

Use the approved operator documentation for backups, recovery, infrastructure and service configuration. The presence of an Admin Panel does not imply that every operating task has an application wizard.

Role and Access Reference

The current Admin Panel exposes 18 role controls: Admin, Read Only, Asset Management, Supplier Due Diligence, NIS2 Compliance, General Assessments, Rapid Assessment, ISO 27001, CIA, BSI C5, EU AI Act, Training, Training Admin, Risk Assessment, Document Dialog, Integrations, Security Scanning and Vulnerability Assurance IT Owner.

Account editing, recovery and deletion have different effects

Roles, curriculum, activation, passwords, MFA and owned records each have their own lifecycle.

Where to start

Admin → User Management → Create / Edit user

Use administrator access for administrator actions; own-account setup/profile and integration access have their own checks.

Before you begin

Determine the account’s approved responsibilities before granting access.

Controls and inputs

ControlUse it forImportant boundary
At least one roleRequired by current formRead Only must stand alone; incompatible additive roles cause validation failure.
General AssessmentsCIA, Rapid, ISO 27001, BSI C5 and EU AI ActDedicated assessment controls remain; NIS2 is separate.
Security Scanning / IntegrationsSeparate controlsAsset or Integrations access does not itself grant scanner execution.
Training / Training AdminLearner access versus curriculum analyticsTraining-role assignments do not themselves grant application Training access.
VA IT OwnerSynchronizes a module-local VA roleNot Reviewer, Risk Owner or VA administration.

Step-by-step

  1. Identify approved responsibilities

    Open Create/Edit User for the intended identity, and list the modules and review responsibilities actually needed.

  2. Assign one or more offered access roles

    Use the current controls for Admin, Asset, Supplier, Risk, individual/general assessments, NIS2, Document Dialog, Integrations, Security Scanning, Training or Training Admin.

  3. Resolve Read Only validation

    Read Only must stand alone in the current form. Do not combine it with Admin or additive module roles and expect universal safe inspection. Retained Admin-only handlers do not all add a read-only write check.

  4. Choose assessment scope explicitly

    General Assessments covers CIA, Rapid, ISO, C5 and EU AI Act. NIS2 remains dedicated. Record ownership, workflow stages and other endpoint checks still apply.

  5. Separate scanner access from inventory access

    Asset Management allows inventory work. Security Scanning has its own permission plus write/configured-service/authorised-target requirements. Integrations is not scanner authority.

  6. Review VA responsibility

    The offered IT Owner control synchronizes that tenant VA grant/revocation. Other VA workspace roles such as Reviewer, Action Owner, Risk Owner and Auditor are managed separately.

  7. Distinguish learning assignments from access

    Curriculum roles and primary role select learning content; Training and Training Admin are application permissions. Changing assignments does not erase progress or certificates.

  8. Save and verify the same user

    Submit the approved choices, correct validation errors, reopen the account, and follow the authorised access-verification process. Hidden controls alone are not an RBAC audit.

Assign access and curriculum separately

  1. Choose the application roles

    Select the approved responsibility from the 18 offered controls. General Assessments and dedicated framework controls differ; the exact choices are listed in the Accounts guide. Access is separate from a completed business approval.

  2. Resolve the exclusive role

    Choose Read Only alone, or additive roles without Read Only. The form requires at least one role and rejects the mixed combination; do not bypass the error by assigning Admin for inspection.

  3. Set learning assignments on Edit

    Select approved training roles, then choose the primary role from those selected. One selected role is automatically primary. Save and reopen; replacing assignments does not erase old progress or certificates.

Application Training access and curriculum assignments are distinct. The main VA IT Owner flag does not assign Reviewer or Risk Owner. Ask internal data access currently does not mirror these per-module flags uniformly.

Check the result

A stored access assignment for the intended responsibility.

Current limits and common mistakes

Hidden buttons are not a full security test. Roles, read-only behavior, workflow-stage authority and tenant scope must all be considered; this guide does not claim a complete RBAC audit.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

Assessment, Vulnerability Assurance and scanner access

General Assessments can grant access across CIA, Rapid Assessment, ISO 27001, BSI C5 and EU AI Act; dedicated controls remain available for those areas. NIS2 Compliance, Vulnerability Assurance IT Owner and Security Scanning each use dedicated controls. Administrator access and other module or record checks still apply.

Read-only is a restriction

Read Only restricts changes and does not grant universal viewing access. The current form requires Read Only to stand alone. Endpoint, module and workflow checks still need verification; it is not a universal viewing grant or a guaranteed write restriction on every retained Admin handler.

Configuration and organisation context

System Settings displays deployment configuration. Organisation facts and supported changes belong to their owning forms and dedicated administration controls.

Inspect configuration; change only the intended AI policy

Provider readiness, saved policy, rule explanation and actual query execution are distinct facts.

Where to start

Admin → System Settings

Use administrator access for administrator actions; own-account setup/profile and integration access have their own checks.

Before you begin

Know which deployment configuration question you need answered.

Controls and inputs

ControlUse it forImportant boundary
Environment / database summaryInspectionDatabase password is masked; do not share connection secrets.
AI provider credentialsAI credential-presence / masked-value displayPresence is separate from enablement, authorization and successful requests.
AI / RAG modeDeployment configurationUse dedicated Pro/RAG controls for their supported changes, not this display.
Organisation inputsOwning assessment/document formNo universal organisation-profile editor is established here.

Step-by-step

  1. Open System Settings

    Use the administrator’s configuration view in the intended environment. Read the six actual groups: AI Mode, Ask amara Pro, RAG / Search, Language, Database and Application. This is not a Jira, Confluence, Azure or AWS credential/configuration view.

  2. Read credential status safely

    AI credential indicators or masked values describe configuration, not verified provider behavior. Inspect integrations through their own supported pages or the responsible operator, not these six groups. Database passwords are masked. Do not copy tokens, raw connection strings or personal details into support requests.

  3. Identify the requested change’s owner

    Account access belongs to User Management; organisation facts belong to the assessment/document form that owns them; provider/runtime configuration belongs to the operator or dedicated Pro controls.

  4. Use the supported editor

    This page does not provide a universal .env Save or organisation wizard. For supported AI policy changes use AI Pipeline; for searchable knowledge use RAG; otherwise request the scoped operator change.

  5. Review dependent outputs separately

    When organisation inputs change, inspect generated documents and assessment reports. Existing records and versions are not universally regenerated by a configuration change.

  6. Report a concrete discrepancy

    Name the view, expected capability and safe visible state. Keep secret values out of the report; a health/configuration discrepancy does not authorise a production change.

Resolve an organisation change at its owner

  1. Locate the input

    Change legal-name or scope values only through an owning form that actually offers those fields and an update action. Existing ISO reassessment/category selection does not edit its organisation metadata. NIS2 entity editing and Document Dialog revisions are separate workflows. If the field is not offered, ask the responsible owner for a supported correction; do not create a duplicate assessment as a workaround. System Settings is not a universal organisation editor.

  2. Check dependent evidence

    Compare the updated record with a newly generated report or document. Existing exported files and historical DocumentVersions retain their prior content.

  3. Escalate deployment changes safely

    Request the operator’s scoped configuration change when no editor exists. Supply capability and environment name, not passwords, tokens or a raw database connection string.

Changing organisation context does not automatically change every assessment, document, provider page or saved report run.

Check the result

A clear understanding of the displayed configuration and its owner.

Current limits and common mistakes

Do not expose keys, credentials or connection secrets in help requests or exported evidence.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

Review dependent work

Organisation information can support assessment inputs and document forms. Review generated output after a change rather than assuming every existing document has updated.

Contact the operator when needed

Infrastructure, email and provider configuration may follow separate operating procedures. Ask the responsible administrator about capabilities not shown in the current interface.

Audit Trail

Use the available activity and audit records to review recorded actions.

Changing the display window retains older audit history

The archive, stable browsing window, event details and CSV each have a bounded purpose.

Where to start

Admin → Activity Log / relevant module history

Use administrator access for administrator actions; own-account setup/profile and integration access have their own checks.

Before you begin

Identify the module, record, time range and action you need to trace.

Controls and inputs

ControlUse it forImportant boundary
ScopeActive / Archive / AllActive defaults to 30 days without a valid setting; older or null-time entries belong to Archive.
FiltersEvent Type, Model, User, Date From/To, SearchUTC date bounds. Search covers username, description and record identifier, up to 200 characters.
Events per page1–100, default 50Pagination is separate from export capacity.
Browsing fenceSigned as-of / ID / window stateNew events need a fresh view. Invalid signed/filter state is an error, not an empty successful result.
Save window1–3,650 daysChanges the active/archive partition and audits a real change; no purge.
Export CSVSelected scope/filters/fence, cap 10,000Not an unbounded whole-ledger or database export.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose the appropriate history

    Module phase/version history explains business decisions; Activity Log records application events; Integration Activity records connector operations. They are not interchangeable.

  2. Select Active, Archive or All

    Start with the scope suited to the period. The active window defaults to 30 days absent a valid saved setting; older/null-timestamp records remain in Archive.

  3. Apply exact filters

    Choose Event Type, Model and User where needed; enter Date From/To in the UTC view and a concise Search term for username, description or record identifier. Set 1–100 events per page.

  4. Handle invalid input as an error

    Read invalid date, scope or signed-state messages. Correct the filter or reopen a fresh view; do not label an errored request ‘no activity’.

  5. Open the event and referenced record

    Check actor, UTC time, action, description and referenced identity. Direct retained detail can include older IDs; the list’s current window is not a deletion boundary.

  6. Distinguish the result being logged

    Submission, provider response, approval and verification are different events. A log entry alone proves neither external delivery nor technical effectiveness.

  7. Refresh for later events

    The list carries signed as-of/ID/window browsing state to keep pagination bounded. New activity may require a fresh view rather than advancing old pages; this is not an immutable report snapshot.

  8. Adjust the active window deliberately

    Enter a whole number from 1 to 3,650 and Save window. It changes the partition and records a real change; saving the same value does not invent an event. Failure must not be treated as committed.

  9. Export the selected CSV

    Confirm scope, filters and the bounded view, then Export CSV. The current export has 10 columns and a 10,000-row cap. Check actual rows and preserve the filter context.

  10. Interpret summary cards separately

    UTC daily cards do not automatically share the filtered list’s denominator. Compare the selected rows, not a card total, when making a scoped claim.

Trace an actor and a changed field

  1. Open a User Timeline

    In Activity Log, click the actor’s username. The user-specific view fixes the actor and retains the window/filter/pagination controls; its current-page count is not the actor’s lifetime event count.

  2. Open the event detail

    Inspect event ID, UTC time, type/module, actor, target ID/identifier, description and old/new changed values. IP/User Agent and optional raw JSON can be sensitive.

  3. Compare history with current state

    A recorded old/new value describes that event. Reopen the referenced record to see today’s state; a blank detail field does not prove no change occurred.

Refresh starts a fresh bounded view for later events. Export preserves the selected scope and10,000-row cap; the daily summary cards use a separate UTC population.

Check the result

A traceable view of recorded actions in their available scope.

Current limits and common mistakes

An event log does not certify every data change or provide a full application backup. A logged action alone does not prove external delivery or technical effectiveness. The current CSV export is limited to 10,000 selected rows; check scope before relying on it as a complete ledger.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

Inspect the evidence

Check the actor, time, record and action information present in the selected view. A missing entry needs investigation rather than an assumption that no action occurred.

Coverage and retention

Confirm the actual logging coverage, access and retention rules for the deployment. This guide does not promise that every field change or external event is captured.

Backup and Recovery

Backups and restoration follow the operating procedure approved for your deployment.

Keep the source, output and approval evidence together

Current projections, frozen snapshots and version bodies support reviewed evidence, not universal certification.

Where to start

Your implementation team’s approved backup/recovery procedure

Use administrator access for administrator actions; own-account setup/profile and integration access have their own checks.

Before you begin

Identify exactly which sources, database records, documents and audit evidence need recovery.

Step-by-step

  1. Define the recovery scope

    Distinguish website source, application source, database, generated documents, configuration and external-provider records. Exporting inventory or a report covers only its stated data.

  2. Use the approved mechanism

    Ask the responsible operator to use the deployment’s actual backup procedure. The application’s settings/import-export pages are not a universal complete-backup button.

  3. Verify a recovery artifact

    Keep the artifact identity, capture time, inventory and integrity evidence. A filename or file presence is not proof it contains current data.

  4. Restore and verify in an isolated environment

    Follow the approved restore process and validate content/permissions/behavior before any production replacement.

  5. Record coverage limits

    State which later changes or data are outside the capture, and preserve original/manual recovery artifacts.

  6. Do not substitute an audit snapshot for recovery

    Admin’s Audit Snapshot is a current aggregate HTML projection. Asset CSV, Activity CSV, assessment reports and document exports each cover only their selected evidence, not the database, keys, files and provider state.

  7. Preserve external and knowledge-source boundaries

    Confluence publication, Jira issues and RAG chunks have their own lifecycles. Document-version exports do not automatically capture all of them or delete copies after restoration.

Agree an operator recovery checklist

  1. List the required components

    Record whether the capture covers application source, database, generated/stored document bodies, configuration, RAG corpus and external-provider records. A website copy does not cover these automatically.

  2. Record identity and verification

    Keep capture time, scope, artifact identity, integrity/inventory checks and the last successfully verified isolated restore with the responsible operator.

  3. Test before replacement

    Use the approved isolated restore procedure and compare records, files, access and offered workflows. Do not import an Asset CSV into production as a trial full restore.

No universal backup wizard or production restore command is offered in the application. External Jira/Confluence state and chunks need their own agreed recovery coverage.

Check the result

A recovery plan whose coverage and verification are explicit.

Current limits and common mistakes

Source recovery and live-data recovery are different. This public guide cannot supply deployment-specific credentials or a generic production restore command.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

Before a change

Confirm the scope and currency of the recovery point, its integrity and the agreed restore procedure with the responsible operator.

Recovery

Use the approved recovery process and verify restored data before returning to service. This guide does not promise an Admin Panel restore wizard, fixed schedule, encryption method or retention period.

Multi-Factor Authentication

MFA adds a time-based verification code to password authentication. Use the account's MFA setup controls when available or required by the deployment.

Sign-in establishes a session, not every module permission

Authentication, application roles and workflow-stage authority are distinct checks.

Where to start

Required setup prompt, or account menu → Profile → Enable MFA where eligible; later Login → Verify

Use your own eligible non-demo account. Local TOTP and Microsoft factors are separate. Admin reset and Require MFA policy are not self-service disable controls.

Before you begin

Use a trusted authenticator and an approved private place for recovery codes. Never expose the QR secret, codes, clipboard or printout to support.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose required or voluntary setup

    Follow the required enrolment prompt, or Profile → Enable MFA where offered. An already enrolled account does not need repeated setup; the shared demo cannot enrol. Required-unenrolled accounts can still be directed here after Microsoft sign-in.

    First Login — account and Microsoft branches

  2. Verify the setup code

    Keep the QR/manual-copy secret private. Enter exactly six digits in Verification Code and use Verify and Enable MFA. Correct required/format or rejected-code messages; Cancel does not enrol. If enrolment began as part of pending Login, the challenge can expire after five minutes; start Login again if it expires. This pending-login timeout does not apply when you are already signed in.

  3. Save the one-time recovery view

    Successful setup enables MFA and requires it, then shows ten eight-character one-time recovery codes. Copy All Codes, Download as Text File (amara-backup-codes.txt) or Print Codes disclose secrets: choose the approved private destination. Refresh/revisit may not redisplay this session-pop view.

  4. Acknowledge before continuing

    Check that you have saved the codes in a safe place to enable Continue, then select Continue. This is an acknowledgement, not verification that clipboard/file/print is durably or securely stored.

  5. Verify at later local login

    In Verify use the current six-digit TOTP or an unused eight-alphanumeric recovery code; spaces/hyphens are normalised for the latter. Use Verify, or the offered Lost your device panel / Back to Login as appropriate.

  6. Distinguish format and valid-code failures

    Correct malformed input before trying again. Five rejected valid-format login verification attempts can lock verification for 15 minutes. Expiry of the five-minute pending session alone does not reset failure counters; start Login again without assuming it did. Successful verification resets the counter.

  7. Handle remaining-code warnings

    A successfully used recovery code is consumed. At three or fewer remaining codes, retain/use the rest privately and contact the authorised administrator for the approved recovery/re-enrolment path. There is no offered self-regenerate or self-disable action.

  8. Recover through the right administrator action

    When no usable factor remains, request Reset MFA for the correct account. Reset Password changes a different credential; disabled MFA has no enrolment to remove. Re-enrol under the remaining requirement. Unchecking Require MFA in Admin can disable existing setup and must be deliberate.

    Accounts — Reset MFA versus Reset Password

  9. Check session and evidence separately

    A successful login/setup is not proof of exhaustive immutable authentication logging. Normal Logout ends local login and current-tab Ask context, not necessarily Microsoft SSO or provider history.

Check the result

A verified local factor and privately retained recovery evidence, or a clearly identified validation/session/recovery issue.

Current limits and common mistakes

Never submit real secrets to test recovery. Microsoft MFA/Conditional Access and local TOTP have different lifecycles; a policy, setup success or acknowledgement does not establish complete deployment security.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Diagrams and background

Set up carefully

Follow the visible setup steps with a compatible authenticator. Keep any recovery codes in an approved secure location and never share the setup secret.

Lost access

Use a permitted recovery code or contact the responsible administrator through the approved account-recovery process. Lockout and enforcement settings depend on the active implementation.

Bell Notifications & Activity Feed

The bell icon in the top navigation bar is your integration activity feed. It can surface events from Jira, Confluence, Azure and Security Scanning — such as ticket status changes, scan completion and treatment-validation prompts — when those connections are enabled.

Jira status can change progress before human review

A Jira loop-back example: other module notifications have their own source, access and acknowledgement rules.

Where to start

Top navigation → bell; Admin → Integration Activity

Use administrator access for administrator actions; own-account setup/profile and integration access have their own checks.

Before you begin

The account needs the relevant access and at least one supported enabled integration for the bell to appear.

Step-by-step

  1. Read the event before acting

    Open the bell and inspect source, reference, type, action and timestamp. The badge adds unprocessed integration events and references pending review. The dropdown shows the latest 10 detected events, not necessarily the badge’s population; it is not an unread or technical-risk count. Viewing the dropdown does not persist a read/processed state.

  2. Open the underlying record

    Follow the event destination and verify the ticket/scan/treatment it refers to. If the destination is unavailable to your account, open the owning module directly or ask the administrator.

  3. Use the full activity view

    View all activity opens the broader Integration Activity view where access permits; browse the paginated recent events (25 per page). Source and action are displayed, not offered as filters here; separate Activity Log filtering is documented in Audit Trail.

  4. Review validation prompts

    A resolved linked Jira issue can prompt treatment validation. Review the treatment evidence and use its validation action; the notification is not the sign-off.

  5. Check recorded state

    Viewing a notification or the feed does not clear it or mark it read. Explicit validation/review workflows can process related events; inspect their recorded outcome. Use the source record when determining what remains open.

  6. Open the referenced source

    Use the notification/event’s supplied reference to inspect the originating record and stage. A notification read or navigation action is not the same as resolving the underlying work.

  7. Inspect connector reviews in their own view

    Use Integration Activity and Pending Reviews for connector loop-back. Read the proposed status change and source event; accepting a pending review can change Treatment/Risk, not merely dismiss a bell item.

  8. Compare ownership and access

    The account’s application roles, VA role/notification rules and originating module access remain separate. Ask an authorised owner to inspect inaccessible records without exposing their private contents.

  9. Retain the actual outcome

    Check the source status and recorded reviewer decision after an approval. An external Done/Closed status does not automatically establish scan verification, VA closure or risk acceptance.

Read a review badge as a queue

  1. Inspect the originating reference

    Open the bell item, then the local record and linked Jira issue. The badge combines unprocessed events and pending-review references, while the dropdown shows the latest 10 detected events. Opening it does not clear processing state or make visible rows equal the badge total.

  2. Choose the review destination

    Use View all activity for the 25-per-page event feed, or Pending Reviews for a decision. The feed does not offer the full Activity Log filter set.

  3. Check the consequence

    After Approve or Dismiss, inspect the original reference and Treatment/Risk state. An eligible approval can complete a Treatment; viewing or dismissing a bell item cannot establish a technical fix.

VA location verification remains separate from the Jira/Risk review cascade. Inaccessible destinations need an authorised owner, not copied private contents.

Check the result

An event that leads to the correct evidence and next action.

Current limits and common mistakes

Some bell destinations and access paths remain under qualification. Do not infer successful follow-up merely because an event appeared.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

Where to find it

The bell icon () appears in the top navigation bar, next to your user menu. It is visible when at least one supported integration is enabled. A badge counts all unprocessed integration events plus all references pending review; it is not a severity or unread-message count. The dropdown shows the latest 10 events by detection time, a different population from that composite count and the 25-per-page activity feed.

What triggers a notification

EventSourceWhat it means
Jira ticket status changeJiraA linked ticket moved to Done/Resolved/Closed — treatment may need validation
@amara mentionJira / ConfluenceA recorded mention is not proof that a command ran. The maintained monitor does not poll mentions; retained Jira code treats status/scan/close as requests (scan/close unimplemented), while Confluence handling logs only. Use normal amara controls for scans and closure.
Scan completedSecurity ScanningAn authorised security scan finished — its evidence is available for review; governed follow-up depends on the result and approval.
Treatment validation neededInternalA Jira ticket linked to a risk treatment was resolved — human validation required to close the loop
Azure sync completedAzureEntra ID user/group data was pulled and updated

The Activity Feed

Click "View all activity" in the bell dropdown to open the full Integration Activity page. It is paginated at 25 events per page and displays source/action information. This view offers no source-platform or action-type filter; Activity Log has its own separate controls.

Each event shows:

  • Source — which platform (Jira, Confluence, Security Scanning or Azure)
  • Reference — the ticket ID, page title, or scan target
  • Type — the recorded mention type, for example @amara, @azure, @aws or review. The scanner type @kali is displayed as amara Security Scanner. This is separate from Action taken.
  • Action taken — the recorded outcome or request marker. status_requested, scan_requested and close_requested do not prove that a status response, scan or closure was executed.
  • Timestamp — when the event was detected/recorded; processing status is separate

Clearing Notifications

Viewing the dropdown/feed does not mark events processed. When you validate a treatment through Risk Management → Treatment Plans, only eligible chain references with an unset or pending-review state are approved. Unprocessed status-change events matching those approved external IDs are then marked processed. Other or dismissed references, unrelated events and newly created audit events are not universally cleared.

No bell? Check your integrations

The bell icon appears only when at least one supported integration is enabled. If you do not see it, ask an administrator to review the organisation's integration configuration and permissions.

Troubleshooting

Start by recording what you expected, the visible result and the module or record involved.

A supported answer is not a saved module decision

Ask route and memory boundaries are one troubleshooting context. Use the actual owning module for other errors.

Where to start

The page or workflow that did not produce the expected result

Use administrator access for administrator actions; own-account setup/profile and integration access have their own checks.

Before you begin

Keep the selected module/record and visible error available.

Step-by-step

  1. Identify where it stopped

    Was it data entry, validation, save, report generation, connector transport, scan execution or review? State the expected and actual outcome.

  2. Check save versus navigation

    Reopen the same record to see whether the change persisted. A prefilled form, visible preview or click does not establish a saved record.

  3. Check eligibility and access

    Look for required fields, read-only access, disabled feature, tenant scope, workflow stage or missing target context.

  4. Check external and worker state

    An unavailable connector/worker prevents the corresponding external task. A queued request is not completed evidence; avoid creating duplicates while the result is uncertain.

  5. Report with safe context

    Send the module, record reference, time, steps, expected result and visible message through the approved support process. Exclude passwords, tokens and private attachments unless explicitly authorised.

  6. Handle stale Ask context deliberately

    A 409 login/ownership/freshness mismatch requires reloading and checking the current account. Do not assume an old tab’s retained conversation grants access after login changes.

  7. Separate configuration from provider success

    Configured, Online, a model label and a menu entry do not certify every API or handler. Inspect the precise failed operation and its safe error; avoid broad ‘integration works’ claims.

  8. Reconcile consequential requests before retry

    If a ticket, publication, import, upload or reset outcome is uncertain, check returned references and saved records before reissuing it. RAG file selection already begins ingestion.

  9. Use the owning control

    Password reset is not MFA reset; training assignment is not certificate creation; a report export is not backup; Help routes and unused templates are not proof of active application controls.

Diagnose without creating a second action

  1. Check both identities

    Keep the local record ID and returned Jira key, Confluence Page ID, Scan ID or import feedback. An external write may have succeeded even when local linking failed.

  2. Reconcile before retry

    Reopen the owner and inspect existing references/state. If the outcome is unclear, report it with time and visible error; do not recreate a ticket, publication, upload or import automatically.

  3. Choose diagnostics deliberately

    Warm-up and a healthy Admin Ask status request can execute a real model test. Connector health can call providers when uncached. Do not use them as supposedly provider-free inspection.

Report the failing stage and safe reference, not secrets. Unsupported, denied, partial, queued and zero-result are different outcomes.

Check the result

A precise report of the failing stage and available evidence.

Current limits and common mistakes

Do not change production settings or retry external writes based on a generic error alone.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

Check access and configuration

Missing controls may reflect role permissions, disabled features or an unavailable integration. Ask the responsible administrator to check the current configuration.

Preserve evidence

For a failed query, export or workflow, retain the relevant error and source context. Use the approved support process and avoid changing production configuration based on a generic help example.

External Integrations

Enabled integrations connect selected amara workflows with Jira, Confluence, scanner services and cloud evidence. Each has its own permissions, data flow and update behaviour.

Original MCP architecture: cloud, Jira, Confluence and scanner connectors with the amara core

The original MCP architecture is restored here at normal reading size. Read, import, write and review remain separate actions; Pro privacy controls are not every external route.

Where to start

Owning module → enabled integration action; Admin → integration evidence

The connector must be enabled and the account allowed for the originating record and specific action.

Before you begin

Confirm the relevant connector and permissions before depending on the handoff.

Controls and inputs

ControlUse it forImportant boundary
Health / configured stateReadiness signal, cached 300 secondsA cold/expired health check may contact the provider; green is not operation success.
Stored external referencesOwning entity, URL, status, review stateReference labels are not universal validated foreign keys or business approval.
Reference RefreshProvider status retrieval plus local changesCan write status/notifications/progress. Shared default refresh URL has owner-wiring limits.
Jira / Confluence actionsExternal writes plus local referencesReview the exact owner, generated payload and destination.
Cloud sync / importCached evidence versus explicit Asset writeAzure resource fetch is live; AWS import uses the latest saved sync.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose the owner and direction

    Open the actual Asset, CIA, Supplier, Risk, framework gap, Document, Scanner or VA record. Use its offered external action; cloud sync belongs to Account Admin.

  2. Check availability without overstating it

    Read enabled/configured state and health time. Health is cached for 300 seconds; cold/expired checks may call Azure token, AWS STS, Atlassian or scanner services.

  3. Confirm permissions for this action

    Owning-module and integration access are separate. UI hiding is not proof of uniform endpoint RBAC or read-only handling; ISP provider writes retain different guards.

  4. Read existing references first

    Confirm the typed entity, record ID, issue/page URL, status and review state. Asset views can show derived chain children as well as direct references.

  5. Choose lookup, refresh, link, publication or import

    Search reads externally. Reference Refresh may also change local status/progress. Confluence Link can stamp externally. Publish sends current saved body. Cloud import creates/reopens an Asset.

  6. Review the payload and submit once

    Inspect exact project/space, source record, generated text, selected cloud resource and scope. Provider success with local persistence failure needs reconciliation before retry.

  7. Check the result on both sides

    Follow the returned provider reference where authorised, then reopen the original local record. Do not infer a stored link from a chat answer or an external page from a failed request.

  8. Review loop-back consequences

    Terminal Jira status can create pending review and progress a linked Treatment to 90%. Account Admin approval can complete it and mark Risk mitigated; VA still has its own location-specific verification.

  9. Retain evidence and limits

    Check partial sync errors, timestamps and inaccessible references. Use Integration Activity for recorded connector events, not as a complete immutable audit or delivery certificate.

Choose an operation by its effect

  1. Read or link

    Ask provider lookup reads external evidence. A record’s Link action saves a local reference and can stamp the external Confluence page. These are separate controls even when they refer to the same Page ID.

  2. Create or publish

    Create Jira Ticket transmits task content. Document Publish transmits the current saved body and can update a same-title page. Reconcile both external result and local reference.

  3. Sync or import

    Cloud Sync saves evidence locally. Import as Asset deliberately creates/opens inventory; it does not change a VM, provision a user, start CIA or record installed software.

  4. Refresh or approve

    Reference Refresh can change local status/progress. Pending Review Approve can complete eligible Treatment/Risk work; it is not merely refreshing a display.

Use the owner’s guide for its exact fields and guards. Availability, transport success, local persistence and business verification are distinct results.

Check the result

A deliberately used connector with known source and destination.

Current limits and common mistakes

Availability and external account scope vary by deployment. A connector icon does not establish connectivity or permission for every record.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background
Cached view, provider request and saved handoff differ

An external query, local Asset import, provider write and human approval each have their own access and evidence boundary.

Review external actions

Confirm the target and scope before creating or updating an external record. Check the returned link or status after the action.

Keep evidence and decisions separate

An external status update supports review. It does not automatically approve an assessment, prove remediation or close a Vulnerability Assurance finding.

Jira — Tickets & Loop-Back

Eligible module records can offer a reviewed Jira action when the connector is enabled. Confirm the target and content, then inspect the resulting link. Linked status updates support review; they do not by themselves close the underlying work.

Jira status can change progress before human review

External status, local progress, administrative approval and technical verification are not interchangeable.

Where to start

Eligible record → Create Jira Ticket

The connector must be enabled and the account allowed for the originating record and specific action.

Before you begin

Use an enabled Jira connector, permitted project and the actual source record.

Controls and inputs

ControlUse it forImportant boundary
ProjectFixed/read-only in shared modalDefault ITSEC from caller; not a universal editable project picker.
SummaryRequired in standard modalUsually prefilled from owning record; confirm identity and task purpose.
DescriptionOptional in standard shared modalScanner/generated forms may make context read-only; preserve evidence and uncertainty.
Priority / TypeMedium / Task defaultsPriority Low/Medium/High/Critical; Type Task/Bug/Story. Generated pathways can differ.
LabelsOptional comma-separatedOwner defaults and actual payload handling vary.
Approve / DismissAccount Admin pending-review decisionApprove can complete Treatment and mitigate Risk; Dismiss does not perform that completion.

Step-by-step

  1. Open the exact eligible record

    Use Create Jira Ticket or Create Review Ticket in the owning module. Rapid/Training have no dedicated creation handler; Ask Jira queries do not silently create tickets.

  2. Read existing linked work

    Check issue/reference and source identity before creating again. Generic routes may warn about an open link without preventing another issue; VA has a stronger linked-remediation guard.

  3. Review the actual fields

    In the standard modal, Project is fixed/read-only (normally ITSEC), Summary required, Description/Labels optional, Priority defaults Medium and Type Task. Scanner/VA-generated forms may differ.

  4. Keep the evidence honest

    Retain source, uncertainty and affected scope. A version match or informational scan observation is not automatically confirmed vulnerability work. Confirm the permitted destination.

  5. Submit the external creation once

    Inspect the returned issue key/URL and saved local reference. If external creation succeeds and local linking fails, reconcile the existing issue before repeating.

  6. Inspect the owner-specific local effect

    Risk creation can ensure a mitigation Treatment (initially 20% In Progress, 30-day target when absent). Scanner Jira can ensure/reuse Risk+Treatment. Asset/CIA/Supplier/Document reference creation is not their internal approval.

  7. Track the actual work externally

    Use the normal change process, assignment and implementation evidence. A terminal status is an external workflow fact, not proof of remediation.

  8. Refresh the supported reference deliberately

    An actual status refresh can update local status/time/notices and move a linked Risk Treatment to 90% In Progress. Risk has a refresh route; the shared default Risk URL is not correctly owned in every Asset/CIA/Document caller.

  9. Open Pending Reviews as Account Admin

    Inspect the originating entity, ticket, Risk/Treatment chain and evidence. A derived chain may use current Asset-name or latest-record matching; confirm the actual source before deciding.

  10. Approve only with sufficient evidence

    Approve stamps review and can stamp sibling references. For the eligible risk-assessment chain at ≥90%, it can validate Jira-resolved progress, set Treatment 100% Completed and Risk Mitigated. Inspect which chain actually changed.

  11. Dismiss when completion is not justified

    Dismiss records the decision without completing the Treatment. It is not a Jira issue reopen or automatic reversal of prior local progress.

  12. Complete the owning verification

    Risk’s Validate is a separate guarded path. VA still requires affected-location evidence and reviewer verification; neither Jira Done nor Admin approval makes a VA case Verified.

  13. Check recorded results

    Read Integration Activity and the original records. Bell count, inaccessible destination or a closed issue does not establish notification delivery, all-treatment completion or assessment-answer updates.

Read the ticket payload and review cascade

  1. Set the actual modal fields

    Check the fixed project (normally ITSEC), required Summary, optional Description/Labels, default Medium priority and Task type. Offered priorities are Low/Medium/High/Critical; types Task/Bug/Story.

  2. Check the provider fields

    The shared client sends project, summary, description and issue type. Nondefault priority and labels are prefixed into description, not set as native Jira Priority/Labels; inspect the returned issue before relying on those fields.

  3. Trace a scanner-created chain

    Scanner Jira can use the worst severity across the whole scan to score a created/reused Risk at 1/4/9/16, even when initiated from one finding. A new Treatment can start 20% In Progress with a 30-day target; review the actual linked Risk rather than assuming the selected finding’s score.

  4. Reconcile review selection

    Terminal Jira progress can reach 90%. Admin approval of the eligible risk-assessment reference selects the first qualifying noncompleted Treatment, not necessarily the latest one displayed. After approval inspect 100% Completed, Risk Mitigated and sibling review stamps.

Board-query failure is not an empty board. Rapid/Training do not gain ticket creation from Ask; VA requires its own confirmed relevance, affected location and reviewer verification.

Check the result

An external work reference and its actual stored local relationships.

Current limits and common mistakes

Jira Done/Resolved/Closed is not proof of a fix. Connector configuration and external lifecycle qualifications remain separate from the local UI process.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

Which Modules Can Create Tickets

Use the owning route’s actual modal or generated action. Fields and saved effects differ: the shared modal fixes Project, while Scanner/VA can supply generated context. Inspect success and local persistence; a click alone does not prove a stored issue/reference.

ModuleWhat creates the ticket
Asset ManagementAny asset record — link findings or remediation tasks
ISO 27001Individual control gaps in the assessment
BSI C5Individual gaps from the BSI C5 cloud assessment
EU AI ActGaps from EU AI Act compliance assessment
CIA ClassificationIndividual measures within a CIA evaluation
NIS2 ComplianceRemediation actions for NIS2 gaps
Risk ManagementIndividual risk records — link to treatment tasks
Supplier ManagementSupplier records — flag due diligence or remediation
Document DialogDocument records — permitted review-task reference, separate from version save/approval
Information Security PolicyIndividual ISP sections or subsections
Security ScannerIndividual scan findings (see Security Scanning page)
Vulnerability AssuranceAn individual finding's permitted remediation action
Ask amaraQuery only — jira: prefix searches and retrieves Jira tickets via natural language
Admin PanelReview & manage — Integration Activity feed, Pending Reviews queue, status sync

The Loop-Back Cycle

1

Ticket created in amara

On an eligible record, use the available Jira action, review the target and content, and confirm. Check the resulting ticket link and recorded context.

2

Your team works the ticket

Use your normal Jira workflow to assign, comment and progress the ticket. Where a loop-back is configured, amara can present linked status updates and notifications for review.

3

Configured loop-back detects a status change

An allowed refresh/synchronization checks linked issue status. Terminal status can produce pending-review evidence and progress the linked Risk Treatment to 90% In Progress; it does not prove the fix. This guide establishes no universal timer or polling schedule.

4

Inspect the recorded notification

Configured status-change processing can record a pending notice. Check its actual reference and accessible source; visibility and destination access differ, and the retained Scanner Admin-bell qualification remains unresolved.

5

Admin reviews and decides

An admin opens the review queue and sees the resolved ticket with its amara context. Approve stamps review/siblings and, for an eligible Risk chain, can validate Jira-resolved progress, set Treatment to 100% Completed and Risk to Mitigated. Dismiss records review without that completion. Inspect the specific chain; assessment answers, CIA approvals and VA per-location verification remain separate.

Status, progress and approval differ

A resolved issue is an external status, not technical proof. Local reference/progress can change before human approval, and the eligible Admin approval can complete Treatment and mitigate Risk. Do not interpret the retained “no automatic updates” wording as a guarantee of no local effects.

Jira, Risk and Treatment boundary

For an actionable scanner finding, a user may create a direct Risk or confirm a Jira action. The Jira-from-finding path can create or reuse linked governance records according to the configured workflow. A direct Risk remains its own record unless deliberately linked later.

Status is not proof of closure

A ticket status or clean scan is supporting evidence only. The responsible reviewer assesses the complete evidence set and performs the required Risk, Treatment or VA verification decision.

Linked-work review

When a configured connector reports linked work, use the relevant Risk, Jira and Treatment records to review the evidence. A ticket status or scanner result supports review; it does not automatically close Vulnerability Assurance or replace the responsible approver.

Keep the boundary clear

Security Scanner evidence is restricted to registered authorised Assets. Jira, Risk and Treatment actions remain governed by the selected workflow and human review.

@amara Mentions in Jira

Where configured, a Jira loop-back can surface relevant linked activity as an in-app notification. The available information and timing depend on the connector configuration and permissions.

Confluence — Publish & Link

Document Dialog can publish to configured Confluence spaces, while supported modules can link existing pages. Check the selected target and resulting page after each action.

Searching, linking and publishing have distinct write boundaries

Confluence has its own page access and version history; local approval and version exports stay separate.

Where to start

Document → Publish to Confluence; eligible module record → Link Confluence

The connector must be enabled and the account allowed for the originating record and specific action.

Before you begin

Use the approved space/page and exact local record. Publication uses the current saved body; historical-version export is separate.

Controls and inputs

ControlUse it forImportant boundary
Search Confluence pages… / SearchExternal page lookupRecent results can use a15-minute browser cache. Nonempty Search calls the provider; *can request10recent pages. Blank Search does not fetch.
Selected Page IDRequired for linkingTitle/URL/space identify returned selection; a typed title alone is not the selected page.
Link Confluence PageLocal reference plus external stampNot a pure bookmark; duplicate handling differs by owner.
Page Title / Confluence SpaceDocument publicationHandler defaults ISC; current saved sanitized document body is sent.
Existing same-title pageCreate/update/upsert boundaryPublication does not increment local DocumentVersion or automatically republish later edits.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose search, link or publication

    Ask retrieves pages; supported owning-record Link persists a reference and stamps the external page; Document Dialog Publish sends current saved content. These are different operations.

  2. Review access and destination

    Use the enabled Confluence connector, permitted owning record and approved space/page. Shared search requires Admin/Integrations; endpoint guards and external page permissions still differ.

  3. Open Link Confluence Page for an existing page

    Opening the modal can reuse recent cached results for15minutes. Enter nonempty text and Search for a provider query; *can request10recent pages. Blank Search does not fetch. Errors are not proof an entire space is empty.

  4. Choose the actual returned page

    Inspect parseable Page ID, title, URL and space. Click the intended result to post the link immediately; there is no subsequent confirmation. Hidden title/URL fields carry selection context. Do not paste unrelated evidence under an assumed ID.

  5. Check both saved link and external stamp

    Asset/Risk/CIA/NIS2/ISP linking can write an external stamp as well as the local reference. Asset/Risk check repeated same-page links; uniform deduplication is not promised for every owner.

  6. Prepare current document content for publication

    In Document Dialog, review the current saved sanitized body, Page Title and Confluence Space. A selected historical version export is not the body used by Publish.

  7. Publish deliberately

    Use Publish to Confluence once. The service may create or upsert an existing same-title page. Confirm the returned page/reference and its actual content before retrying an uncertain result.

  8. Track local and external versions separately

    Publication does not create another local DocumentVersion or approve a policy. Later local changes require deliberate publication; they are not automatically pushed.

  9. Reuse evidence through supported surfaces

    Supplier, VA, Training and Rapid have no dedicated Confluence link/publish control established here. Use reviewed citations in their own workflows without inventing a stored reciprocal link.

  10. Return to the owning decision

    An external page or stamped reference does not finish CIA approval, control implementation, risk treatment or a document review. Check the appropriate record and authority separately.

Link a page once, then verify publication separately

  1. Search the returned pages

    Open Link Confluence Page. Recent results can come from a 15-minute browser cache. Enter nonempty text and Search; blank Search does not issue a new provider request, while * can request recent pages.

  2. Click the intended result

    Verify Page ID, title and URL first. Clicking the returned result immediately posts the link; there is no extra confirmation/Link step after selection. Check the local reference and any owner-specific external stamp.

  3. Publish current saved content

    For Document Dialog Publish, inspect the current saved body and destination, not a historical version you exported. If body retrieval is missing, publication can send only a timestamp; inspect the remote content rather than assuming the document was transferred.

  4. Keep the two version systems separate

    Reconcile same-title create/update and local-reference outcomes. A remote update does not increment local DocumentVersion, approve the policy or automatically publish later edits.

Ask’s space list derives from accessible search pages (first50), not every space. Search, local linking, stamping and current-body publication are different handoffs.

Check the result

A saved external document reference or deliberately published page.

Current limits and common mistakes

Linking a page is not evidence it was reviewed, approved or implemented. An external page’s access can differ from the application’s.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

Who Can Publish vs. Link

Linking a supported page stores a local reference and can stamp the external page. Opening the search modal can reuse valid 15-minute browser-cached recent results; cache miss/expiry can fetch recent pages externally. Explicit nonempty Search calls the provider, while blank Search does not. Linking/stamping are separate effects, so these controls are not purely local bookmarks.

Only Document Dialog publishes

Use Document Dialog for its configured publication action and the link controls provided by other supported modules for existing pages. Available actions depend on the integration and permissions.

ModuleConfluence capability
Document DialogPublish the current saved body to the selected space; same-title upsert can update an existing page. Local and external version history remain separate.
Information Security PolicyLink — Attach an existing Confluence page URL to an ISP section or subsection
Risk ManagementLink — Attach an existing Confluence page to a risk record (e.g. a runbook or remediation plan)
Asset ManagementLink — Attach an existing Confluence page to an asset record (e.g. technical documentation)
CIA ClassificationLink — Attach an existing Confluence page to a CIA evaluation
NIS2 assessmentSupported Link action — selected page reference and external stamp, separate from comprehensive-answer approval.
Admin PanelSearch — Search in the owning module’s Link Confluence modal, using the shared API subject to Admin/Integrations access; no standalone Admin explorer is established
Ask amaraQuery — confluence: prefix searches and retrieves Confluence pages via natural language

How Document Dialog Publishes

1

Generate your document

Use the selected Document Dialog template and its actual fields/content generation. Review and save the current body; generation behavior differs by template and is not always AI drafting.

2

Click "Publish to Confluence"

Review the target space and existing page before publication. Check the resulting page and its content after the operation.

3

Page appears in Confluence

On success, inspect the current-body page/upsert and saved document reference. Publication does not increment a local DocumentVersion, publish a selected old version or automatically republish future changes.

@amara Mentions in Confluence

Where configured, Confluence activity can be surfaced as an in-app notification. The available information and timing depend on the connector configuration and permissions.

Security Scanner Cycle

The Security Scanner runs authorised checks against registered Assets and returns durable technical evidence: service and version observations, curated CVE checks, web/TLS checks and passive discovery where applicable. Findings can feed Risk and Jira work; software observations can support Vulnerability Assurance without automatically closing it.

Start a scoped scan, then inspect what actually ran

Target, tool/preset, job state, coverage and follow-up are separate checks.

Where to start

Start only authorised work on a registered target, then inspect its persisted outcome and evidence.

Security Scanning → selected Asset, Scan type and offered preset

Admin or Security Scanning access to the module; starting requires write access, an enabled/configured ready service and authorised target. VA handoffs add VA workspace/Asset scope. Availability is not consent.

Step-by-step

  1. Select the registered target

    Choose the actual Active saved Asset with an IP/hostname. Do not enter arbitrary URLs/IPs into Ask as a substitute. Check ownership and permitted scope. The current form shows an authorization notice, not a separate acknowledgement checkbox.

  2. Choose the offered type and preset

    The full form has nine families; the Asset modal has seven/no preset, and VA inventory handoff offers only Nmap/Service-to-CVE. Read the scan-type guide before a broader preset.

  3. Inspect readiness and coverage

    Enabled, Online/ready, template coverage and an actual completed scan are different facts. Nuclei’s installed-software/template coverage can be unavailable/unsupported/managed/no access/empty; it is not zero vulnerability evidence. Correct context rather than widening scope blindly.

  4. Start deliberately once

    Read the ownership notice and choose Start scan. The saved result begins queued/pending; opening the form or selecting a target does not execute it. Leave before submission to cancel; queued work is not cancelled by closing its page.

  5. Follow the saved job

    Use its Scan ID/detail/History. Pending 0%, running up to 95% and terminal 100% are estimates; Failed/Unreachable are also terminal 100%. There is no guaranteed ETA or exact remote-tool progress.

  6. Read the result before next action

    Review raw output, interpreted observations, error, scope and child outcomes. Completed/zero/Info-only does not mean secure. Use a specific Risk/Jira/VA action only after evidence review.

Queue, retries and combined runs

The local worker selects oldest eligible work from its first 50 candidates, one concurrent job with lease/heartbeat and earlier-sibling serial gate. Retry limit defaults to 3; retries and late responses can affect timing. A single scan’s configured cooldown defaults 300 seconds, with Admin bypass; this is not target authorization. Comprehensive directly creates DNS→Nmap→TestSSL→Nuclei→Nikto children, not a fresh trigger/per-child cooldown check. Parent retains partial evidence and ends Failed if any child fails, otherwise Unreachable if any is unreachable, otherwise Completed.

Inspect which child actually ran. Nmap zero-host markers yield Unreachable/no observations. Invalid/unrecognized output or malformed XML can parse empty yet Completed. Only completed paths reconcile VA; unreachable verification may attach inconclusive evidence. No scan completion alone creates Risk or Jira.

History, current position and retention

History contains all stored attempts and parent/child rows. Filter Type, Status and ISO From/To dates; both end dates are inclusive, invalid dates are ignored. Reset restores history. The handler has no Asset filter. Current position instead uses a 90-day newest-attempt-per-Asset/type selection; failed newest does not revive older Completed. Activity/trend includes all stored scan attempts. Comprehensive parent/child copied findings are separate type rows, not independent issue deduplication.

Delete is allowed only for terminal scans with no children, external references or VA verification dependencies. Cancel keeps it; blocked deletion means retain linked evidence, not force cleanup. Deletion is not remediation. Read-only users should read permitted evidence rather than assume every metadata view implies write/VA access.

Azure Integration

Configured Azure access can retrieve permitted identity or infrastructure evidence. Requests use the credentials and permissions approved for that deployment.

Azure current-resource import differs from AWS cached import

After import, review the Asset’s ownership, target and lifecycle, then use its separate governance connections.

Where to start

Admin → Azure Sync / enabled cloud resource view

The connector must be enabled and the account allowed for the originating record and specific action.

Before you begin

Use administrator access and the approved tenant/subscription connection.

Controls and inputs

ControlUse it forImportant boundary
Last sync / cached directory tablesSaved users/groups evidencePage inventory is cached; health can still call a provider when stale.
Initial Sync / Resync → Confirm SyncDeliberate external retrievalStores local event/cache; partial or empty results can include an error.
Fetch ResourcesCurrent ARM discoveryConfigured subscription scope: VM, App Service and Storage Account.
Import as AssetExact resource_idServer re-fetches/resolves; browser-supplied name/category is not trusted.
Imported stateAZURE- external ID; active; VA disabledVM→Hardware, App Service→Software, Storage Account→Service; duplicate opens existing Asset.

Step-by-step

  1. Open Azure Sync as Account Admin

    Read the last saved sync time and directory data. A saved sync error is not reliably displayed here; reconcile feedback or missing data with the authorised operator. The tables use saved full-sync events; page availability checks may still contact a provider on cold/expired health cache.

  2. Confirm tenant and evidence purpose

    Directory sync and resource discovery are different operations. The page is not local User provisioning, a rights-copy operation or a full tenant/subscription audit.

  3. Start Initial Sync or Resync deliberately

    Use Confirm Sync to retrieve Entra users/groups and save the local event/cache. Read returned warnings; a newer timestamp does not certify a complete population.

  4. Review partial errors

    An error event can retain partial/empty datasets. Do not interpret failure as no users/groups or as a complete inventory suitable for a compliance assertion.

  5. Fetch current resources when needed

    Fetch Resources contacts ARM for the configured subscription’s supported VM/App Service/Storage Account scope. It is not merely reopening the directory cache.

  6. Select an exact resource to import

    Use Import as Asset with its resource_id. The server re-fetches/provider-resolves it and refuses unconfirmed resources; it does not accept arbitrary browser name/category as cloud proof.

  7. Inspect the created or existing Asset

    The permanent AZURE- ID derives from the resource ID. VM maps Hardware, App Service Software, Storage Account Service; initial owner Azure, active, VA disabled. Duplicate import opens the existing record.

  8. Correct business context in Asset Management

    Verify owner, location, status, target address and provenance. Explicitly opt into VA only where appropriate; record software through the separate supported inventory workflow.

  9. Continue separate governance

    CIA, Supplier links, Risk and authorised Security Scanning need their own actions and access. Cloud retrieval/import neither changes Azure resources nor establishes scan consent or vulnerability proof.

  10. Distinguish Ask queries from sync/import

    Supported azure: queries call their service and do not create these Admin cache events or Asset records simply because evidence appears in chat. Retain exact source/time/scope.

Read directory evidence, then import a resource

  1. Check collection limits

    Users/groups and ARM resources use first-page responses without nextLink traversal. Sign-in queries cap 100; app/conditional-access/risk queries cap 50. An empty or partial response is not a complete tenant inventory.

  2. Interpret identity evidence

    MFA registration is not enforcement. Application, risk, Conditional Access and privileged-user queries need the appropriate provider permission/licence; missing permission or unknown result is not a confirmed negative.

  3. Reconcile sync errors

    The saved sync event can contain an error without displaying it in the page’s error variable. Read returned feedback and ask the authorised operator to reconcile missing data; absence of a visible warning does not establish completeness.

  4. Import and reopen

    Use the exact supported resource’s Import as Asset, then verify the resulting AZURE-identity and business owner/address. It starts active with VA disabled; CIA, Supplier and software/scan evidence require separate actions.

The import is local inventory creation, not Azure resource remediation, Entra provisioning or a complete security audit.

Ask AZURE query catalogue

These are supported reads, not extra Sync fields. For a selector choose the domain/capability, complete any required argument and Compile query once; it submits automatically. For a typed-only entry write the exact example and Send once. Cloud queries need the enabled connector and the captured Admin/Integrations guard, plus provider account permissions. Names, IDs and responses can contain private information: use the approved audience.

Queries, inputs, result fields and coverage
Typed exampleEntry and inputReturned evidence and limit
azure: list all usersSelector: List all Entra ID usersFirst Graph page only. Name, UPN and enabled/disabled; counts describe returned rows, not a fully paginated tenant. Missing accountEnabled defaults false and can display Disabled; that fallback is not confirmed provider state.
azure: list all groupsSelector: List all groupsFirst Graph page. Name, optional email and description; no membership expansion.
azure: show users without MFASelector: Show users without MFAFirst registration-report page, all returned users/methods. Coverage = round(registered / max(returned total, 1) × 100, 1); empty total displays 0%. Missing isMfaRegistered defaults false, not a confirmed negative. Successful zero-row output can still say “All users have MFA registered” because the no-MFA list is empty; that does not prove tenant-wide MFA coverage. Registration is not enforcement. P1/Graph availability applies; failure is not no MFA.
azure: show virtual machines / azure: show all resourcesTwo selector entries; VM sets Microsoft.Compute/virtualMachines; all has no type argumentConfigured subscription, first ARM page; VM-only or VM/App Service/Storage Account. Names, locations, resource groups. Missing subscription asks for operator configuration and displays at most ten accessible subscriptions; no chat subscription picker.
azure: activity logs last 7 daysSelector: Show activity logs; typed last N days, capped 30 (default 7)Graph sign-in events, not ARM resource-operation logs. Up to 100; user/time/app/IP, failed-event detail. P1/permission requirements; UTC cutoff is midnight at the start date, not a precise rolling-hour window.
azure: find user aliceTyped only; name tokenCase-insensitive substring search of returned user page by display name/UPN. Matcher captures a word token, not an arbitrary full email or quoted multiword name. One match adds ID; zero matches is scoped to that page. Missing accountEnabled defaults false and can display Disabled; it is not confirmed provider state.
azure: members of group Security TeamTyped only; group nameFirst substring-matching group from the returned group page, then first direct-members page. Name/UPN/enabled. Verify resolved group; absent group differs from an empty group. Missing accountEnabled defaults true and can display Enabled; not confirmed provider state. Not nested membership.
azure: sign-in risk summaryTyped only; no added fieldsUp to 50 detections, by-level/state summary; displays ten user/level/state/event/activity rows. P1/P2 plus IdentityRiskEvent.Read.All. Not a full historical risk inventory.
azure: app registrationsTyped only; no added fieldsUp to 50 applications, displays 20 names/audience/publisher/created dates. Application.Read.All; not enterprise service principals or credential-expiry analysis.
azure: conditional access summaryTyped only; no added fieldsUp to 50 policies, displays 20 names/state/built-in controls, state/MFA/block counts. P1 plus Policy.Read.All. Policy presence or report-only state is not effective enforcement.
azure: privileged usersTyped only; no added fieldsActivated directory roles and first-page direct members; totals assignments/unique users. Displays 20 populated roles and ten members each. Missing accountEnabled defaults true and can display Enabled; not confirmed provider state. RoleManagement.Read.Directory or Directory.Read.All. Not all PIM eligibility, nested roles or ARM RBAC.
Service reference — parameters and result fields, not extra UI controls

For technical reconciliation only. These are method parameters/defaults and known returned fields (outer and populated nested groups separated by /). Internal filter enums and resource-type values are not result field names. A service signature is not a customer form: use only the selector inputs or typed patterns documented above. Failure uses success=false and error, with licence/permission fields where documented; exceptions and unavailable/unsupported feedback mean no sourced result, not a verified zero. Provider-defined additional fields can vary. A full returned object can contain more than the displayed excerpt.

ServiceBackend parameters/defaultsResult fields
azure:get_entra_usersNonesuccess, data, count, message, response_hint / success, data, count, message / display_name, upn, id, enabled
azure:get_entra_groupsNonesuccess, data, count, message / display_name, description, id, mail, group_types
azure:get_entra_mfa_statusNonesuccess, data, count, message, response_hint / summary, users_without_mfa, all_users / success, error, license_required / success, data, summary, message / total, mfa_registered, mfa_not_registered, mfa_coverage_pct / upn, mfa_registered, methods
azure:get_azure_resourcesresource_type: str=Nonesuccess, data, by_type, count, needs_subscription, subscriptions, message, response_hint / resource_type / id, name, type, resource_type, location, resource_group / id, name
azure:get_activity_logsdays: int=7success, data, count, message, response_hint / logs, failed_sign_ins, period_days / success, error, license_required / success, data, count, period_days, message / timestamp, user, upn, app, status, ip, location
azure:search_entra_userquery: strsuccess, data, count, query, message
azure:get_entra_group_membersgroup_name: strsuccess, data, count, group_name, message / display_name, upn, id, enabled
azure:get_sign_in_risk_summaryNoneadditional provider-defined fields (variable shape), permission_required / success, error, license_required, permission_required / success, data, count, summary, message / by_level, by_state, by_activity / user, upn, risk_level, risk_state, risk_detail, risk_event_type, activity, ip, detected_at, updated_at
azure:get_app_registrationsNoneadditional provider-defined fields (variable shape), permission_required, error / success, data, count, message / display_name, app_id, id, created_at, sign_in_audience, publisher_domain
azure:get_conditional_access_summaryNoneadditional provider-defined fields (variable shape), permission_required / success, error, license_required, permission_required / success, data, count, summary, message / by_state, mfa_policies, block_policies / display_name, id, state, built_in_controls, created_at, modified_at
azure:get_privileged_usersNoneadditional provider-defined fields (variable shape), permission_required, error / success, data, count, summary, message / roles, assignments, unique_users / activated_roles, privileged_assignments, unique_privileged_users / display_name, upn, id, enabled, role / display_name, description, role_template_id, member_count, members
Read → sync → import → governance: separate outcomes
  1. Read the response as scoped evidence

    Check the resolved identity, returned rows, source and time. Failure, unavailable licence/permission, partial result and confirmed zero are different. Keep unknown values explicit.

  2. Use Admin Sync for the saved inventory view

    Ask reads do not create the Admin full-sync event. Use Initial Sync/Resync and Confirm Sync deliberately when a saved cloud inventory is required; reconcile partial errors.

  3. Import only the confirmed resource

    Azure import re-resolves the exact resource ID; AWS import uses instance ID and region from the latest saved full-sync event. Inspect the created or existing Asset, address and owner. No cloud resource is changed.

  4. Continue through the Asset’s own controls

    Asset connections explains CIA, Supplier, Risk and Scanning. VA begins disabled for cloud imports; software inventory and reviewer verification remain separate.

Ask submission and connector limits · Admin inventory and Snapshot · Retain scoped evidence

Check the result

Retrieved cloud evidence and, after deliberate import, a local asset record.

Current limits and common mistakes

Sync/import does not modify a cloud resource’s configuration or prove current compliance. Scope/timestamp and import permission remain relevant.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

Review available evidence

Use the supported Ask amara Azure query or Azure Sync controls, as applicable to the information you need. Check the source scope and timestamp.

Asset import

Where offered, import a reviewed infrastructure record as an Asset. Confirm the resulting details and any address needed for authorised scanning. Cloud inventory alone does not establish installed software or a vulnerability.

AWS Sync — Read-only cloud evidence

AWS Sync is an optional Admin Panel integration. It reads approved evidence from your AWS account, stores a timestamped local snapshot for review, and does not change AWS resources.

Azure current-resource import differs from AWS cached import

After import, review the Asset’s ownership, target and lifecycle, then use its separate governance connections.

Where to start

Admin → AWS Sync → resource snapshot

The connector must be enabled and the account allowed for the originating record and specific action.

Before you begin

Use administrator access and the configured AWS account/region scope.

Controls and inputs

ControlUse it forImportant boundary
Saved full-sync eventIAM, MFA, CloudTrail, EC2 cacheRead actual time/errors/regions, not a live account-wide inventory.
Initial Sync / Resync → Confirm SyncExternal reads + saved eventIAM users/groups/MFA, 25 recent CloudTrail events anchored us-east-1, multi-region EC2.
Regions probed / partial errorsCoverage evidenceEC2 regions are dynamically discovered/attempted; per-region failures can be skipped and timeout results can be partial.
Import as assetExact instance_id + regionResolved from the latest saved sync, not an arbitrary fresh provider lookup.
Imported AssetAWS-{instance_id}, Hardware / AWS EC2Owner AWS, private IP first/public fallback, VA disabled; lifecycle follows state.

Step-by-step

  1. Open AWS Sync as Account Admin

    Read the latest saved full-sync event, account/region context, timestamp and errors. Table rendering is cached; stale health can separately call STS identity.

  2. Choose a deliberate sync

    Initial Sync/Resync then Confirm Sync requests IAM users/groups/MFA, recent 25 CloudTrail events anchored us-east-1 and multi-region EC2. It does not provision local users or change AWS resources.

  3. Inspect actual coverage

    Read regions_probed and partial errors. Regions are dynamically attempted; failures can be skipped and a timeout can yield partial success. This is not proof of every AWS region/service/account.

  4. Keep partial or empty failures explicit

    A new saved event may contain incomplete datasets with an error. Unavailable evidence or the retained CloudTrail resource-rendering qualification must not become a complete cloud audit claim.

  5. Select a confirmed cached EC2 instance

    Use Import as asset on the exact instance_id and region from the latest saved full-sync cache. Arbitrary browser-submitted instances are not accepted as evidence.

  6. Inspect duplicate or new Asset

    ID is AWS-{instance_id}, category Hardware/subcategory AWS EC2 and owner AWS. A duplicate opens the existing Asset; confirm identity and possible name/context collisions.

  7. Read mapped lifecycle and address

    Running→active; stopped/stopping/shutting-down→inactive; terminated→retired; unknown→inactive. Private IP is preferred with public fallback; public IP observation is retained. Verify the reachable authorised scan target separately.

  8. Opt into VA separately

    Imported Asset starts with VA disabled. Enable deliberately, then record installed software through manual, SBOM/inventory or authorised scanner evidence; EC2 metadata is not software or CVE proof.

  9. Continue CIA, Supplier, Risk or scan work

    Open the saved Asset and use its actual connections. No IAM rights, local account grants, assessment approval or cloud remediation follows automatically from sync/import.

  10. Distinguish Ask from the cached page

    aws: IAM/CloudTrail/EC2 queries use their supported service; they are not the saved Admin sync or an Asset import. Unsupported S3/IAM-role/account-wide requests remain unsupported.

Treat attempted coverage and missing values separately

  1. Review the sync scope

    Confirm Sync collects IAM evidence, up to 25 recent CloudTrail events anchored us-east-1, and EC 2 through dynamically discovered/attempted regions. Regions probed counts attempts, not all successful region reads.

  2. Keep partial failures visible in your evidence

    Per-region failures can be skipped and a timeout can return partial data as success. A newer sync timestamp does not certify all regions/services. No fixed 17-region completeness guarantee applies.

  3. Interpret MFA and event fields carefully

    Failed per-user MFA retrieval can appear No or 0 with the underlying error omitted from the page. CloudTrail resource keys can fail to display; blank resource text does not prove there was none.

  4. Import from the correct cache

    Choose the EC 2 instance ID and region from the latest saved full-sync event. Verify the local AWS-Asset, lifecycle and private/public target context. It begins with VA disabled; installed software and remediation are not imported.

Root identity, old-key and last-use queries can have unknown or skipped results. Do not turn unknown into never used/secure; use the scoped provider evidence.

Ask AWS query catalogue

These are supported reads, not extra Sync fields. For a selector choose the domain/capability, complete any required argument and Compile query once; it submits automatically. For a typed-only entry write the exact example and Send once. Cloud queries need the enabled connector and the captured Admin/Integrations guard, plus provider account permissions. Names, IDs and responses can contain private information: use the approved audience.

Queries, inputs, result fields and coverage
Typed exampleEntry and inputReturned evidence and limit
aws: list iam usersSelector: List IAM usersPaginated IAM users; displays username and creation date. IAM identities, not local amara accounts or all federated principals.
aws: list iam groupsSelector: List IAM groupsPaginated IAM groups; name and creation date, not group members or effective permissions.
aws: who has no mfaSelector: Who has no MFA?IAM users and per-user MFA devices; count/device coverage. A failed user lookup can render No/0 with error hidden: verify provider evidence before asserting absent MFA. Valid integer totals produce a two-decimal percentage; zero denominator displays 0%. Successful zero-row output can still say “All IAM users have MFA registered” because the no-MFA list is empty; that does not prove account-wide MFA coverage.
aws: recent cloudtrail eventsSelector: Recent CloudTrail events; no region/count dialogAsk defaults 20 events in us-east-1; name/time/actor. Provider clamps request count to 1–50, without traversing further event pages. Admin sync instead requests 25. Not all regions or full audit history.
aws: ec2 instancesSelector: EC2 instances; no region dialogDynamic attempted regions with paginated EC2 reads; instance/type/state/region/Name tag. Failed or timed-out regions can be skipped with partial success. regions_probed counts attempts, not guaranteed successful coverage.
aws: search iam user aliceSelector: Search IAM user; required IAM user nameCase-insensitive substring search over IAM users. One match adds ARN/created/path; many list names/dates. IAM name token accepts punctuation; no local-user edit.
aws: root account usageTyped only; no added fieldsSTS principal type, account aliases, root MFA, root-key count and MFA-device total. Failed identity can yield unknown; no last-root-login history. No finding means this limited check, not account security certification.
aws: access keys older than 90 daysTyped only; positive whole days (old/stale keys defaults 90). Digit zero is accepted, then falls back to 90—not one. Negative text is not the advertised numeric matcher.Age at or above the effective threshold, oldest first; username, key suffix/status/age/last-use service. Per-user failures can be skipped; missing last-use is unknown, not proof never used.
aws: list inactive iam usersTyped only; matcher fixes 90 days, no editable threshold dialogLatest observed password/key activity, creation-date fallback where none observed; inactive days, source and active-key count. Service has a threshold parameter, not exposed by this typed matcher. Missing observations are not proof of inactivity.
aws: security summaryTyped only; no added fieldsIAM totals/root MFA/root keys/device total and CloudTrail trails in eu-central-1. Failed subqueries can leave unknown/None; findings are limited heuristics, not a complete AWS posture assessment.
Service reference — parameters and result fields, not extra UI controls

For technical reconciliation only. These are method parameters/defaults and known returned fields (outer and populated nested groups separated by /). Internal filter enums and resource-type values are not result field names. A service signature is not a customer form: use only the selector inputs or typed patterns documented above. Failure uses success=false and error, with licence/permission fields where documented; exceptions and unavailable/unsupported feedback mean no sourced result, not a verified zero. Provider-defined additional fields can vary. A full returned object can contain more than the displayed excerpt.

ServiceBackend parameters/defaultsResult fields
aws:get_iam_usersNonesuccess, data, count, message / user_name, user_id, arn, create_date, password_last_used, path
aws:get_iam_groupsNonesuccess, data, count, message / group_name, group_id, arn, create_date, path
aws:get_iam_mfa_statusNonesuccess, data, count, message, response_hint / summary, users_without_mfa, all_users / success, data, summary, message / total, mfa_registered, mfa_not_registered, mfa_coverage_pct / user_name, arn, mfa_registered, device_count, devices / user_name, arn, mfa_registered, device_count, devices, error
aws:get_cloudtrail_recent_eventsmax_results: int=20, region: str='us-east-1'success, data, count, region, message / event_id, event_name, event_time, username, event_source, resources / type, name
aws:get_ec2_instancesregions=Nonesuccess, data, count, regions_probed, message / instance_id, state, instance_type, region, az, launch_time, public_ip, private_ip, tags
aws:search_iam_userquery: strsuccess, data, count, query, message
aws:get_root_account_usageNonesuccess, data, message / current_principal_type, current_session_is_root, account_aliases, root_mfa_enabled, root_access_keys_present, mfa_devices_in_use
aws:get_access_keys_older_thanmin_age_days: int=90success, data, count, threshold_days, message / user_name, access_key_suffix, status, create_date, age_days, last_used_date, last_used_service
aws:get_inactive_iam_usersinactive_days: int=90success, data, count, threshold_days, message / user_name, create_date, last_activity_date, last_activity_source, inactive_days, access_key_count, active_access_key_count
aws:get_aws_security_summaryNonesuccess, data, count, message / users, groups, root_mfa_enabled, root_access_keys_present, mfa_devices_in_use, cloudtrail_trails_eu_central_1, findings / severity, finding, control
Read → sync → import → governance: separate outcomes
  1. Read the response as scoped evidence

    Check the resolved identity, returned rows, source and time. Failure, unavailable licence/permission, partial result and confirmed zero are different. Keep unknown values explicit.

  2. Use Admin Sync for the saved inventory view

    Ask reads do not create the Admin full-sync event. Use Initial Sync/Resync and Confirm Sync deliberately when a saved cloud inventory is required; reconcile partial errors.

  3. Import only the confirmed resource

    Azure import re-resolves the exact resource ID; AWS import uses instance ID and region from the latest saved full-sync event. Inspect the created or existing Asset, address and owner. No cloud resource is changed.

  4. Continue through the Asset’s own controls

    Asset connections explains CIA, Supplier, Risk and Scanning. VA begins disabled for cloud imports; software inventory and reviewer verification remain separate.

Ask submission and connector limits · Admin inventory and Snapshot · Retain scoped evidence

Check the result

Scoped cloud evidence and a deliberately imported local asset where supported.

Current limits and common mistakes

Cloud sync is not an automatic remediation service or a complete cloud account audit.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Diagrams and background

What an explicit sync retrieves

AWS evidenceWhy it matters in amara
IAM users and groupsIdentity and access evidence for assessment and audit work.
IAM MFA statusShows MFA coverage and supports access-control evidence.
Recent CloudTrail eventsSupports audit-log and operational-evidence review.
EC2 instancesLets an administrator import an exact, synchronised compute record into Asset Management.
Cache first, explicit refresh

Opening Admin Panel → AWS Sync displays the most recent local snapshot. The inventory tables do not re-fetch AWS on page load; an availability check may still contact AWS when the health cache is cold or expired. An administrator chooses Initial Sync or Resync to request a fresh read-only pull; the result, time and any partial errors are retained for review.

AWS → Asset → VA workflow

1

Review the AWS snapshot

In Admin Panel → AWS Sync, check connection state, last-sync time, IAM/MFA evidence, CloudTrail results and EC2 inventory.

2

Import one confirmed EC2 instance

Choose an instance from the latest server-side snapshot. amara creates an Asset record from that cloud inventory; it does not infer installed software from the instance alone.

3

Opt in and record software separately

The owner explicitly enables the Asset for Vulnerability Assurance when appropriate, then records software through manual entry, SBOM/inventory or authorised Security Scanner evidence.

4

Review exposure and evidence

VA matches recorded software to public evidence. Use Risk/Treatment, Jira and scanner-supported verification according to the normal governed workflow.

Read-only does not mean no data boundary

AWS Sync makes configured outbound API reads using approved credentials. It is optional and must be enabled intentionally. The sync does not write to AWS, and cloud inventory is not proof of installed software or a vulnerability.

Scan types and presets

Start with the question you need the evidence to answer.

Choose a scan for an authorised registered target

Use the nine-choice and preset guide for exact coverage. Technical evidence informs, rather than replaces, governance.

Where to start

Choose the narrowest suitable family/preset and keep advertised scope separate from retained evidence of what actually ran.

Security Scanning → Scan type → preset where offered

Authorised registered Asset and Scanner/write permission. Preset labels and Admin bypass do not grant legal/target permission.

Step-by-step

  1. Choose the question

    Use network discovery for services, a service-version CVE lookup for potential matches, curated templates for a supported check, TLS/web for their service and DNS/fingerprints/path discovery for observations.

  2. Select one actual family

    The nine-choice form contains Comprehensive, Nmap, Nmap Vulners(Service-to-CVE), Nuclei, Nikto, TestSSL, DNS, WhatWeb and Gobuster. HTTP Headers/Masscan are not extra standalone choices.

  3. Use only the shown preset

    Changing family resets its suitable default; review the table below. Nmap/vuln prefer saved IP; HTTP/TLS/DNS prefer saved hostname for virtual hosts/SNI. Confirm the target rather than substituting a guessed hostname.

  4. Respect the entry surface

    Asset Scan offers seven choices excluding Comprehensive/vuln, no preset selector. Nuclei there uses cve; other families use service defaults. VA inventory offers Nmap/vuln only; exact VA verification fixes vuln for one awaiting location.

  5. Start through the authorised form

    Read notices, coverage and intrusive-scope implications, then Start scan once. Follow queued/child outcomes; compare actual retained coverage with the intended preset, not a fixed duration promise.

All families and their evidence
FamilyPurpose / limitation
ComprehensiveSerial DNS,Nmap,TestSSL,Nuclei,Nikto; partial children retained; worst terminal failure determines parent.
NmapPorts/services/versions; discovery is not proof a CVE affects a patched vendor build.
Nmap Vulners / Service-to-CVEPotential service-version/CVSS matches; investigate vendor identity/backports.
NucleiCurated known-CVE/general-template or technology observations; installed coverage/source metadata limits apply.
NiktoWeb-server observations; discovery reinterpretation can be informational.
TestSSLTLS observations and grouped cipher results; scanner limitations are not target defects.
DNSDNS observations; no automatic vulnerability proof.
WhatWebTechnology fingerprint, informational.
GobusterPaths/DNS discovery, informational until reviewed.
Every offered preset and default
FamilyVisible choices / default
NmapQuick—Top 100 ports(~1 min); Standard—Ports 1–1000(recommended DEFAULT); Full TCP—All 65535(~15–30 min); UDP Top—Top 100 UDP(~15 min); Aggressive—OS+Vuln scripts(~20 min). These are labels/estimates, not verified deployed commands or promises.
NucleiKnown CVEs—Curated checks(DEFAULT cve); Broader vulnerabilities—General templates(vuln); Technology fingerprint—Informational(tech).
NiktoHTTPS 443(DEFAULT); HTTP 80; HTTPS 8443.
TestSSLHTTPS 443(DEFAULT); HTTPS 8443.
GobusterHTTPS directories—Curated paths(DEFAULT dir-https); HTTP directories(dir-http); DNS names—Curated wordlist(dns).
Other familiesNo additional universal preset control. Use retained result metadata to establish actual coverage.
Installed-CVE coverage and combined execution

Nuclei coverage lookup reads supported installed-template context, not a target scan. Empty software, no supported template, managed/no-access/unavailable context are different results; the submit handler revalidates coverage. Generic/unknown remote metadata is not proof zero templates ran. Actual deployed remote tool versions/templates/arguments are not certified by local labels or comments.

Comprehensive’s five children are directly queued serially; no per-child cooldown promise. Single-trigger default 300-second cooldown/Admin bypass is separate from permission/safety. Do not treat a failed or unreachable child as a clean combined run; a version match is not exploitation or legal consent.

Read results and create follow-up

Have the selected asset, scan time, type and preset in view.

Technical evidence becomes owned follow-up only after an explicit decision, then requires verification and review

Evidence, decisions, owned work and verified outcomes are separate stages.

Where to start

Interpret a scoped technical observation, then make a deliberate business or remediation handoff.

Security Scanning → History → Scan detail / report

Use the current permitted Scanner/record session. Risk, external ticket and VA actions add their own role/write/scope guards; unavailable tenant VA context is not evidence no VA work exists elsewhere.

Step-by-step

  1. Identify the run and outcome

    Check Asset/target, Scan ID/type/preset, time, raw coverage/error and Pending/Running/Completed/Failed/Unreachable state. Parent/child coverage matters. Terminal 100% is not passing.

  2. Inspect raw and interpreted observations

    Use the available raw/finding/severity/coverage views. Info/OK, discovery interpretation and excluded rows are not actionable vulnerabilities. Missing Nuclei metadata means Not recorded, not zero template execution.

  3. Review applicability

    For a Potential version match, inspect installed build, source CVE, vendor advisory and backports. A Critical label is not proof of exploitation or an active incident. Confirm the raw observation before escalation.

  4. Choose exact Risk or deliberate Jira

    Create Risk on an indexed observation opens unsaved Identification with the exact source token/evidence; human save makes reciprocal linkage and no automatic Jira/Treatment. Whole/finding Jira requires actionable evidence and offers generated read-only ticket fields, not an editable general modal.

  5. Inspect linked governance after Jira

    Whole/finding ticket success can create/reuse Risk/Treatment using the worst WHOLE scan severity, even when the ticket concerned one finding. Confirm key/local reference, score and work before retrying.

  6. Verify technical work separately

    After a real change, use suitable authorised fresh evidence. For VA follow its exact location/attempt/reviewer controls; a clean-looking result or ticket resolution does not bulk-close CVEs.

Tool-specific severity and parser limits
ToolInterpretation
Nmap VulnersMaximum CVSS per open-port row:0 Info; >0 Low; ≥4 Medium; ≥7 High; ≥9 Critical. Several CVEs can share one port row.
Other NSE/host scriptsApplication script/output classification; negative-pattern text becomes Info. Version/banner evidence can be only potential applicability.
NucleiTemplate severity; malformed lines can be skipped; coverage metadata is not a finding.
NiktoMessage heuristics plus discovery-only reinterpretation; not every service observation is a vulnerability.
TestSSLSource severity, WARN→Low, placeholders dropped, scanner limitations Info, grouped ciphers use worst source severity.
DNS/WhatWeb/GobusterInformational discovery, not automatic business-risk or exploit evidence.

Empty parsed Completed can result from unsupported/malformed output. Nmap zero-host is Unreachable. Certificate expiry parsing does not calculate the 30-day threshold merely described in a comment, and HSTS text presence can be classified Medium without proving a missing header. Preserve raw output and review the actual evidence; do not treat those heuristics as validated conditions.

Jira and automatic Risk/Treatment example

Only actionable whole/finding evidence permits its Jira action; Info/OK does not. Generated title/description/priority are read-only; no extra ticket fields are implied. Shared provider adapter can turn priority/labels into DESCRIPTION text. Verify provider key and local reference; success is not atomic local/provider reconciliation.

Worst whole-scan Low/Medium/High/Critical →L=I=1/2/3/4 →initial Risk 1/4/9/16. Reuse looks for eligible Open/Assessed/In Progress Risk with same Asset name and scan_type; manual null scan_type does not match. If none, the helper creates work; if no Treatment, initial progress 20%/target 30 days. Fictional Medium finding in a scan containing Critical can yield an initial 16 Risk through the ticket helper. Human exact-finding Identification is a separate unsaved handoff, not this automation.

Three report populations and a repeat/failure example
ReportActual selection / limit
Per Scan HTMLInterpreted observations for one run; TestSSL/Nikto exclude case-insensitive OK/INFO from severity sections and label denominator. Full CVEs per finding; Nmap/NSE table can omit script/title detail—retain raw evidence.
Asset HTML90 days, newest attempt per type. Failed newest does not revive earlier Completed; activity uses all attempts. Severity list shows first 3 CVEs per finding.
Estate executive HTML90 days newest attempt per Asset/type, then Completed current evidence only; activity/trend counts all stored attempts. Comprehensive parent and child copies can both count. Top 5 Assets use severity counts, not business-risk score; Top 10 CVEs use first 5 IDs per finding, include Info IDs and are not complete/unique issue inventory.

Fictional day 1 Nmap Completed with 5 observations, day 2 Nmap Failed: current Nmap contributes no completed evidence, History retains both attempts. A Comprehensive parent copying 3 findings and its child with 3 can contribute 6 displayed observations across types, not 6 independently discovered vulnerabilities. Failed/partial newer work must remain visible.

Potential Critical version match is not a proven incident even if an estate action line says Treat as active incident. Missing metadata, truncated lists and zero current totals are not all-clear. Browser Print/PDF is a client action; retained external chart/style dependencies and offline print rendering need actual output review, not assumed acceptance.

History CSV is one row per scan

Set History Type/Status and ISO From/To, Reset to clear. End dates are inclusive; invalid dates are ignored and there is no Asset filter. Export CSV uses the same filters, not finding-level raw output.

scan_id,scan_type,scan_profile,target,asset_id,status,findings_count,critical_findings,started_at,completed_at,triggered_by_user_id,error

These 12 columns represent scan rows; findings_count is the stored scan field and Critical is interpreted count. Error text is single-line/truncated 500 characters. An export 500/failure is not an empty valid file—reconcile before sharing. HTML reports, raw evidence and browser Print/PDF are distinct outputs.

Supplier assurance: certificates and questionnaires

Use a permitted supplier account and the actual supplier evidence. Internal approval and assurance are separate records.

Three internal phases and a distinct assurance panel. Edit resets approval; questionnaire creation does not send an invitation.

Two separate decisions: internal approval above, filed assurance below. Neither changes Asset, CIA or Risk automatically.

Where to start

File reviewed assurance evidence or a scoped questionnaire decision independently of procurement approval.

Supplier detail → Security Assurance → View assurance and supporting records

Internal Supplier Due Diligence/write access for evidence/review. The scoped public invitation lets its bearer answer only that questionnaire, not read internal Supplier records or acquire a module role.

Step-by-step

  1. Check the separate assurance status

    A valid retained PDF takes precedence; otherwise qualification can come from the latest filed approved questionnaire review. Fully Approved procurement is not this assurance. Check service scope, dates, withdrawal/revocation and reviewed decision.

  2. File reviewed PDF evidence

    Choose ISO 27001 or SOC 2 Type II, enter Issuer/Auditor, Supplier/service scope and Review valid until, select the qualifying PDF and explicitly confirm review. Choose File reviewed evidence, then inspect its retained record.

  3. Create an invitation only when intended

    Choose Create scoped questionnaire link. It displays a relative seven-day bearer link; it sends no email. Resolve it against your approved deployment origin when sharing through an authorised process, not localhost/offline Help. Keep the token private.

  4. Respond and submit the complete answer set

    The invited person may Save draft with incomplete name/answers; limits still apply. Submit for internal review requires name, all 20 answers and a note for every non-Yes answer. Submission locks responses; an expired/revoked link cannot be used.

  5. Review internally once

    Read every answer and supporting evidence. Choose Internal decision Approved/Rejected; enter Verification performed, findings and conditions; confirm verification/responsibility. Approval also requires Review valid until today or later. File internal review result once.

  6. Withdraw or revoke the correct item

    Withdraw evidence needs a reason and retains the PDF bytes. Revoke link and assurance result ends token use/qualification; repeated revoke is harmless and is separate from PDF withdrawal. Reassess with new current evidence rather than editing a final historical review.

Evidence and review validation
InputRule
Evidence kindISO 27001 / SOC 2 Type II, not arbitrary certificate categories.
Issuer / scopeRequired; issuer ≤200, covered Supplier/service scope ≤2000.
Review valid until / reviewed confirmationRequired date ≥today and explicit reviewed=yes.
PDF≤5 MiB; filename ≤200; strict readable unencrypted PDF with ≥1 page. Format/hash checks do not establish authenticity, malware safety or certified service scope.
Respondent name / notesName ≤100 required at submit; Yes/No/Partial/Not applicable for every question; each non-Yes explanation ≤1000.
Internal decision / verification notesSubmitted, unrevoked current-version complete questionnaire only; Approved/Rejected, required notes ≤4000 and verified=yes. Valid date ≥today required for approval.
Withdrawal reasonRequired ≤2000; once-only, retains bytes.
All 20 questionnaire subjects
QuestionWhat the respondent must assess
01Named person accountable for information security
02Current approved security policy communicated to staff
03Risks assessed and tracked to treatment/acceptance
04Regular security-awareness training
05Confidentiality obligations for staff/contractors
06Individually assigned accounts and approved access
07MFA for privileged/remote access
08Prompt removal on leaving or role change
09Restricted and periodically reviewed privileged accounts
10Inventoried systems with accountable owners
11Vulnerabilities/patches managed to defined deadlines
12Endpoints protected and monitored for malicious activity
13Sensitive information encrypted in transit/at rest
14Customer access/retention limited to agreed purposes
15Security events logged, monitored and investigated
16Exercised incident response/customer notification responsibilities
17Protected backups and tested restoration
18Tested continuity/disaster recovery plans
19Assessed subcontractors with security obligations
20Security-reviewed changes/development before release

For every row choose Yes, No, Partial or Not applicable. Explain every choice other than Yes; “Not applicable” is not an explanation by itself. Review actual claims, not merely the number of Yes answers. Save draft is not submission or internal approval.

Precedence and safe error recovery

Current qualification uses the newest valid retained/unwithdrawn PDF first, otherwise the latest filed questionnaire decision if approved, valid, unrevoked and complete/current-version. Rejection/expiry/revocation does not revive an old questionnaire approval; an unreviewed invitation does not supersede a filed decision. Check the visible reason rather than an old badge.

Expired/revoked invitation returns 410; already submitted/locked returns 409. An expired form returns 400: reload and correct/refill rather than forging a token or repeated submit. Draft validation errors are not approval. Internal review rejects stale version/incomplete answers/invalid dates; a final decision cannot be rewritten as renewal. Evidence download is Supplier/evidence-scoped and private/no-store; hash mismatch 409 requires operator reconciliation, not unsafe sharing or a blind retry. These integrity checks do not certify the evidence’s truth.

Formal risk acceptance

Have the business decision, approving person, current controls and review period ready.

Selected Risk assessment, treatment and formal acceptance have different persistence and immediate side effects.

Read acceptance side effects before saving. Completing work, reassessing residual risk and accepting exposure are distinct actions.

Where to start

Record the business decision to tolerate a Risk for a stated period, with explicit evidence and approver context.

Risk Management → Risk Acceptance → eligible Risk; or inspect a Risk’s acceptance detail

Risk Assessment access and write permission. The ordinary selector offers Open/In Progress/Assessed Risks; a job title is not independently enforced approval authority.

Step-by-step

  1. Select the intended Risk

    Confirm display ID, scenario, score and existing acceptance evidence. The ordinary reader can show the first acceptance record, so inspect dates/history rather than assuming it shows the latest of repeated records.

  2. Enter complete business reasons

    Business Justification, Cost-Benefit, Compensating Controls, Approver and Approver Title are all required. Document current evidence and who actually made the decision; do not accept preset text as proof.

  3. Choose an offered period

    Select 3, 6, 9 or 12 Months. Review date is a calculated/read-only calendar-period result. The handler’s additional 24-month recognition is not an offered ordinary form option.

  4. Submit once and inspect consequences

    Formal submission creates an Acceptance, sets Risk Accepted and marks unfinished Treatments Superseded. Check saved dates, approver and remaining work. Repeat form submission is not idempotent and can add another record.

  5. Review expiry through the correct workflow

    This ordinary UI has no formal edit/renew/cancel wizard and does not automatically reopen Risk on expiry. Record the review need through approved business workflow. VA’s linked-risk expired-renewal path is separate.

Compare every Accepted path
Path to AcceptedWhat actually saves
Update Status modal → AcceptedStatus/audit comment only. No formal RiskAcceptance record.
Edit Risk → AcceptedIf absent, creates a six-month acceptance with preset rationale. Inspect those presets; they are not business approval by the named person.
Create NEW Treatment type AcceptSets Risk Accepted; creates preset six-month acceptance if absent. Editing existing type Accept is not that creation path.
Formal Risk Acceptance formRequired business evidence and approver/title, visible 3/6/9/12 months; unfinished Treatments become Superseded.
VA linked-risk acceptanceDifferent form, roles and expiry/renewal path; 3/6/12/24 months, no 9.
History, repeat and role limits

Cancel/leave before submitting saves no new acceptance; closing after a successful submission does not undo it. A form error is not proof a previous attempt failed to save—inspect existing records. Ordinary formal acceptance does not enforce a distinct-person/professional authority policy. The retained three-phase Risk approval route/legacy template is not this form and does not enforce its apparent confirmations/progression. A lifecycle illustration is guidance, not a running approval engine.

Environmental context and priority

Use the actual installation, CIA facts and business environment.

Vulnerability Assurance workflow from recorded software to verified outcome

Record software, match evidence, prioritise and act, then verify each finding before closure.

Where to start

Adjust internal urgency for the actual installation context while preserving public severity and CIA facts.

Open Asset settings → Asset → Vulnerabilities → amara Environmental Score

The Asset must be VA-enabled and in scope. Asset access plus VA write eligibility are required. This is not a current network-zone/environment wizard.

Step-by-step

  1. Read the baseline

    Confirm Asset, current factor and affected installations. Baseline is ×1.00; public CVSS remains the source measurement.

  2. Set the offered slider

    Use Internal priority adjustment from ×0.30 to ×1.50 in 0.05 steps. Choose the factor using documented business context; do not infer automatic CIA-profile inputs.

  3. Save and re-score

    Choose Save adjustment and re-score active VA work. The backend bounds the factor and quantizes to 0.01; that is not an additional 0.01-step UI control.

  4. Inspect changed work

    The highest active affected installation factor determines campaign urgency. Active affected/accepted locations can be rescored; public CVSS and the relevance match remain unchanged. Due dates can change for initial-review cases, not universally for every historical deadline.

Calculation, thresholds and fictional examples
RuleMeaning
Scoremin(10, public CVSS × highest active affected factor), rounded to 0.1 HALF UP.
PriorityP1≥9; P2≥7; P3≥4; P4 below 4. KEV forces P1. Missing CVSS remains unscored unless KEV.
Example ACVSS 6.0 ×1.50 =9.0 →P1. CVSS 9.8 ×1.50 caps at 10.0, not 14.7.
Example BCVSS 8.5 ×0.50 =4.25 →4.3 →P3. A second active affected location at ×1.00 makes the headline 8.5/P2.
KEV / missingAn exploitation signal can force P1 even without a numeric source score; no source score is not measured zero.

This is amara internal prioritisation, not official CVSS environmental scoring, a new CIA answer or proof a flaw was fixed.

Separate retained factor approval

The current slider saves directly. No current network-zone/environment/exposure/business-controls/CIA-ID questionnaire drives this formula. Admin can expose retained Factor reductions awaiting approval: another authorised actor must approve, not the requester. That handler records approval metadata; it does not itself overwrite the slider or rescore. Its registered role allowance is broader than the Admin page entry, not a universal new approval wizard.

Reports, notifications and administration

Use the role allowed for the specific workspace action.

Keep the source, output and approval evidence together

Current projections, frozen snapshots and version bodies support reviewed evidence, not universal certification.

Where to start

Maintain permitted workspace access and public intelligence, then retain a correctly scoped operational snapshot.

VA → Administration / Notifications / Reports

VA must be enabled. Workspace roles and read-only restrictions apply independently of account administration.

Step-by-step

  1. Grant or remove only VA access

    In Administration choose Person and Vulnerability Assurance role, then Grant access or Remove role. The person/assignment must belong to this workspace. Reactivating/granting a role does not create a global account; revoking it does not delete one.

  2. Synchronize public intelligence deliberately

    Use Synchronize now, review the modal, then Start synchronization. Already running means another cycle owns the work, not a second successful import. Inspect the resulting source, publication and health states separately.

  3. Use notifications as routing receipts

    Choose Current or Reviewed. Open campaign reviews pending grouped receipts for that recipient/workspace and opens its work. View campaign is navigation; neither closes the case, verifies remediation nor proves email delivery. Open campaign writes routing receipt state and can be denied to read-only users; use permitted View campaign navigation instead.

  4. Create a snapshot for current evidence

    With report-author access, choose Create report once. It has no arbitrary period/type/filter selector: it freezes the current permitted workspace projections. The list shows the newest 30 saved reports.

  5. Read and export the saved run

    Inspect time, recipient/workspace, generator/schema and each population. View/Save as HTML later reads saved data rather than recomputing it. Use Print for browser PDF; there is no native server PDF/CSV export here.

Exact workspace action-role matrix
ActionPermitted VA roles
Read VAcustomer_admin, it_owner, action_owner, management, risk_owner, auditor, reviewer, technical_admin.
Ordinary writesAll above except pure management/auditor; read-only accounts denied.
Administration / synchronizationcustomer_admin, technical_admin.
Read/download reportsmanagement, auditor, risk_owner, customer_admin, technical_admin.
Generate reportsrisk_owner, customer_admin, technical_admin: report access AND write.
Review technical verificationreviewer, risk_owner, customer_admin, technical_admin.
Create Risk/Treatmentrisk_owner, customer_admin, technical_admin; linked Asset required.
Formal VA risk acceptancerisk_owner or customer_admin; distinct linked-risk/business/state guards.
Jira from VAaction_owner, risk_owner, customer_admin, technical_admin with initial confirmed affected state.
Global AdminAccess bypasses workspace role tests, not feature enablement or read-only write denial. Other module access remains separate.
Source load, publication and health are different
StateInterpretation
never_loaded / failedNo adequate loaded evidence or failed source work; not an empty secure corpus.
partial / staleIncomplete sources/history or age beyond threshold. Default stale threshold 36 hours is configurable.
currentPublished snapshot, required-source success, no source errors and historical baseline; a health label, not complete applicability certification.

A manual sync may bootstrap historical NVD or use incremental 48 hours, refresh KEV/optional cache and prune rebuildable non-KEV public history (default 10 years, configurable). It is not customer inventory publication or backup. Ingest deduplicates source+record ID+payload hash; changed records replace that source’s affected rows and retain deduplicated references. KEV enriches exploitation/due/ransomware, not ordinary canonical hash/version applicability.

Batches commit every 500 fetched records: a later failed run retains prior commits. Publication normally requires a past successful load for enabled required sources (configured force can override), not fresh/error-free/full historical sources. A new published hash/ID supersedes the prior current snapshot; inspect source cursors/times and health rather than treating Published as Current. Never promise fixed duration or complete rollback.

Public-source and advice limitations

NVD prioritizes CVSS 4.0/3.1/3.0/2 and Primary metrics; flattened affected CPEs do not preserve all AND/OR/negation logic. CVE List CNA rows retain platform/version statements, while matching does not enforce a separate platform gate. KEV has no exact-version range; its validated official catalog transport is not durable ingestion-success proof.

Local corpus matching is separate from worker outbound configured OSV advice: package coordinates/recorded version can leave the application, not the full Asset/customer record. Advice failures, mismatched batches or over 1,000 advisory IDs can make advice unavailable; the eight concurrent advisory reads and six-hour cache are implementation limits, not customer controls. Use the software/campaign guides rather than guessing coverage.

Snapshot populations and output variants
SectionDenominator / meaning
Effective-open casesAll tenant effective-open cases, not just actionable installed campaigns.
CampaignsActive installed confirmed package/version work, excluding Accepted/Done and already_fixed advice.
Recipient noticesGrouped notices for this recipient/workspace; awaiting groups are not a count of delivered messages.
Workspace deliveriesAll-workspace routing/delivery counts, a different recipient/population.
Location states / Jira linksIndividual CVE locations, including retained inactive/terminal locations; links are not unique tasks.

Fictional snapshot: six effective-open CVEs across two installed campaigns, three recipient groups and eight workspace deliveries are four compatible counts, not 6=2=3=8. Zero campaigns is not all-clear. The input hash is canonical snapshot JSON integrity, not a signature, certification or evidence-authenticity test.

V2 requires BOTH generator_version and schema va-report-v2. It freezes recipient/workspace/software/list/installation identities and per-CVE states. Otherwise legacy renders its stored priority/stage/relevance/notices/Jira-link evidence. Online legacy case links open live records; exported HTML omits actions and those live links. Save as HTML exports the stored snapshot. Print uses browser A4 portrait for legacy and landscape for v2; locale changes rendering, not the saved hash. Inspect the actual output before sharing; this guide does not certify offline charts or print layout.

No separate current Acknowledge button

The template offers Open campaign, not a second Acknowledge action. A retained registered acknowledgement endpoint has an unbound helper in the inspected source and must not be used as a customer workflow. Its repair/runtime verification is separate. Retained factor approvals also require another actor and only mark metadata; they are not a present environment-profile editor.

Assessment connections

Keep the intended framework and saved assessment identity in context.

Separate framework reviews supported by shared record context

Shared records can support several reviews, while each framework keeps its own scope, requirements and decision.

Where to start

Selected assessment → offered response/evidence, gap or integration control

Each framework, business record and provider action has its own access/stage.

Before you begin

Keep framework/assessment identity, scope and evidence version/time.

Step-by-step

  1. Use Asset/CIA context precisely

    Select the existing Asset for CIA where offered. For organisational framework work, cite the intended Asset/evaluation as evidence; do not invent automatic attachment to every Asset.

  2. Use Supplier evidence precisely

    Distinguish saved dependency, internal phase approval and independent assurance. Cite current evidence/expiry and the intended service, not just Fully Approved.

    Assurance is separate from internal phase approval

  3. Use versions and learning records

    Cite exact Document ID/version, actual ISP section and learner/course/result/date/certificate. Document generation or a course assignment does not implement the assessed control.

    Cite the exact stored version

  4. Record the owning response

    Enter evidence/notes through the selected module’s form and its actual Save/Submit lifecycle. A typed reference is not universally a validated foreign key or imported answer.

  5. Create follow-up deliberately

    Use the module’s offered gap/remediation fields; use a separately created Risk for business governance where justified. Eligible gap-specific Jira creation writes external work, not automatic answer completion.

    Separate Risk governance

  6. Review after work

    Update/review the owning response and inspect its current gap/implementation/report result. Jira closure, another framework’s status and technical non-detection do not universally change this assessment.

Relationship reference — stored actions and manual evidence
Related moduleConnectionMeaningProcedure
Assets / CIAEvidence referenceProtection need is evidence for the selected organisational control/question.Open guide
SuppliersEvidence referenceApproval, dependency and assurance are distinct evidence.Open guide
Documents / ISPVersioned draft / referenceCite the reviewed version or source section; document existence is not implementation.Open guide
TrainingCompletion evidenceUse learner/course/date context, not a catalogue count.Open guide
RiskSeparate governance recordA gap can motivate risk work; confirm actual stored associations.Open guide
JiraOptional gap-specific taskCreating a task does not universally update response/approval state.Open guide

Check the result

Evidence reused by explicit identity and a separately saved assessment decision.

Current limits and common mistakes

No universal evidence graph, automatic cross-framework score, approval propagation or legal assurance is established.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

NIS2 connections

Keep the relevance/comprehensive assessment and intended entity clear.

NIS2 relevance, assessment and remediation workflow

Assess relevance, record the scoped responses and plan owned follow-up actions; the result remains subject to review.

Where to start

NIS2 relevance/result or selected Comprehensive assessment → owning remediation/evidence action

Dedicated NIS2 access applies; Admin/General alone is not a bypass. Shared-demo exceptions do not authorise manual item/provider writes.

Before you begin

Confirm the intended entity and exact relevance/Comprehensive identity; preserve existing plan evidence before reassessment.

Step-by-step

  1. Carry the intended entity context

    Open Comprehensive from the intended relevance result or select the correct saved assessment explicitly. A relevance result is not authoritative legal acceptance and does not complete Comprehensive responses.

    Exact NIS2 lifecycle

  2. Use the actual remediation editor

    In Remediation Planning inspect Title, Description, Category, Priority, Target Completion Date, Status, Progress and Implementation Notes where offered. There is no Assignee/Owner field: use Description/Implementation Notes or a supported external task for responsibility.

  3. Check retention after reassessment

    Reassessment can affect manual/open plans. Preserve prior evidence and reopen the intended assessment/items to inspect what remains, rather than assuming a universal merge or immutable plan history.

  4. Use Risk governance separately

    Create or review a separately identified Risk for material business exposure. NIS2 answer status and a formal Risk Acceptance record are different decisions.

    Create the separate governance record

  5. Cite supporting evidence deliberately

    Use exact policy version, Supplier assurance/decision, Asset/CIA context and learner completion where relevant. Their existence does not answer the questionnaire or close the plan.

    Check current assurance evidence

  6. Use provider/report actions with scope

    Create eligible Jira work or link the supported assessment Confluence context deliberately and inspect both outcomes. Use exact Comprehensive Export Report/Export Assessments scope; old legacy PDF is different.

  7. Return to the owning response

    After work, review saved response/evidence/plan state and open gaps. A resolved ticket, report generation or evidence citation is not universal automatic closure.

Relationship reference — stored actions and manual evidence
Related moduleConnectionMeaningProcedure
Relevance → comprehensiveEntity context handoffCheck the carried entity and selected saved assessment.Open guide
RemediationAssessment-specific itemsMaintain and verify each intended plan; reassessment persistence is qualified.Open guide
Assets / suppliers / documentsManual supporting evidenceCite the actual facts and versions rather than assuming automatic answers.Open guide
Risk / JiraGovernance / optional trackingEach requires its deliberate action and review.Open guide

Check the result

Entity-specific responses and follow-up whose identities, evidence and limits can be traced.

Current limits and common mistakes

Use the detailed NIS2 guide for accepted calculations, Track limitations, partial-save/error branches and export bodies. No legal compliance or automatic persistence guarantee is added here.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Document connections

Use the exact document/version and the module question it supports.

A saved document can support several different handoffs

Solid arrows are explicit external actions; dashed lines are manual evidence/context.

Where to start

Saved Document → eligible Jira/Confluence control or manual evidence citation

Use document/integration access and the owning workflow’s actual controls.

Before you begin

Keep exact Document ID/version, intended provider destination and purpose of reuse.

Step-by-step

  1. Read the Map shortcut correctly

    The Information Security Policy header on Document Map opens the latest saved Document Dialog document only when its uniquely matched template and a document exist. Without one it is not a link. Use separate Policy Reference navigation for the ISP library.

    Separate ISP reference

  2. Create a specific review task

    Use Create Review Ticket. Check fixed ITSEC project, required Summary, optional Description, Priority Low/Medium/High/Critical (Medium default), Type Task/Bug/Story (Task default) and comma Labels. Cancel or Create Ticket once; an existing-ticket warning can accompany another created ticket.

  3. Verify Jira and local reference

    Keep returned issue key and Document ID. External success/local linking can differ. Ticket completion is not document approval or a new saved version; shared priority/label payload limitations are explained in the Jira guide.

  4. Publish only the current readable body

    Use required Page Title and offered ISC. Same-title upsert can change a remote page. Inspect actual remote body and local reference; it does not increment the local version or republish later changes.

    Current-body publication

  5. Cite exact evidence elsewhere

    In Risk/SoA/framework/Supplier/Asset/VA/Training work, use the intended Evidence/Notes fields with Document ID/version/date. Text references are not universally validated foreign keys, transferred answers or training acknowledgement.

    Cite a version in assessment evidence

  6. Treat Ask and ISP as supporting content

    Ask output is not a DocumentVersion until explicitly saved. Reading policy reference does not adopt it; document generation does not implement its controls or complete a course.

  7. Do not assume shared Refresh is document-scoped

    In External References inspect the linked ID/title, provider status and Updated time. A pending resolved-ticket banner can offer Review, which navigates to the privileged Pending Reviews workflow; that navigation neither approves/adopts policy nor saves a document version. Follow the linked review guide and its access/consequence rules. The shared default Refresh still uses a Risk endpoint for some Document/ISP consumers: this is an unresolved owner-routing limitation, not a proven working Document refresh.

    Pending Reviews — access and decision consequences

Relationship reference — stored actions and manual evidence
Related moduleConnectionAction, saved result and boundaryInstructions
Template / Document / VersionStored authoring chainCreating another Document differs from Save New Version; authored Approvals text is not a system approval.Open guide
ConfluenceExternal body publish/upsertCurrent sanitized body can create/update a page and store reference. External/local histories differ; later edits do not auto-publish.Open guide
JiraExternal review taskCreate Review Ticket stores a document reference; resolution does not approve/adopt policy or save a local version.Open guide
ISPSource reference versus saved document shortcutDocument Map can open the latest Document Dialog policy; the separate source-policy reader is different. No automatic approval/acknowledgement.Open guide
Risk / SoA / other assessmentsManual evidence citationEnter exact ID/version/reviewed scope. Placeholders are not automatically validated foreign keys or assessment answers.Open guide
Assets / Suppliers / VAManual factual referenceUse current identities, services, installations and decisions; prose does not mutate those records.Open guide
TrainingManual evidence/contextTraining contact or acknowledgement paragraph does not complete a course or record acknowledgement.Open guide
Ask amaraGoverned retrieval/draftAdvice is not a persisted DocumentVersion unless explicitly saved through Document Dialog.Open guide

Check the result

Explicitly identified evidence or provider action, with its independent saved outcome checked.

Current limits and common mistakes

No automatic cross-framework answer, policy approval, training acknowledgement or universal provider synchronisation follows from a document reference.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Policy reference connections

Locate the actual topic and scope before citing it.

Policy reference, document versions and external tasks differ

Read the applicable source in context; perform document changes and workflow decisions in their actual modules.

Where to start

Information Security Policy → intended section/subsection → Integrations

Reading and external writes have different requirements. UI visibility is not a complete server-permission assurance.

Before you begin

Confirm whether the reference is the full section or a particular subsection before creating/linking anything.

Step-by-step

  1. Identify and read the source

    Retain the section/subsection URL and context. Ask retrieval can return broader/fixed guidance; verify the actual source before attributing a passage to a precise subsection.

  2. Create a Jira task deliberately

    Use Integrations → Create Jira Ticket with the section context. Check Project ITSEC, required Summary, optional Description/Labels, Priority and Type. Cancel or Create Ticket once. A task/reference is not signed policy approval.

    Jira modal and payload

  3. Search Confluence separately

    On a full section, Open ISC Space is separate external navigation to the fixed ISC Confluence space, not a link/write or publication. It is not offered in the subsection dropdown. For linking use Link Confluence Page: opening can use recent pages or a 15-minute browser cache, while Search/Enter with a nonempty query requests new results. This modal has no offered space filter.

  4. Check before clicking a result

    Verify Page ID/title/URL first. Clicking the result immediately submits the link; there is no extra confirmation. The local deduplicated reference can save before a remote timestamp-update attempt.

    Linking and remote stamp

  5. Reconcile partial outcomes

    In External References inspect linked ID/title, provider status and Updated time. A pending resolved-ticket banner can offer Review, which navigates to the privileged Pending Reviews workflow; it does not approve/adopt policy or save a version. A failed Confluence stamp can leave the link saved. Inspect both sides before repeating. Shared default Refresh can route to Risk for ISP consumers, and hash-based section identity is not a guaranteed stable cross-restart key.

    Pending Reviews — permissions and saved effects

  6. Use evidence in the owning workflow

    Adapt reference into a reviewed DocumentVersion or cite the exact topic in assessment/learning evidence. Neither reading, querying nor linking completes a course, implements a control or records organisational adoption.

    Create reviewed organisational content

Relationship reference — stored actions and manual evidence
Related moduleConnectionMeaningProcedure
AskRetrieval sourceInspect the actual section when a generated citation is uncertain.Open guide
Document DialogAdaptation / maintained versionCreate and review organisational content separately.Open guide
Jira / ConfluenceOptional contextual actionSection/subsection reference must be explicit.Open guide
Assessments / TrainingSupporting contentUse the relevant source; no automatic completed-control or course state.Open guide

Check the result

A precise source reference and, only when intended, inspected external/local outcomes.

Current limits and common mistakes

No universal stable provider-refresh workflow, atomic link/stamp transaction or automatic policy acknowledgement is established.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Training connections

Use the learner/course identity and the relevant period.

An account administrator assigns curriculum. Learners complete cards and submit quizzes; qualifying quiz submission creates a certificate. Renewal resets progress.

Retain required certificate evidence before Renew. A certificate is course completion, not policy approval or a technical control test.

Where to start

Learner course/progress/certificate → owning evidence field

Account/module access, curriculum assignment and business review authority are independent.

Before you begin

Keep learner/course/result/date/certificate identity and intended evidence audience.

Step-by-step

  1. Start with the assignment chain

    Account Admin saves curriculum selection; TrainingProgress stores completed cards/latest scores; a certificate belongs to that progress. Assigning curriculum does not grant module access or finish learning.

  2. Retain real completion evidence

    Use the actual learner, course, score/completion and certificate dates. A course catalogue count, assignment or page visit is not completion evidence.

  3. Cite it in the owning workflow

    For ISO/C5/EU AI/NIS2/SoA, Supplier, Risk or Document evidence, record the relevant identity/date/scope explicitly. This manual citation does not implement a control or automatically update an assessment answer.

    Use the owning evidence field

  4. Keep policy content separate

    ISP/Document Dialog changes do not automatically rewrite curriculum, and course completion is not a universal signed policy acknowledgement or legal AI-literacy determination.

  5. Keep provider/technical work separate

    Training has no dedicated Jira/Confluence create/publish, Scanner execution or VA closure action. Any such follow-up belongs to its separately governed owning module.

  6. Review queries and lifecycle correctly

    Ask training queries read information; they do not submit answers or create certificates. Unassignment retains history, while owner Renewal deliberately resets progress and deletes the old certificate; retain evidence first.

    Renewal reset and retention

  7. Use the correct reporting population

    Assigned-only reports differ from optional/all-progress and global certificate counters. Preserve the intended learner/course population when citing an aggregate.

Relationship reference — stored actions and manual evidence
Related moduleConnectionAction, saved result and boundaryInstructions
User ManagementStored assignment + privileged navigationAccount Admin edits curriculum roles. Training Admin report access alone cannot save assignments.Open guide
Progress / certificateStored learner-role chainCards/latest quiz scores qualify certificate; owner renewal resets progress and deletes old certificate.Open guide
Ask amaraPermitted information queryReturned progress/course information is not quiz submission, progress write or certificate generation.Open guide
EU AI / ISO / C5 / NIS2 / SoAManual course evidenceCite learner/course/result/dates/certificate in the owning evidence field; no automatic control or legal certification.Open guide
Risk / SupplierManual responsibility/evidenceLearning is not treatment effectiveness validation or supplier assurance approval.Open guide
Document Dialog / ISPManual policy contextPolicy edits do not rewrite the course; training completion is not universal policy acknowledgement.Open guide
Jira / ConfluenceNo dedicated Training provider actionAny external follow-up/sharing uses a separately governed workflow; no Training creation/publish button is promised.Open guide
VA / ScannerNo technical closure handoffA passed quiz cannot start scanning, approve CVE relevance or verify remediation.Open guide
ReportsCurrent learner-data exportAssigned-role counts and optional exploration differ by view; recipient/privacy scope applies.Open guide

Check the result

Identifiable learning evidence connected by an explicit citation, not assumed automatic propagation.

Current limits and common mistakes

Passing a quiz is not a Treatment effectiveness test, Supplier approval, legal verdict or CVE verification.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Ask amara connections

Know whether the answer concerns stored records, reference documents or an optional connector.

A supported answer is not a saved module decision

Ask helps locate and interpret permitted evidence. It does not turn advice into an approved assessment, completed treatment or certificate.

Where to start

Ask amara → underlying record/source link

Use your permitted application session and enabled capabilities. The answer's scope follows its governed sources and optional connectors.

Before you begin

Know whether the answer concerns stored records, reference documents or an optional connector.

Step-by-step

  1. Open factual sources

    Asset/CIA/Supplier/Risk/VA answers need the underlying record and its actual scope.

  2. Check policy sources

    Open the retrieved ISP/document reference; generated source labels or recommendations can be incorrect.

  3. Separate query from action

    Supported record reads and external lookups do not grant permission to save, approve or delete module work. Use the owning workflow’s deliberate action.

  4. Check scanner claims

    Use the persisted scan state and actual findings when evaluating an answer about security evidence. A pending scan or fabricated example is not a real finding.

  5. Use Universe for orientation

    The website companion helps explore relationships and scenarios. It is separate from the current application’s role/tenant-controlled records.

  6. Separate provider query from a stored handoff

    Jira/Azure/AWS/Confluence answers can read external account data. They do not automatically import Assets or store an owning-module reference.

  7. Recognize the one actual execution handoff

    A structured authorized Security scan capability can create a real persisted Scan job/reference. It is not merely conversational guidance; free-text execution alone does not launch it.

  8. Keep retrieval independent of versions

    ISP/RAG/module-index sources return permitted excerpts. They are not DocumentVersions, an approval event or unlimited file access.

  9. Keep browser/provider/audit lifecycles separate

    Clear affects current-tab memory; provider thread/session and audit records remain distinct. Context setup is not durable organisation configuration.

Carry a checked answer into a saved decision

  1. Read the exact source

    For an Asset question, reopen that Asset and distinguish its stored criticality from its approved CIA context. For an external page, check Page ID, source time and accessible content.

  2. Choose the owning action

    Use Link Supplier to save an Asset–Supplier relationship, the assessment form to save an answer, or Create Jira Ticket to create external work. Asking about the relationship performs none of these.

  3. Check after the handoff

    Reopen the same local record and confirm the new relationship or decision. A conversational explanation or provider search result is not proof a local reference was saved.

Structured authorised scan execution is the important exception: it can create a persisted Scan job. Queued still needs separate result review and any VA verification.

Check the result

Assistance whose evidence can be followed and checked.

What each connection does

Module / sourceOperationMeaning and limitsProcedure
Internal recordsDefined query serviceProjection only; per-handler scope and access differ. No automatic module CRUD/approval.Open guide
ISP / RAG / module indexSource retrievalExcerpts are not DocumentVersions or policy approval; cited module index exposes fixed At a Glance only.Open guide
Jira / Azure / AWS / ConfluenceExternal queryNot an Asset import, stored owning reference, ticket creation or page publication merely because returned in chat.Open guide
Security ScanningStructured execution handoffAuthorised selected capability can queue a real Scan job/reference; typed execution alone does not.Open guide
Browser / provider / auditSeparate retention layersClear affects current tab; does not erase thread/session/server/audit/corpus or retract content.Open guide
Pro administrationProviders / rules / routingReal persisted administration, not working ordinary Settings preferences.Open guide
Document / SoA / Risk / Supplier / VA / TrainingReviewed evidence useUse the owning workflow explicitly; an answer is not approval, certification or verification.Open guide
UniverseWebsite companionConceptual orientation separate from permitted application records.Open guide

Current limits and common mistakes

Ask is an assistant to the workflow. It is not the authority that approves records or guarantees that a proposed connection exists.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Administration connections

Identify whether the task concerns access, imported facts, external work or retained evidence.

Account roles change access; approvals have separate workflows

Account roles, training assignments, VA roles, audit views and module approvals are separate records and controls.

Where to start

Admin → users/integration activity/pending reviews

Use administrator access for administrator actions; own-account setup/profile and integration access have their own checks.

Before you begin

Identify whether the task concerns access, imported facts, external work or retained evidence.

Step-by-step

  1. Set module access

    User Management controls roles and account state, not the approval outcome of an assessment or supplier.

  2. Review provider handoffs

    Integration Activity and Pending Reviews can expose external reference/status events. Inspect the originating record and approve/dismiss only the offered scoped review.

  3. Import cloud inventory

    Azure/AWS resource import creates local asset context; CIA, supplier linking, risk and scan work still need their own actions.

  4. Manage document sources deliberately

    RAG upload/search supports retrieval when enabled; there is no visible Delete control. These corpus actions are separate from editing a Document Dialog version or ISP source.

  5. Retain the audit window

    Changing Activity Log’s active display window retains older records in Archive. It is not a log reset/delete action or backup-retention setting.

  6. Follow account access into modules

    User Management changes account identity, activation and application roles. Check access separately from a CIA/Supplier approval, a Risk decision or a VA reviewer grant.

  7. Follow training assignment into learning evidence

    Edit User replaces curriculum assignment rows. My Courses and Training Admin analytics show different projections; unassignment does not erase prior progress/certificates or grant Training access.

  8. Follow AI administration into queries

    Pro provider/rule/routing changes affect configured handling; RAG ingestion creates searchable chunks. Ordinary Ask Settings is not a saved preferences editor and Admin rule Test is not end-to-end privacy verification.

  9. Follow integration activity into decisions

    A provider response/refreshed cache is evidence. A local Asset import creates inventory; a pending review approval may cascade into Treatment/Risk. Inspect the exact originating record and gate.

  10. Follow audit output into reporting

    Activity CSV is filtered/capped; Audit Snapshot is current HTML. Retain source context and use the separate approved recovery procedure for an actual backup.

Follow an approved Jira review to its actual target

  1. Select the reference

    In Pending Reviews, identify the selected owning reference, external issue ID and Risk. The displayed latest Treatment can differ from the first eligible Treatment selected by approval.

  2. Approve only eligible work

    The risk-assessment chain can select the first noncompleted Treatment at≥90%, complete it at 100% and mark Risk Mitigated. A scan reference alone does not trigger that same cascade.

  3. Inspect siblings and dismissal

    Approval can stamp sibling references for that external ID and process related events. Dismiss applies to the selected reference and does not complete work or reopen Jira.

RAG upload/search has no visible Delete control. Cloud imports create inventory, account roles grant access, and review approval changes business records; they are not interchangeable administrative actions.

Check the result

Access and integration context supporting the owning module’s work.

What each connection does

Module / sourceOperationMeaning and limitsProcedure
Accounts → modulesStored access flagsOwning-module, record, stage and endpoint guards differ; Admin is not universal approval.Open guide
Accounts → TrainingCurriculum assignment replacementSeparate from Training access, progress and certificates; unassignment retains prior learning evidence.Open guide
Accounts → VATenant IT Owner grant/revokeNot full reviewer/Risk Owner/administrative role management.Open guide
Account recovery → authenticationPassword / MFA mutationsImmediate reset; MFA uncheck can disable existing setup. Recovery delivery/enrolment remain separate.Open guide
Pro / RAG → AskRouting/rule/corpus changesGeneric upload defaults knowledge-base and starts on selection. Searchable content is not document approval.Open guide
Pending Review → Treatment / RiskConsequential reviewEligible approval can complete Treatment and mark Risk mitigated; VA verification remains independent.Open guide
Activity → report evidenceFiltered UTC view/exportWindow retains archive; cap and signed browsing are not full backup/immutable report.Open guide
Inventory → AssetExplicit CSV creationDuplicates/partial commits/ignored asset_id; not identity-preserving restoration.Open guide
Audit Snapshot → evidenceCurrent aggregate HTMLDifferent from a saved VA report run or database backup.Open guide

Current limits and common mistakes

Online/Healthy labels describe readiness checks rather than every provider operation or workflow guarantee.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

amara Universe companion

Choose a relationship or scenario you want to understand.

Universe explains concepts; Help supplies procedures; the application owns real records

Conceptual scenarios do not synchronise or change application records. Use the owning Help procedure and authorised application workflow.

Where to start

Ask website → Resources → amara Universe

The website companion and application account are separate surfaces.

Before you begin

Choose a concept or relationship you want to understand.

Step-by-step

  1. Open the companion

    Use the website’s Resources → amara Universe entry to explore the available concepts/scenarios. It is not a live inventory or an application record editor.

  2. Turn the concept into a task

    Return to this Help Center and choose the owning module/task. For an Asset dependency, use Asset connections; for an approval or verification, use that exact workflow.

    Choose the operational guide

  3. Open the actual application record

    Check current identity, scope, status and permission before acting. A scenario cannot substitute for saved business or technical evidence.

    Example: actual Asset actions

  4. Keep the boundaries intact

    Follow the authorised create/update/review procedure in the application and check its saved outcome. Universe exploration does not synchronise records or bypass access.

Check the result

Conceptual orientation followed by a real procedure and source record.

Current limits and common mistakes

No registered Universe CRUD, approval or synchronisation module is established in the reviewed GRC application. This authoring does not change the companion website.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Application map reference
Shared records, stored links and explicit handoffs between the current amara modules

This application map provides orientation. The separate Universe website companion is not an application CRUD module.

Find a module or task

Choose the module that owns your intended task.

Find a control without guessing a module

Find the owning control, check its entry/access, and keep the selected record identity.

Where to start

Help Center → Find a module or task

Each linked guide states its own prerequisites.

Before you begin

Distinguish creating/changing records from reading reference material or exporting evidence.

Step-by-step

  1. Inventory and dependencies

    Use Asset registration/lifecycle/connections for resources; Supplier approval/assurance for dependencies; VA software/location/campaign guides for vulnerability work.

  2. Assessment and governance

    Choose CIA, Rapid, ISO/SoA, C5, EU AI or the separate NIS2 workflow. Risk owns exposure, Treatment and Acceptance; a framework gap is not automatically a saved Risk.

    Assessment choice

  3. Evidence and people

    Use Scanning for authorised observations, Document Dialog for maintained versions, policy reference for source reading, and Training for actual learning/progress/certificates.

    Document workflow

  4. Supporting capabilities

    Use Ask for supported queries/drafting, Admin for the offered account/configuration controls, Integrations for connector actions and Reporting for output scope. Hubs and references do not universally have Create/Edit/Delete.

  5. Follow the result check

    Keep the record ID and return to the owning list/view after a save. Open the relevant connections guide for the next handoff instead of assuming it happened automatically.

Check the result

A findable route for every documented task family.

Current limits and common mistakes

A declared route, disabled control or source-only template is not an offered customer workflow. The guides distinguish those cases.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 15 October 2026. Source guidance is separate from executed deployment/customer acceptance.

Account lifecycle

Create and maintain the intended user identity. Account deletion and MFA changes have effects beyond the displayed user row.

Account editing, recovery and deletion have different effects

Roles, curriculum, activation, passwords, MFA and owned records each have their own lifecycle.

Where to start

Admin Panel → User Management → Create User / Edit User

Account Admin access applies. Existing Admin-only handlers do not all implement an additional read-only guard; do not assume an Admin account is safe to use for read-only inspection.

Before you begin

Have the approved identity, access, training assignments, activation/expiry and recovery process ready.

Fields and decisions

ControlRequiredness / actionActual boundary
Username / EmailRequiredUsername 2–20; email valid. Changed/new values must be unique.
First Name / Last NameRequired on create≤80 each. Edit allows blank legacy names.
Password / Confirm PasswordRequired on create; optional on editAt least 12 characters; matching confirmation. Create prepopulates a generated password; blank edit keeps existing password.
Application rolesAt least oneRead Only must stand alone in the current form; do not combine with additive roles.
Active / Account Expiry DateAccount controlsInactive cannot log in; blank expiry means no expiry. Activation is not a module approval.
Require MFASecurity-sensitiveUnchecking during Edit can disable/reset already-enabled MFA.
VA IT OwnerModule-local assignmentSynchronizes the tenant VA role; it is not the full VA role catalogue.
Training roles / primary roleEdit User assignment controlsReplaces assignment rows, not learner progress/certificates.

Step-by-step

  1. Open the intended user identity

    Use User Management and confirm Username/Email and current account state. Choose Create User for a genuinely new account, Edit User for that existing identity.

  2. Enter new-account details

    Complete names, unique username/email, password and matching confirmation. Generate Password changes the proposed form value; Copy places the secret on the clipboard. Neither saves credentials until Save User. Review the secret privately, away from screenshots/support messages.

  3. Choose approved access

    Select at least one offered role. Current form rejects Read Only combined with additive roles. General Assessments is separate from dedicated NIS2; Scanner and VA have their own gates.

  4. Set activation and expiry

    Choose Active and an optional Account Expiry Date. Save User, correct validation errors, reopen the list and confirm that inactive/expired status matches the intended access.

  5. Verify default learning assignment

    New-user creation attempts to assign General Staff (FUNC_OPS) as primary when that role exists. Curriculum assignment does not grant the Training application-access flag or prove completion; verify access and My Courses separately.

  6. Edit the existing identity

    Change intended values on the same account. Blank Password on Edit preserves it; filling Password replaces it. Reopen after Save User to verify persistence.

  7. Review MFA before saving an edit

    If enrolled MFA must remain, keep Require MFA as intended. Unchecking it can call the administrative reset and disable existing MFA; it is not merely removing a future-enrolment reminder.

  8. Maintain curriculum deliberately

    Edit User’s training roles and primary role, then Save. The handler replaces assignment rows. Unassignment alone does not erase prior progress or certificates; Training Admin’s reporting page is not this write permission.

  9. Use activation rather than deletion for access suspension

    The explicit status action changes Active. The handler prevents self-deactivation. Inspect the target and resulting state; this is not provider IAM revocation, anonymisation, universal session purge, supplier approval or risk closure.

  10. Reset a password through the approved recovery process

    Reset Password generates and commits a new password, then shows it once through the separate recovery display. Refreshing/reopening may lose that display. There is no automatic email delivery in this handler. Deliver it through the approved secure process; reconcile before resetting again.

  11. Reset MFA as a separate recovery action

    Administrative Reset MFA clears the account’s enrolled MFA data. The user must enrol again under the account’s remaining requirement. This is separate from password reset or ordinary status change.

  12. Review deletion’s wider scope before confirming

    Delete User refuses every Admin target and self-deletion, not only deletion of a sole Admin. Inspect the offered confirmation and target-specific result. Its handler attempts removal of owned/related data including Assets, Suppliers, CIA/NIS2 records, approval logs and Training assignments/progress/certificates. It is not archival or ordinary offboarding.

  13. Check the actual outcome and retention obligations

    Deletion can fail and roll back. Read the result and re-open User Management; do not promise that a clicked Delete erased every external copy or produced recoverable history.

  14. Verify module work separately

    Roles grant access; CIA, Supplier, Risk, VA and document workflows retain their own approval/verification decisions. Use their original record references when resolving ownership or review needs.

Find, update and hand off one account

  1. Find the correct user

    Use View All Users or View Roles. Filter by offered role and Active/Inactive status; search names, username or email. Reset Filters before concluding an account is absent.

  2. Review create defaults

    Active and Require MFA start checked. Complete names, unique username/email, password≥12 characters and matching confirmation. Check the roles and optional ISO expiry before Save User; after validation failure recheck those security controls.

  3. Review training before Save

    On Edit, select the curriculum roles and primary role from selected choices. Blank password keeps the existing password. Save and reopen the same identity to verify access, enrolment policy and assignments.

  4. Handle password outputs privately

    Generate fills and displays a proposed 12-character password using a noncryptographic browser generator; it does not guarantee every character class. Reset Password saves a new secret before its one-time display. Copy may fail; Print opens a new window containing credentials. Use approved private handoff and printing, not screenshots or public email.

For suspension use Active, not Delete. The current delete route blocks every Admin target and self-deletion; inspect its confirmation and dependent-record scope. Generated/reset passwords are not automatic delivery, forced-change enforcement or external IAM revocation.

Access choices and learning assignments
PurposeOffered application controlsKeep separate
Administration / inspectionAdmin; Read OnlyRead Only must stand alone; Admin is not a safe substitute.
OperationsAsset Management; Supplier Due Diligence; Risk AssessmentBusiness approval and treatment decisions.
FrameworksGeneral Assessments; Rapid Assessment; ISO 27001 Assessment; CIA Assessment; BSI C5 Assessment; EU AI Act AssessmentGeneral access does not complete individual workflows.
Dedicated compliance / documentsNIS2 Compliance Assessment; Document DialogSaved document versions and NIS2 remediation decisions.
LearningTraining; Training AdminCurriculum role assignments, primary role and course evidence.
Connections / securityIntegrations; Security Scanning; Vulnerability Assurance — IT OwnerScanner write/target guards and VA Reviewer/Risk Owner grants.

Check the result

The intended account and access state, with security/recovery actions distinguished from approval and record retention.

Current limits and common mistakes

These are current-source instructions, not complete permissions/cascade/security UAT. Never use an ordinary account edit or Delete as a substitute for approved security and retention decisions.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. Documented controls are separate from verified outcomes in your deployment.

AI pipeline, providers and rules

System Settings displays configuration. Ask amara Pro has separate administrator controls that can change providers, query rules and routing.

Inspect configuration; change only the intended AI policy

Provider readiness, saved policy, rule explanation and actual query execution are distinct facts.

Where to start

Admin Panel → Ask amara Pro; System Settings for configuration inspection

Account Admin access and available Pro components apply. These administrator changes are not learner preferences or a harmless chat display option.

Before you begin

Use an approved processing/routing policy and understand the external data boundary before changing any setting.

Fields and decisions

ControlRequiredness / actionActual boundary
Provider enabled toggleImmediate saveSaves on change; local_nemo cannot be disabled through this handler. Configured credentials do not prove successful dispatch.
Keywords / ReasonRequired rule inputsBlock or Sensitivity rules. Keywords compile as a pattern; invalid patterns return an error.
Sensitivity LevelOffered rule controlNew sensitivity rules offer Elevated / High / Critical; Standard can appear on existing edited rules. Existing level changes save immediately.
Active rule toggle / Edit / Delete RuleSeparate mutationsToggle/level persist on change; edit uses its Save; built-in defaults can return after configuration/runtime remerge.
Strict / Balanced / PermissivePrivacy-confidence choiceDisplayed 0.3 / 0.5 / 0.7. Save Pipeline Settings applies the choice; labels do not guarantee complete masking.
Local Tier / Mid Tier / Complex TierRouter defaultsChoose the offered provider keys under approved policy, then save pipeline settings.
Test queryNonempty inputTests compliance-rule explanation; not an end-to-end provider/privacy assurance test.

Step-by-step

  1. Inspect the displayed status first

    Read Pro enabled/component status, provider configuration and recent dispatch evidence. Opening configuration can seed default JSON files when absent. When Pro is disabled, the UI shows a notice and hides dashboard controls. The backend can still load or seed defaults; that does not mean the disabled UI exposes them or that any provider call succeeds.

  2. Separate System Settings from this editor

    System Settings is a read-only environment display with credential-presence indicators and masked database password. It does not save .env changes or a universal organisation profile.

  3. Change a provider only under the agreed boundary

    The provider switch saves immediately through its toggle handler. Inspect returned status; local_nemo is protected from disabling here. Do not toggle while assuming Save Pipeline Settings will later confirm everything.

  4. Add a block rule

    Enter Keywords and Reason in Block Rules and use its Add action. The handler requires nonempty values, converts keywords to a pattern and validates that pattern.

  5. Add a sensitivity rule

    Enter Keywords, Reason and the offered Level in Sensitivity Rules. Review the effect on query classification, then Add and inspect the saved row.

  6. Edit or activate a rule deliberately

    Use the row’s Edit/Save for changed wording. Active switches and existing sensitivity Level changes save immediately. Read errors rather than treating an unsaved visible input as an active rule.

  7. Delete a rule only when intended

    Use Delete Rule and inspect the remaining set. Removal is distinct from disabling, and can change which later requests are blocked or classified.

  8. Test rule interpretation with non-sensitive text

    Use the rule test query to inspect the compliance explanation. A successful rule match does not test every downstream privacy recognizer, provider or retrieval source.

  9. Set privacy confidence and router defaults

    Choose Strict, Balanced or Permissive and the Local/Mid/Complex Tier defaults offered by this deployment. Do not infer that a named tier guarantees local-only processing.

  10. Save Pipeline Settings and reopen

    This explicit save applies pipeline settings and attempts runtime component reload. Inspect success/failure, reopen and confirm displayed values; configuration save is not an external operation’s UAT.

  11. Review later real routing evidence

    Use governed audit/source information to distinguish planned provider, actual provider, fallback/failure and response. A browser session’s local/cloud choice is separate from global pipeline administration.

Check the saved rule and its precise match

  1. Separate immediate and explicit saves

    Provider switches, rule Active toggles and existing sensitivity-level changes save immediately. Edit wording uses its row Save; privacy threshold and tier defaults use Save Pipeline Settings.

  2. Add only an offered sensitivity level

    New rules offer Elevated, High and Critical; Standard can exist on an edited rule. Highest matching sensitivity wins. That classification is separate from PII detector confidence.

  3. Use a harmless match example

    Keywords—not a rendered Pattern field—are transformed into regex. Harmless example: input alpha,beta creates a start-boundary pattern, so alphaX matches and xalpha does not. Raw regex \balpha\b requires a boundary at both ends and does not match alphaX. Edit starts with humanized display text; saving that text can change the pattern, so test harmless positive/negative phrases again and inspect the loaded rule.

  4. Check default-rule removal

    Deleting a built-in rule can be undone by configuration/runtime remerge. Reopen and check the loaded rule before assuming it is permanently gone; disable/delete/custom edit have different effects.

Local Tier offers local_nemo, Mid Tier mistral_eu, and Complex Tier anthropic/openai/mistral_eu. These are routing defaults, not provider availability or privacy certification.

Check the result

A deliberately reviewed configuration/rule change, with its saved state and runtime evidence kept distinct.

Current limits and common mistakes

No universal privacy, accuracy, latency or data-residency guarantee follows from Strict/Local/Pro labels. Not every Admin mutation has a separate read-only guard. This documentation performs none of these changes.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. Documented controls are separate from verified outcomes in your deployment.

Knowledge sources and RAG

Manage the retrieval corpus separately from Document Dialog versions. The current upload interface has no private-corpus selector and starts ingestion when a file is selected or dropped.

Approve the corpus scope before selecting a document

This visual describes the offered RAG interface. It is not an instruction to upload confidential data.

Where to start

Admin Panel → RAG document administration

Account Admin and enabled/available RAG service are required. Search of the corpus is separate from ordinary Ask’s governed retrieval route.

Before you begin

Use only material approved for this interface’s knowledge-base scope. Do not select a confidential file assuming there will be a later classification or upload confirmation.

Fields and decisions

ControlRequiredness / actionActual boundary
Select/drop documentStarts upload immediatelyAllowed extensions: PDF, DOCX, TXT, MD, CSV, JSON. The UI sends the first selected file.
Corpus classificationNo rendered selectorThe handler defaults to knowledge-base. Backend customer-private support is not an offered UI option; anonymous retrieval can use knowledge-base content.
Search query / SearchNonempty queryResults show source, score and excerpt. These are matches, not proof the original document or every passage is correct.
Delete documentNo offered UI controlA guarded backend deletion route is not a user-facing delete procedure.

Step-by-step

  1. Check service status and approved scope

    Read RAG availability and the corpus statistics. Current Chroma/SentenceTransformer setup needs cached dependencies/model for offline operation; no air-gapped readiness is guaranteed. An unavailable service is a failure/disabled state, not proof that no organisational documents exist.

  2. Review the file before opening the chooser

    Confirm source ownership, approved audience and the material’s suitability for knowledge-base retrieval. There is no visible private/public selector in this upload interface.

  3. Select or drop a supported file deliberately

    File selection/drop immediately posts the first file for ingestion. There is no separate Upload confirmation step. Do not use a real sensitive document merely to inspect the chooser behavior.

  4. Inspect ingestion feedback

    Read success/failure and resulting statistics. Allowed file extension is not a malware scan, independent authenticity check or policy approval.

  5. Search for a concrete passage

    Enter a nonempty query and choose Search, or use the supported Enter submission. Inspect returned Source, similarity Score and content excerpt (up to 500 characters), then verify the source independently where required.

  6. Use retrieved content as evidence, not instructions

    Corpus text is source material. An indexed claim or proposed action does not grant access, complete an assessment or change a saved record.

  7. Maintain content through the responsible workflow

    No Delete button or metadata/corpus-tier editor is rendered here. Request the approved maintenance procedure for removal/correction; do not treat backend endpoint presence as an offered normal-user control.

  8. Keep versioning and retrieval separate

    Saving or deleting a Document Dialog version does not automatically ingest or retract it here. An RAG excerpt is not the full selected document version or proof of its effective date.

Ingest a source without assuming version replacement

  1. Approve the audience before choosing a file

    The normal interface tags uploads knowledge-base and offers no private/public or category selector. A semantically private file is not made private by its contents. Use only approved knowledge-base material here.

  2. Understand ingestion

    Selecting/dropping the first supported file starts sequential chunk creation. Configurable defaults target 512 tokens with a whole-sentence overlap budget of up to 50 tokens, a shared collection and path-derived chunk IDs. These are not character counts: the chunker splits sentences and a long whole sentence can exceed the target. Reusing a filename is not a transactional version replacement.

  3. Reconcile a partial failure

    Some chunks may already exist after a later error. Check the reported ingestion outcome and use the responsible maintenance process before another upload; there is no visible Delete or rollback action.

  4. Interpret Search

    Default search requests up to five matches with minimum score 0.7. Filename boosts can produce scores above 1; they are not probabilities. PDF text and DOCX paragraph extraction do not promise images, scanned pages, all tables or complete structure.

Normal uploads do not add category=ISP, so they are not automatically eligible for governed ISP-topic retrieval. Empty search output can also follow an internal error; it is not proof the source is absent.

Check the result

A known-scope ingestion or retrieval result, with source and permitted audience explicitly reviewed.

Current limits and common mistakes

The default knowledge-base boundary is important. No UI private-corpus choice, automatic document-version sync or full recoverable corpus history is promised. No actual file was uploaded, searched or deleted for this Help task.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. Documented controls are separate from verified outcomes in your deployment.

Inventory transfer and Audit Snapshot

Admin Import/Export Data provides Asset CSV and a current HTML Audit Snapshot. CSV import creates records; it is not an identity-preserving restore.

Admin CSV import creates Assets; it does not restore identity

This is the Account Admin importer. Main Asset Management HTML export and operator recovery are separate.

Where to start

Account Admin → Import/Export Data → Export CSV / Import CSV / View Audit Snapshot

Use the current Account Admin and endpoint-specific access. These exports can contain private inventory; this Help work performs no data retrieval or import.

Before you begin

Know whether you need inventory evidence, new-Asset creation or a current aggregate view. Review duplicates, field losses and recovery coverage before importing.

Controls and inputs

ControlUse it forImportant boundary
CSV File → ImportRequired file with name/category/status columnsCase-insensitive headings; comma/semicolon detection; supported decode fallback.
Categoryhardware / software / data / service / facilityInvalid rows may be skipped, not universally rolled back.
Statusactive / inactive / maintenance / retired / unknownOptional invalid dates/numbers can become None.
asset_id / duplicate namesNo ID-preserving upsertImported IDs are ignored and duplicate names are allowed.
Date valuesUse explicit ISO datesSlash-date parsing tries US MM/DD before European DD/MM.
View Audit SnapshotCurrent bounded aggregate HTMLNot a persisted VA run, database backup or restore wizard.

Step-by-step

  1. Open Import/Export Data

    Choose Export CSV for current Asset fields, Import CSV for deliberate new-record creation, or View Audit Snapshot for aggregate evidence.

  2. Inspect export coverage

    Admin Asset CSV includes id, asset_id, name, category, status, location, owner, description and created_at. Main Asset Management Export Assets is a separate HTML report.

  3. Retain inventory as scoped evidence

    Review intended records and audience. CSV does not contain every relationship, CIA approval, document body, VA installation or external identity needed for full recovery.

  4. Prepare import columns

    Provide name, category and status headings; case is normalized. Comma/semicolon separators and UTF-8 BOM/Windows1252/Latin1 fallback are supported by the handler.

  5. Validate rows and date ambiguity

    Use listed category/status values and explicit ISO dates. Optional malformed dates/numbers can become None; slash dates try MM/DD before DD/MM.

  6. Review duplicate and identity effects

    The importer creates new Assets, permits repeated names and never honours imported asset_id. Re-importing an export is not an ID-preserving restore or update of existing records.

  7. Select CSV File and Import only deliberately

    This is a local database mutation. Read feedback for imported/skipped/error counts; valid rows can commit despite bad rows.

  8. Reconcile partial commit outcomes

    After an initial commit the handler fills generated AST IDs for all database Assets missing IDs, not just uploaded rows. A later failure can occur after records were already committed; inspect before retrying.

  9. Open the resulting Asset records

    Check generated identity, owner/user context, category, status, address and provenance. Legacy imported criticality is not current approved CIA classification or automatic VA/software evidence.

  10. Restore relationships only through their owning workflows

    CIA, Supplier, scan eligibility, software installations and Risk need their supported deliberate actions. Do not infer recovery of those records from imported CSV fields.

  11. Read View Audit Snapshot separately

    The aggregate HTML projects current local database and policy/document/reference context. Some lists/body coverage are bounded; a count is not proof every body was included.

  12. Use Save as HTML or Print Report where offered

    Review the output before sharing. Browser Save as PDF is separate, and this current view is not a stored immutable environment backup.

  13. Use the operator’s recovery procedure for restoration

    Do not substitute inventory transfer or Audit Snapshot for the approved full source/database/configuration/file/provider recovery mechanism.

Prepare a CSV that creates the intended Assets

  1. Use a small reviewed example

    The required headings are name,category,status. A synthetic row Help Example,hardware,active creates a new Asset when valid; importing it again can create another, not update the first.

  2. Check optional dates and money

    Prefer yyyy-mm-dd dates and decimal points. US slash dates are tried before day-first dates. Purchase cost 12,50 is parsed as 1250 after comma removal, not 12.50. Invalid optional dates/numbers can become empty values.

  3. Check fields that cannot be restored

    id/asset_id/created_at do not restore identity; IP address and hostname are not imported. Add the authorised target in Asset Management after verifying the newly created record.

  4. Inspect both commit stages

    Valid records commit first; filling missing AST IDs is a later commit and can fail after those records exist. Reconcile imported/skipped counts and saved records before reimporting.

Then use the Asset’s CIA assessment, Supplier link, software inventory and scan actions separately. View Audit Snapshot is reporting, not restoration.

Exact CSV schema and a synthetic example
ColumnsInput rule
name, category, statusRequired headings; valid required row values. Category: hardware/software/data/service/facility. Status: active/inactive/maintenance/retired/unknown.
subcategory, description, manufacturer, model, version, serial_numberOptional descriptive context.
purchase_date, warranty_expiryOptional; prefer yyyy-mm-dd to avoid ambiguous slash dates.
purchase_costOptional; decimal point, not decimal comma. Currency marks and commas are stripped before parsing.
location, owner, condition, criticality, maintenance_schedule, notesOptional stored Asset fields, not restored relationship/approval records.
id, asset_id, created_at, IP address, hostnameNot identity/address restoration inputs. Enter authorised target context after creation.
name,category,status,owner,purchase_date,purchase_cost
Help Example,hardware,active,Example Team,2026-10-14,1250.50

Illustration only: importing a valid row creates a new Asset. Export CSV has nine different columns: id, asset_id, name, category, status, location, owner, description, created_at. It is not the importer’s full field set.

Check the result

A reviewed inventory export, deliberate new-Asset import or current aggregate HTML view, each with its distinct coverage.

Current limits and common mistakes

No universal backup/ZIP/restore, complete transaction rollback or automatic reciprocal relationship recreation is promised. Source inspection is not an actual import or private-data UAT.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Integration connections and side effects

Trace the exact owner and direction. External evidence, saved local links, generated work and review decisions are separate operations.

MCP connectors meet the owning amara record

Connector-and-core layout restored from the saved MCP graphic, with current operation boundaries. Open the full MCP architecture reference; it is not deployment acceptance or a universal Ask route.

Where to start

Owning record → external references; Account Admin → Integration Activity / Pending Reviews

Owning-module, provider/Integrations and action-specific guards apply. A Help link grants none of them.

Before you begin

Have the exact local record, provider reference and intended action; distinguish direct links from derived chains.

Step-by-step

  1. Start with the typed owner

    Confirm Asset, Risk, CIA, Supplier, Document, framework assessment, scan or VA case and the reference’s entity ID. Display labels are not universal stable foreign-key guarantees.

  2. Inspect direct and derived references

    Assets can display chain children. Scanner Risk/Treatment creation may match Asset name+scan type/open state; framework response-typed references can carry assessment IDs. Check the actual record instead of trusting the label alone.

  3. Separate read, refresh and write

    Search/health can contact providers. Reference Refresh can also change local status/progress. Confluence Link can persist locally and stamp externally. Publish and Jira creation transmit content and save references.

  4. Follow cloud evidence into inventory

    Azure live resource fetch/import and AWS latest-cache EC2 import create/reopen an Asset deliberately. They do not provision local Users, copy IAM rights or establish installed software.

  5. Follow Jira into the owner-specific chain

    Risk and Scanner Jira can ensure Treatment/Risk context; Asset, CIA, Supplier and Document reference creation does not approve their business workflows. VA preserves its own case linkage and verified-location process.

  6. Review terminal status and pending work

    Done/Resolved/Closed/Won’t Do/Cancelled can surface pending review and 90% Treatment progress. Read the actual event and chain, not only the external status word.

  7. Make the consequential approval

    Account Admin Approve can stamp sibling references and, on the eligible Risk chain, complete Treatment and mark Risk Mitigated. Dismiss records review without that completion. Inspect the resulting records.

  8. Complete independent verification

    Risk Validate and VA reviewer/location verification are separate. A clean scan, issue closure or Admin review is evidence, not universal closure of VA or every linked treatment.

  9. Keep documents and policy versions explicit

    Confluence Publish sends current saved body/upserts same-title page. Selected historical DocumentVersion export is separate. ISP hash-based reference keys are not guaranteed stable across processes.

  10. Use unsupported relationships honestly

    No direct Rapid/Training Jira creation or Supplier/VA/Training/Rapid Confluence link/publish control is established here. Use reviewed manual evidence through a supported owner instead.

  11. Reconcile uncertain outcomes before retries

    Provider success can outlive failed local linking. Read references, Integration Activity and source state before duplicating a ticket, stamp, publication or import.

Trace one ticket without inventing reciprocal links

  1. Record the identities

    For a Risk-origin ticket, retain the Risk ID, Jira key and typed local reference. An Asset-name match or a derived chain display is not a new stable Asset foreign key.

  2. Read the status handoff

    A supported Refresh reads Jira and can update local status/notices and Treatment progress. Shared default refresh URLs are not correctly owned by every Asset/CIA/Document caller; use only its supported owning path.

  3. Review the decision

    Inspect Pending Reviews and the selected reference. Eligible risk-assessment approval can complete its qualifying Treatment and mark Risk Mitigated; selecting a scan reference alone is not that cascade.

  4. Verify the separate work

    Reopen the actual Risk/Treatment and then any affected VA location. Jira closure and Admin review do not change framework answers, approve CIA or make VA Verified.

For Confluence, keep local reference, external stamp and published body distinct. For cloud, keep saved sync evidence and the imported Asset distinct.

Check the result

A traceable owner/provider chain whose stored and external effects are understood.

What each connection does

Module / sourceOperationMeaning and limitsProcedure
Asset / CIA / Supplier / Document → JiraTyped local referenceNot internal approval; owner route and generated payload differ.Open guide
Risk / Scanner → JiraLocal governance chainCan ensure/create Risk/Treatment; not equivalent to direct finding→Create Risk.Open guide
Jira → Treatment / RiskStatus then human reviewCan progress 90%; eligible Account Admin approval can complete/mitigate. VA still needs verification.Open guide
VA → JiraCase and assurance linkInitial confirmed affected open work; external Done means awaiting verification, not Verified.Open guide
Asset / Risk / CIA / NIS2 / ISP → ConfluenceLink plus external stampNot merely a local bookmark; duplicate protection varies.Open guide
Document → ConfluenceCurrent-body publication/upsertNot historical-version publication, local version save, automatic republish or policy approval.Open guide
Azure / AWS → AssetExplicit resource importAzure resolves current resource; AWS resolves latest saved EC2 cache. VA starts disabled.Open guide
Cloud IAM → local UsersNo automatic provisioningSync evidence does not create accounts or transfer cloud access rights.Open guide
Ask → providersSupported queryDoes not store every external reference/import or silently create an issue.Open guide
Health / Activity → readiness/evidenceSignal and event projectionNot complete operational acceptance, notification delivery or immutable audit.Open guide

Current limits and common mistakes

Shared reference Refresh defaults to Risk’s API in callers that omit their own URL; correct owning-record refresh across Asset/CIA/Document is not promised. Existing provider, notification and UAT qualifications remain.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.

Report evidence and connections

Track source, output and decision separately. Reports do not approve or synchronize related work.

Keep the source, output and approval evidence together

Current projections, frozen snapshots and version bodies support reviewed evidence, not universal certification.

Where to start

Owning report → source record / selected version / saved run

Use the source module’s report access and separate sharing approval. Report-generation write gates vary.

Before you begin

Identify whether this output is current projection, saved VA snapshot or selected DocumentVersion.

Step-by-step

  1. Trace the output to its owner

    Record the module, permanent record/evaluation/assessment ID, tenant/population, selected domains, filters and generation time. Use the owning guide for changes.

  2. Read current projections as current

    Risk, Supplier, Asset and many framework/Admin HTML reports recompute saved current records. Same-ID reassessment/edit can change later output; a title or generation date is not immutable history.

  3. Read VA as a saved report run

    Create report stores input JSON, generator/version/hash and timestamp. View/download later retains that snapshot. Create anew for current workspace evidence.

  4. Read documents as stored versions

    Export can select a historical stored body. Confluence Publish sends current body and has independent external version/upsert behavior; neither operation approves the local policy.

  5. Retain the underlying decision

    Keep CIA/Supplier phase evidence, Risk Acceptance details, Treatment validation, VA verification and policy/training evidence beside the output as required. Report generation performs none of them.

  6. Reuse evidence through explicit citation

    Report evidence can inform Documents, SoA, Risk, Supplier, Training or VA reviews. This is reviewed citation/retention, not universal saved foreign-key links or automatic answer/approval synchronization.

  7. Check latest-state and removal semantics

    Training scores are latest-state maps; certificate renewal deletes/reset evidence. NIS2 edits can remove open manual plans. Old output must not be presented as current progress without checking.

  8. Treat printing and re-import separately

    Browser PDF needs its own output review. Admin CSV import creates new records and ignores asset_id; exported fields cannot restore all versions, relationships or decisions.

  9. Share only under the approved audience

    Private inventory, learner, provider and audit information can be present. An export control does not authorise disclosure or automatic recurring distribution.

  10. Return to the unresolved work

    A report can document open gaps and unknowns. It is not a certification, complete backup, remediation decision or evidence of external delivery.

Compare a current view with a saved baseline

  1. Label each artifact

    Record whether you retained a current Risk/framework/Supplier/Asset projection, a VA saved report run, or a selected DocumentVersion body.

  2. Follow a later change

    After an authorised source update, a newly requested current projection can differ. Opening the old VA run retains its saved inputs; exporting the same historical DocumentVersion retains that stored body.

  3. Compare like for like

    Keep ID, domains/filters, population, version/run and time aligned. A Confluence current-body publication has separate remote history and does not replace the selected historical export.

  4. Return to decisions

    Retain Treatment validation, acceptance record, CIA approval or VA verification independently. A report can support these decisions; generation, downloading and printing perform none of them.

Review citations are manual evidence use, not universal stored reciprocal links or synchronised assessment answers.

Check the result

Evidence whose source and lifecycle can be explained without overstating approval, freshness or recoverability.

What each connection does

Module / sourceOperationMeaning and limitsProcedure
Framework / CIA → HTML outputSelected evaluation/assessmentCurrent scope/answer projection, not certification or approval.Open guide
Asset / Supplier / Risk → reportCurrent stored recordsApproval, assurance and full Acceptance remain their own evidence.Open guide
VA → saved ReportRunFrozen inputs/generator/hashView does not recompute; create a new run for current work.Open guide
DocumentVersion → exportSelected stored bodyCurrent-body Confluence publication has separate history and side effects.Open guide
Training → CSV/HTML/certificateAssigned population/latest stateNot complete attempt history; renewal removes prior certificate/progress context.Open guide
Scanner → report/CSVScope-specific technical evidenceRollups and scan rows are not raw CVE confirmation or automatic closure.Open guide
Report → SoA / Risk / Supplier / Documents / VAReviewed citationNo universal persisted crosslink or answer/approval synchronization.Open guide
CSV → Asset importNew-record creationIgnored asset_id, partial errors, duplicates; not complete recovery.Open guide
Audit CSV / Snapshot → evidenceBounded projectionsNeither is database backup, restore or universal immutable history.Open guide

Current limits and common mistakes

No universal reporting hub, immutable all-module report history, complete ZIP package, native format set or scheduled mail delivery is established.

Continue in a related module

Application-source review: 14 October 2026. A documented control is separate from a verified outcome in your deployment.